Omni 6600

Firmware Revisions 20/24.71

Liquid: Turbine/PD/ Coriolis Meters with K Factor Factor/Viscosity Linearization

W

elcome to Omni Flow Computers’

System Architecture and Installation

User Manual for Revisions 20/24.71. Each of the selectable buttons allows for easy access to your area of interest.

Basic Operation

Configuration and Advanced Operation

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Technical Bulletins

Effective April 1998

Measure the Difference!

®



®

Volume 5

Compendium of Technical Bulletins

About Our Company Measure the Difference!

Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the world’s leading manufacturer and supplier of panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.

Omni flow computers Our products are currently being used world-wide at: ❑ Offshore oil and gas production facilities ❑ Crude oil, refined products, LPG, NGL and gas transmission lines ❑ Storage, truck and marine loading/offloading terminals ❑ Refineries; petrochemical and cogeneration plants.

Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the “brain” and “cash register” of liquid and gas flow metering systems. Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy, intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber. Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.

Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters

Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300 Stafford, Texas 77477 USA

Phone:

281-240-6161

Fax:

281-240-6162

World-wide Web Site: http://www.omniflow.com

E-mail Addresses: [email protected] [email protected]

Getting User Support Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the location nearest you or our corporate offices. Our staff and representatives will enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation of your flow computer.

ALL.71+ 04/98

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

1

Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual

Manual Guide

About the Flow Computer Applications Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current application revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are: ❑ Revision 20/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K Factor Linearization US/metric units) ❑ Revision 21/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units) ❑ Revision 22/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization - US/metric units) ❑ Revision 23/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas (US/metric units)

Flow

Metering

Systems

About the User Manual This manual applies to Versions .71+ application revisions of Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal part of your flow computer documentation.

Target Audience As a user’s reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual. However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users: ❑ Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation ♦ Installers ♦ System/Project Managers ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ♦ Operators ❑ Volume 2. Basic Operation ♦ All Users ❑ Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ❑ Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers ♦ Engineers/Programmers ♦ Advanced Operators ❑ Volume 5. Technical Bulletins ♦ Users with different levels of expertise.

2


ALL.71+ 04/98

Volume 5


Manual Structure The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of each volume.

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units. This volume describes: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Basic hardware/software features Installation practices Calibration procedures Flow computer specifications

Volume 2. Basic Operation User Reference Documentation - The User Manual is structured into five volumes. Volumes 1 and 5 are generic to all flow computer application revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are application specific. These have four versions each, published in separate documents; i.e., one per application revision per volume. You will receive the version that corresponds to your application revision. The volumes respective to each application revision are: Revision 20/24.71: Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a Revision 21/25.71: Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b Revision 22/26.71: Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c Revision 23/27.71: Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d For example, if your flow computer application revision is 20/24.71, you will be supplied with Volumes 2a, 3a & 4a, along with Volumes 1 & 5.

This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and metric units are considered. General computer-related features are described, such as: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

The application-related topics may include: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Batching operations Proving functions PID control functions Audit trail Other application specific functions

Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of each version of this volume.

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application revision). This volume covers: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

ALL.71+ 04/98

Overview of keypad functions Adjusting the display Clearing and viewing alarms Computer totalizing Printing and customizing reports

Application overview Flow computer configuration data entry User-programmable functions Modbus Protocol implementation Flow equations and algorithms


3


Manual Guide

Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per application revision.

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins Manual Updates and Technical Bulletins Volume 5 of the User Manual is a compendium of Technical Bulletins. They contain updates to the user manual. You can view and print updates from our website: http://www.omniflow.com

Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical specifications, procedures, and other information of interest. This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from our website.

Conventions Used in this Manual Typographical Conventions - These are standard graphical/text elements used to denote types of information. For your convenience, a few conventions where established in the manual’s layout design. These highlight important information of interest to the reader and are easily caught by the eye.

Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you to quickly identify distinct types of information. CONVENTION USED Sidebar Notes / InfoTips Example: INFO - Sidebar notes are used to highlight important information in a concise manner.

Keys / Keypress Sequences Example: [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]

DESCRIPTION Sidebar notes or “InfoTips” consist of concise information of interest which is enclosed in a grayshaded box placed on the left margin of a page. These refer to topics that are either next to them, or on the same or facing page. It is highly recommended that you read them. Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the ‘up arrow’ key is denoted as [ ]). The actual function of the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what appears between brackets. Keypress sequences that are executed from the flow computer keypad are expressed in a series of keys separated by a space (as shown in the example).

Screen Displays Example:

4

Sample screens that correspond to the flow computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray border with the text in bold face characters and mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text shown in the manual.


ALL.71+ 04/98

Volume 5


CONVENTION USED Headings Example:

2. Chapter Heading 2.3. Section Heading

DESCRIPTION Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize topics within each volume of the User Manual. The highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided into sections, which are likewise subdivided into subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates information organization and cross-referencing.

2.3.1. Subsection Heading

Figure Captions Example: Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of Chapter 2

Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are preceded by the chapter number followed by a hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located on the outside margin in the footer of each page.

Page Numbers Example:

2-8 Application Revision and Effective Publication Date Examples: All.71 20/24.71 21/25.71 22/26.71 23/27.71

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they appear in each chapter. The first number identifies the chapter, followed by the sequence number and title of the illustration.

03/98 03/98 03/98 03/98 03/98

The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are common to all application revisions and are denoted as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are application specific and are identified with the application number. These identifiers are included on every page in the inside margin of the footer, opposite the page number. The publication/effective date of the manual follows the application identification. The date is expressed as month/year (e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).

Trademark References The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.: ❏ Omni 3000 ❏ Omni 6000 ❏ OmniCom Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners.

ALL.71+ 04/98


5


Manual Guide

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this document without notice.

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Important!

Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni Flow Computer Firmware and of OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using your Omni Flow Computer and the supplied software and documentation. If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information about their flow computer and metering system.

Copyright 1991-1998 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

6


ALL.71+ 04/98



®

Volume 1


SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND INSTALLATION

Contents of Volume 1 Figures of Volume 1 ........................................................................................................ vi 1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features ....................................................... 1-1 1.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................1-1 1.2. Operator’s Panel.....................................................................................................1-2 1.2.1. LCD Display ........................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers................................................................................ 1-2 1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs ............................................................................. 1-2 1.2.4. Active Alarm LED................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED ..................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.6. Operator Keypad ................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board .........................................................................1-4 1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module .................................................................................1-6 1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations ...................................................................................... 1-6 1.4.2. Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................ 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module......................................................................................1-8

ALL.71+ w 04/98


i

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

Contents of Volume 1

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules..................................................................................... 1-9 1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation........................................................................................ 1-10 1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules............................................................................................... 1-11 1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules .......................................................................... 1-12 RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205....................................................... 1-12 Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 .................................. 1-15 Serial Port Assignments ........................................................................................... 1-15 1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules ..................................................................... 1-16

1.7. Operating Power .................................................................................................. 1-17 1.8. Firmware and Software ........................................................................................ 1-19 1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU............................................................................................ 1-19 1.8.2. Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 1-19 1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration................................................................... 1-19 1.8.4. PC Communications Interface............................................................................. 1-19 1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software.............................................................. 1-20 1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance ......................................................................................... 1-20

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer .......................................................................... 1-21 2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup............................................................. 2-1 2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules ..................................................................... 2-1 2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules ........................................................2-2 2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers ............................................................2-2 2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points..................2-2 2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs..........................................................................2-3 2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts ...........................................2-4

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules .......................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address.........................2-7 2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module .............................................................................2-8 2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module ........................................................................... 2-10

2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules........................................................................... 2-11 2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................ 2-11 2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module ........................................................................... 2-12

2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................ 2-13 2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-15 2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-16 ii


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


3. Mounting and Power Options................................................................................... 3-1 3.1. Mechanical Installation...........................................................................................3-1 3.1.1. Panel Mounting...................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2 3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................. 3-2

3.2. Input Power .............................................................................................................3-3 3.2.1. AC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2. DC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.3. Safety Considerations........................................................................................... 3-3

3.3. Power Terminals .....................................................................................................3-4 3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals........................................................................... 3-4 3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ............................................................... 3-5

3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator..........................................................3-7

4. Connecting to Flowmeters ....................................................................................... 4-1 4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module)..........................................................4-1 4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules .........................................4-2 4.3. Faure Herman  Turbine Meters (E Combo Module) ............................................4-3 4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules...................4-4

5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters........................................................ 5-1 5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers ................................................................................5-1 5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact ...........................................................................5-2 5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .................................................................................................5-3 5.4. Wiring Densitometers .............................................................................................5-4 5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ............................ 5-4 5.4.2. Solartron  Densitometers .................................................................................... 5-4 5.4.3. Sarasota  Densitometers ..................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.4. UGC  Densitometers ............................................................................................ 5-8

5.5. Wiring of Honeywell  ST3000 Transmitters .......................................................5-10 5.6. Wiring Micro Motion  Transmitters.....................................................................5-11 5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion  RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination Modules ..................................................................... 5-11 5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion  RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications...... 5-12 5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion  RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter .... 5-13 ALL.71+ w 04/98


iii



6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers ............... 6-1 6.1. Analog Outputs....................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................ 6-2 6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ...................................................6-2 6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices................................................................6-4

6.3. Provers.................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches .........................................................6-5 6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks  Compact Prover ...........................................................6-5 6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks  Compact Prover.......................6-6

7. Connecting to Serial Devices .................................................................................. 7-1 7.1. Serial Port Connection Options ............................................................................ 7-1 7.2. Connecting to Printers........................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)...........................................................7-2 7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ...............................................................7-3 7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems .........................................................................................7-3

7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ................................................ 7-4 7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes......................................... 7-6 7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ..................................................7-6 7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................7-7 7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications.....7-7 7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode .......................................................................7-8

7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device ............................................................................ 7-9 7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley  KE Module................. 7-10

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features....................................................................... 8-1 8.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 8-1 8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode ....................................................................... 8-2 8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode..............................................................................8-2 8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode...............................................................8-3 8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode...............................................................................8-3

iv


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


8.3. Calibration Instructions ..........................................................................................8-4 8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input.................................................... 8-4 8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel........................................................................ 8-5 8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output .............................................. 8-7 8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points ................................................. 8-8

9. Flow Computer Specifications ............................................................................... 9-1 9.1. Environmental.........................................................................................................9-1 9.2. Electrical..................................................................................................................9-1 9.3. Microprocessor CPU ..............................................................................................9-1 9.4. Backplane ...............................................................................................................9-2 9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .................................................................9-2 9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs..........................................................................................9-2 9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ...........................................................................................9-3 9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module .........................................................9-3 9.9. Analog Inputs ..........................................................................................................9-3 9.10. RTD Inputs ............................................................................................................9-3 9.11. Analog Outputs .....................................................................................................9-4 9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs .............................................................................9-4 9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface................................................................................9-5 9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible .............................................................................................. 9-5 9.13.2. RS-485 .................................................................................................................. 9-5

9.14. Operator Keypad ..................................................................................................9-5 9.15. LCD Display...........................................................................................................9-5 9.16. Electromechanical Counters................................................................................9-6 9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs...........................................................................9-6 9.18. Security .................................................................................................................9-6

ALL.71+ w 04/98


v



Figures of Volume 1 Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel ....................................................................................1-3 Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 .........................................................................1-4 Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 .........................................................................1-5 Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000............................................................1-6 Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) ..................................................1-7 Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings .........................................................................1-8 Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ....................................................1-9 Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ................................................................................. 1-10 Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ............................................................. 1-11 Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators................. 1-12 Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................... 1-13 Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205.................................................... 1-14 Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................... 1-15 Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118............................................................................. 1-18 Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000 ..................................................................2-4 Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000 ..................................................................2-5 Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers .....................................................2-6 Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address.............................................2-7 Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ...................2-8 Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings.........................................................2-9 Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup ........................ 2-10 Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ........................................................................ 2-11 Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ........................................................................... 2-12 Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ......................................................................... 2-13 Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-15 Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings 2-16 Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) ......................................................3-1 Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ...........................................3-4 Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ..........................................3-5 Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)....................................................3-6 Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)....................................................3-6 Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118....................................................................................3-7

vi


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) .................................................. 4-1 Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)................................................. 4-2 Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC......................................................... 4-3 Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman  Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC ................................................. 4-3 Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................... 4-4 Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................... 5-1 Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact .............................................................................................. 5-2 Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ............................................................................. 5-3 Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron  Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module ...... 5-4 Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron  Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module . 5-5 Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota  Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module....... 5-6 Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota  Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module.. 5-7 Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC  Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module............. 5-8 Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC  Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module........ 5-9 Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell  Smart Transmitter ....................................................................... 5-10 Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion  RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter .............. 5-11 Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion  RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) ...................................... 5-12 Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter.............................................................................................................. 5-13 Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs........................................................ 6-1 Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input ................................................................................ 6-2 Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output.............................................................................. 6-3 Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................... 6-4 Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks  Compact Prover ................................................................................... 6-5 Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks  Compact Prover ........................................... 6-6

ALL.71+ w 04/98


vii



Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer .................................................7-2 Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer ......................................................7-3 Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)................................................................................................................................7-4 Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .........................................7-5 Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem ............................................................................................7-5 Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode .......................................................................7-6 Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C Communications. ...................................................................................................................7-7 Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode .....................................................................................................7-8 Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem .....................................................7-9 Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley  KE Communications Module................................ 7-10 Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel.................................................................8-6

viii


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features 1.1. BASIC FEATURES - Omni flow computers are applicable to liquid and gas flow measurement, control and communication systems, and custody transfer operations. It’s basic features are: q 32-bit processing with math co-processor for fast, multi-tasking execution q 500 msec calculation cycle q Plug-in, assignable digital, serial and combination I/O modules q Point-to-point digital transmitter interface q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature trimmed q No I/O multiplexers, no potentiometers q Photo-optical Isolation of each I/O point q Meter pulse fidelity checking q Optional Honeywell and Rosemount digital transmitter interface modules q Dual LEDs indicate active/fused digital I/O q Selectable digital I/O, individually fused q Standard, field-proven firmware no need for custom programming q User-configurable control logic q Up to 4 flow/pressure control loops q User-configurable variables for displays and reports (Continues…)

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Introduction

Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use, uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases. Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided. Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications, and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with significant digital I/O capability. Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing functions. The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its nonrestrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements. Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and Honeywell digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.


1-1


1.2. BASIC FEATURES (Continued) q Data archive and report storage q Modbus peer-to-peer communications to 38.4kbps for PLC/DCS q Real-time dial-up for diagnostics q International testing q Includes OmniCom configuration software q Three year warranty

For Your Information

Operator’s Panel

The operator’s panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the serial ports.

1.2.1.

LCD Display

The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the displayed instructions).

1.2.2.

Electromechanical Totalizers

Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.

1.2.3.

Diagnostic and Program LEDs

These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.

1.2.4.

Active Alarm LED

New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key on the keypad.

1.2.5. INFO - Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice will put the shift lock on. The shift lock is canceled by pressing one more time or automatically after the [Display/Enter] key is pressed. Help System - These computers are equipped with a powerful context-sensitive help system. Press the [Help] key (bottom right) twice to activate the help displays. Cancel the help screens by pressing the [Prog] key.

1-2

Alpha Shift LED

This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED indicates that the shift lock is on.

1.2.6.

Operator Keypad

Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data online, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamperproof security.


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


DIAGNOSTIC LED Glows green when in the Diagnostic Mode. Glows red when a valid password is entered.

LCD DISPLAY Is 4 lines by 20 characters. Backlight and viewing angle are adjustable via the keypad.

Flowrate FT-101 Cumulative FT-101

PROGRAM LED Glows green when in the Program Mode. Glows red when a valid password is entered.

BBL/Hr 1550.5 BBLS 234510

Total A

Total B

Total C

000682

009456

023975

DIAG/PROG KEY Used to access Diagnostic and Program Modes.

Diagnostic

Alpha Shift

Diag Prog

OPERATOR KEYPAD Has 34 keys, domed membrane with tactile and audio feedback.

Alpha Shift Net

Gross

A

Press

G

H

Time

Counts

M

SPACE/CLEAR / CANCEL/ACK KEY Used to clear data and insert spaces in the Program Mode. It is also used to cancel key press sequences and, in the Display Mode, acknowledge alarms.

Fig. 1-1.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

:

Prove

, Cancel / Ack

Space Clear

2

Status

T

S

;

1

.

0 Input

(

)

Setup

W

Z

R

THREE-FUNCTION KEYS These activate process variable or alpha-numeric character functions.

=

Product

V

Output

Y

Analysis

Q

3

Alarms

U

L

*

Batch

P

ALPHA SHIFT LED Glows green for a single character shift. Glows red when the shift lock is on.

Meter

K

6

Preset

O

F /

Orifice

J

5

Factor

Control

E

9

D.P.

I

N

“

Print

Density

SG/API

D

8

4

$

Energy

C

7

Temp

#

Mass

B %

&

ACTIVE ALARM LED Glows red when a new alarm occurs. Glows green when an acknowledged alarm exists.

Active Alarm

Program

ARROW KEYS Used to move the cursor and scroll displays. Also used as software ‘zero’ and as span control during calibration.

THREE 6-DIGIT, ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS These non-resetable counters are assigned via the keypad.

X +

Help

Display Enter

DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP KEY Used to enter a key press sequence and to access the Help System.

Features of the Operator Front Panel


1-3


1.3. INFO - Passive backplane simply means that no active circuitry is contained on it. The active circuitry is contained on the modules that plug into it.


Passive Backplane Mother Board

Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3 other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and future product enhancements. The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4 on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni 6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on facing page.)

‹

CAUTION!

‹

These units have an integral cabinet latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards, before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 1-2.

1-4

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

‹

CAUTION!


‹

These units have an integral cabinet latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards, before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 1-3.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000


1-5


1.4.


Back Panel Terminal Module

The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating Power).

1.4.1.

Back Panel Terminations

The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11. The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.

Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are 3 amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.003. All AC fuses are ½ amp slow-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 229.500.

Fig. 1-4.

1-6

Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.4.2.

Extended Back Panel

Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet. For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3” x 18”), this panel incorporates all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3” x 8½”) also incorporates all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 and TB2.

Extended Back Panel AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses are ¼ amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.250. The AC fuse is ½ amp slow-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 239.500. The fuse for the back panel’s AC receptacle is a 5x20mm, ½ amp slow-blow.

Fig. 1-5.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)


1-7


1.5.


Central Processor Module

This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16 MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is restored.

‹

CAUTION!

‹

POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS! RAM Battery Backup Omni flow computers leave the factory with a fully charged Ni-Cd battery as RAM power backup. RAM data, including user configuration and I/O calibration data, may be lost if the flow computer is disconnected from external power for more than 30 days. Observe caution when storing the flow computer without power being applied for extended periods of time. The RAM back-up battery is rechargeable and will be fully charged after power has been applied for 24 hours.

Math Processor

Program EPROM

Program RAM

Archive RAM

Backup Batttery

J1

J2

EPROM Size 1 OR 4 Meg Bit Select 4 Meg As Shown

J3

Fig. 1-6.

1-8

Central Processor

System Watchdog J3 In = Enabled J3 Out = Disabled (Always Enabled)

Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.6.

Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise and prevents damage to the electronics. Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules: o Digital I/O Modules o Serial I/O Modules o Process I/O Combo Modules ♦ A and B Type Combo Modules ♦ E and E/D Type Combo Modules ♦ H Type Combo Modules Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer. The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000). Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard termination layout.

TB6

TB7

TB8

TB9

TB10

24

Digital I/O 1-12 12 13

TB2

TB3

TB4

24

Fig. 1-7.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

TB1

1

Combo I/O # 2

Combo I/O # 6

Combo I/O # 1

TB5

Combo I/O # 5

Serial I/O 3 & 4

TB4

Combo I/O # 4

Serial I/O 1 & 2

TB3

Combo I/O # 3

Digital I/O 13-24

TB2

Combo I/O # 2

12 13

Digital I/O 1 - 12

TB1

1

Omni 3000 Serial I/O 1 & 2

Omni 6000

Combo I/O # 1

INFO - Mother board connectors do not have a specific address. These are pre-established at the factory. Each Omni Flow Computer will be supplied with a termination diagram indicating these settings.

Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations


1-9


1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation Transducer signals are converted by the LED into high frequency pulses of light. These are sensed by the photo-transistor which passes the signal to the flow computer. Note that no electrical connection exists between the transducers and the computer circuits.

Photo-Optical Isolation

The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.

Pipeline Transducer Signals That May Pass On Damaging Transient Noise Fig. 1-8.

1-10


Opto Coupler IC

LED

Photo Transistor

Isolated Transducer Signals Passed On To Sensitive Computer Circuits

Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.6.2. INFO - Only 1 digital I/O module can be used on the Omni 3000 and a maximum of 2 on the Omni 6000.

Digital I/O Modules

Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote totalizing, sampler operation, tube control or injection pump control. A digital I/O module is used, providing a total of 12 digital I/O points. Each point can be configured independently as an input or output. It is individually fused and includes LEDs indicating that the point is active or if the fuse is blown. Sequence and control is provided by assigning outputs to user programmable Boolean variables using simple logic statements involving internal and external events, including delay-on timers and delay-off timers. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000.

Module Address Jumper

Interrupt Request Select Jumpers for Pipe Prover Detector

Select D1

I/O Point LEDs - Each digital I/O point has 2 LEDs (green and red) which indicate its status. A solid glowing green LED means that the digital point is assigned as an input and is receiving a signal. A blinking green LED indicates it is assigned as an output and that it is actively communicating. A solid glowing red LED denotes that the fuse for that I/O point is blown.

JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4

A5

Select D2

A5

F3

F1

F6

F5

F4

F9

F8

F7

F12

F11

F10

I/O Point #01 JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers

Individual Fuses for Each I/O Point

Fig. 1-9.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

F2

LEDs Indicate Point Active and Fuse Blown #12

Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings


1-11


1.6.3.


Serial Communication Modules

RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205 INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computer must also have an SV Module to communicate with multivariable transmitters. This serial module is jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an SV Module. Without an SV Module, the jumper is placed at IRQ 2. The SV Module can only be used with this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 68-6005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable. In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports are available on each module.

Address Selection Jumpers Address S1 Selected

Address S2 Selected

LED Indicators IRQ 2 Selected

Port #2 Jumpers

Port #1 Jumpers

Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators

1-12


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485 communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #1, and JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #2 for each format.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-485

RS-485 2-WIRE

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED

RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The RS-485 devices located at each extreme end of an RS485 run should be terminated. Note that the device located at an extreme end may or may not be an Omni Flow Computer.

JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED

JB3 or JB6

JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-232/485 NON-TERMINATED RS-232

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232

RS-485 4-WIRE TERMINATED JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-485 TERMINATED


JB3 or JB6

JB1 or JB4

RS-232/485 RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-232

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 2-WIRE RS-232

RS-485 TERMINATED

Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

ALL.71+ w 04/98


1-13



Omni 6000 (Omni 3000) Terminal TB3 (TB2)

Note: Users of Micro Motion RFT 9739 devices connected the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal (A) from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni 7 and (B) from the RFT must be wired to Terminal 11.

First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

B

TX-B

2

TERM





3

RX



RX-A

4

GND

GND

GND

5

RTS

A

TX-A

6

RDY



RX-B

7

TX

B

TX-B

8

TERM





9

RX



RX-A

10

GND

GND

GND

11

RTS

A

TX-A

12

RDY



RX-B

Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205

1-14


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

INFO - Up to 12 flow computers can be multidropped to one RS-232C serial device. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

S1

Serial Ports 1 & 2 Use the S1 Module Setting

S0

Serial Ports 3 & 4 Use the S0 Module Setting

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. B

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. A

LED Indicators

RX In RDY In RX In

Chan. A Chan. B

RDY In

Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings

Serial Port Assignments The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the OmniCom Configuration PC Software. The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels. The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any of these ports. The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC devices.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


1-15


1.6.4.


Process I/O Combination Modules

Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital (A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available with “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer, 4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs. All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs (except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs). Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV. All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters, and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible multivariable transmitters. The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which selects the type and address of each module. INFO - The flow computer allocates the physical I/O point numbers according to the module ID’s, not the position occupied on the backplane.

Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity i.e., you cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid ID’s are: A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed. Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV and HV Modules. The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 “Process I/O Combo Module Setup”.)

1-16


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.7. Operating Power - The indicated power is maximum and includes the power used by transmitter loops, etc. It will vary depending on the number of modules installed, the number of current loops and any digital output loads connected.

‹

CAUTION!

‹


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Operating Power

Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered. When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20 mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle. To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals. All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up. A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA limit is to be exceeded. The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12 process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15ºF (8.33°C) over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF (43.33°C).


1-17


‹

CAUTION


‹

The Power Low and +5 v Adjust are factory adjustments that require the use of special equipment. DO NOT attempt to adjust.

AC Connector

Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118

1-18


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.8.

Firmware and Software

Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of combined flow measurement tasks, such as: o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving o Flow and Sampler Control o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable Transmitters o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC and SCADA Host Systems The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering system.

1.8.1.

Interrupt-Driven CPU

This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking. All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be accommodated.

1.8.2.

Cycle Time

All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions, such as opening or closing valves.

1.8.3.

On-line Diagnostics and Calibration

Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.

1.8.4.

PC Communications Interface

The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote technical intervention capabilities are also provided.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


1-19


1.8.5. INFO - Full details about the OmniCom configuration program are documented in Appendix C.

1-20

OmniCom Configuration PC Software

On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using an IBM PC compatible running the OmniCom program supplied with your flow computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.

1.8.6. INFO - The current firmware has been fully tested and assured to be in conformance to Year 2000 requirements. For more information, please contact our technical support staff.


Year 2000 Compliance

Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000 requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before, during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the expected results for all valid date values within the application.


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


1.9. ‹

CAUTION!

‹


Initializing Your Flow Computer

A processor reset signal is automatically generated when: 1) Power is applied. 2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled. 3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds. The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and randomaccess memory whenever any of the above events occur. The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum. The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next. This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the following message: RAM Data Invalid Reconfigure System Using “OMNI” as Initial Password If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area, the computer will display the following message: RAM & Calibrate Data Invalid, Reconfigure & Re-calibrate Using “OMNI” as Password Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O modules and displays a screen similar to the following:

INFO - For information on adjusting module configuration settings, see Volume 3.

Module S-Ware H-Ware A-1 Y Y B-1 Y N D-1 Y Y S-1 N Y Revision No. 023.70 EPROM Checksum 1B36 A ‘N’ in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since the software was configured. A ‘N’ in the software column indicates that a module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


1-21

Volume 1


2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup INFO - User selection of process I/O is available with “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer, 4-20mA, 4wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and fused 4-20mA outputs. Combo Module Input Features - The input characteristics of each combo module are as follows (see table on right): A Type: Each input can be 1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1 and #2 also accept RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 also accept flow pulse signals. B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1 and #2 also accept RTD. Input #3 also accepts flow pulses and Input #4 is fixed as a frequency density input. E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 are frequency density. E Type: Inputs #1 and #2 can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 accept flow pulses. H Type: All inputs are Honeywell DE Protocol. HV Type: All inputs are Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol. SV Type: Each port (#1 and #2) is capable of RS-485 multi-drop to various multivariable transmitters.

2.1.

Introduction

All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or “combo”) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types. The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.

2.2.

Features of the I/O Combo Modules

Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities. The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules are expressed in the following table.

INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE TYPE

INPUT #1

INPUT #2

INPUT #4

LEVEL A FIDELITY

DOUBLE CHRONOMETRY

PROVING A

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

B

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E/D

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Two 4-20mA

No

No

One 4-20mA

No

No

Frequency Density

Two 4-20mA

No

No

Flow Pulses

Two 4-20mA

Yes

Yes

1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses 1-5v; 4-20mA Flow Pulse

Frequency Density

H

Honeywell DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

No

No

HV

Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

No

No

Six 4-20mA

No

No

PORT #1 SV

ALL.71+ w 04/98

INPUT #3

ANALOG OUTPUTS

PORT #2

RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters


2-1

Chapter 2

Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup

2.2.1.

Setting the Address of the Combo Modules

Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or E/D Type.

2.2.2.

Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers

Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept. This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.

2.2.3. ‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

Combo I/O modules are sorted alphabetically and by low- to-high address. Adding or removing cards may change the existing sort if the ‘Check I/O’ function is executed.

Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points

A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1) are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D modules come before the E modules!) To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3 in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).

PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS

2-2

M ODULE IDENTITY

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

BACKPLANE POSITION

PHYSICAL TERMINALS

A1

1-4

1&2

Slot 5

TB5 1-12

A2

5-8

3&4

Slot 6

TB6 1-12

B1

9-12

5

Slot 7

TB7 1-12

B2

13-16

6

Slot 8

TB8 1-12

E/D1

17-20

7&8

Slot 9

TB9 1-12

E1

21-24

9 & 10

Slot 10

TB10 1-12


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


2.2.4.

Assigning Specific Signal Inputs

The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to these assignments, refer to the section ‘Program Setup’ in Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration” and follow these basic rules: 1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D Module. 2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable. rd 3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3 channel of th each combo module and/or the 4 channel of each A Combo Module and E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).

4) Pulse signals to be used for ‘Pulse Fidelity Checking’ must be connected rd th to the 3 and 4 channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel assigned as the flow input. rd th 5) Use the 3 and 4 input channels of an E Combo Module for double chronometry proving.

INFO - The message ‘I/O’ Type Mismatch’ is displayed if you try to assign the same physical I/O point to more than one type of variable.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

6) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e., common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature and pressure, for example).


2-3

Chapter 2


2.2.5.

Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts

The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed, the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.

Fig. 2-1.

2-4

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________ S.O.#_______ SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER S/N__________________ MODEL #_________________________ TAG#__________________________

Fig. 2-2. ALL.71+ w 04/98

Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000


2-5

Chapter 2


2.3.

The A and B Combo I/O Modules

All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers providing electrical isolation. All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically ±0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than ±15 PPM/°F. Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by jumpering-in a 250 ohm shunt resistor. The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted. Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12 kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis ±0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to Solartron type densitometers. Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A softwarecontrolled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters. Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.

A/B Module Type Select Jumper

AC / DC Coupling Channel # 4 Input

Channel #4 Pulse Input Threshold

Input Channel #4

Input Channel #3

Input Channel #2

Input Channel #1

Module Address Jumpers 2nd. RTD Excitation Source or 2nd Digital-Analog Output

Fig. 2-3.

2-6

Input Type Select Jumpers

The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 420 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available, therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.

2.3.1.

A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address

The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a selectable Address. The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic (PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be changed by replacing the PAL chip. The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni. Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection jumpers.

Non-Selectable Address

Selectable Address

TYPE B SELECT ONLY COMBO ADDRESS SELECT (A0 SHOWN)

Fig. 2-4.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address


2-7

Chapter 2


2.3.2. INFO - The second analog output is not available in cases where JP12 is used to select the second RTD excitation current source. You may be able to avoid using the second RTD excitation source and save losing an analog output by using an unused excitation source on another combo module.

The A Type Combo I/O Module

The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into. A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)

TB? Terminal 2

Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)

TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7

Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9

RTD Excitation Current Source #1

TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)

TB? Terminal 12

Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See JP12 Setting)

JP11

Select ‘P’ (Pulse Type Input - Channel 3 or 4)

Chan 4 Threshold JP11 In = 3.5 VDC 4-20mA Jumper Out (Pulse Type Input) JP11

Select Module Type JPB Out = A Type

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module A0 A1 A2 #1 Out Out Out #2 In Out Out #3 Out In Out #4 In In Out #5 Out Out In #6 In Out In

Fig. 2-5.

2-8

JP12

RTD2

D/A2 JP12 In D/A2 Position JP13 In DC Coupled Position

A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4)


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


JP11

Select ‘A’ (Analog Type) Input JP11

4-20 mA Jumper In (Remove for 1-5VDC Input)

JP13 In DC Coupled Position for Preamp Turbine Meter Input (Channel 4)

Fig. 2-6.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Configured for Configured for Configured for 4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input RTD Input

A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings


2-9

Chapter 2


2.3.3. INFO - You will need either a B Type Combo Module or E/D Type Combo Module when using digital densitometers connected to the flow computer. With a B Type Combo Module, Analog Output #2 is never available because the periodic time function uses the internal timer counter that is normally used to generate the second analog output.

The B Type Combo I/O Module

The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4 is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into. B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)

TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7

Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)

TB? Terminal 12


JP11

Select ‘P’ (Pulse Type Input)

Channel 4 Threshold JP11 Out = Solartron & Sarasota JP11 In = UGC

JP11

Select Module Type JPB Out = A Type

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module A0 A1 A2 #1 Out Out Out #2 In Out Out #3 Out In Out #4 In In Out #5 Out Out In #6 In Out In

Fig. 2-7.

2-10

JP12

RTD2

D/A2 JP12 In RTD2 Position

Pulse (Frequency) Type Densitometer Requires AC Coupling - Channel 4

B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


2.4.

The E/D and E Combo Modules

The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be configured by the application software to provide “Level A Pulse Fidelity Checking” on the two pulse input channels.

2.4.1.

The E/D Type Combo I/O Module

The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into. E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 6

Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) * êêêêêêêêêêêêê

TB? Terminal 7

êêêêêêêêêêêêê

Not Used

TB? Terminal 8

RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *

TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)

TB? Terminal 11

Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *

TB? Terminal 12


Input Threshold Select JP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC

JP5

JP8 THRES

JP6 JP3

Select Module Type JPD In = E/D Module

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP5 JP8 THRES

JP2

JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 3

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6

A0 Out In Out In Out In

Fig. 2-8.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

A1 Out Out In In Out Out

JP5 A2 Out Out Out Out In In

JP2 JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 4 AC Coupling Select

AC DC AC INPUT 3

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

JP1 THRES

AC DC AC INPUT 4

JP4

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

DC Coupling Select

4-20 mA Selected

E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings


2-11

Chapter 2


2.4.2.

The E Type Combo I/O Module

The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.

E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5

Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 6

Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *

TB? Terminal 7

Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *

TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10

Signal Return for signals marked (*) return)

TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12


Input Threshold Select JP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC

(Internally connected to DC power

JP5

JP8 THRES

JP6 JP3

Select Module Type JPD Out = E Module

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP5 JP8 THRES

JP2

JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 3

Address Select (Address #2 Shown) Module #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6

A0 Out In Out In Out In

Fig. 2-9.

2-12

A1 Out Out In In Out Out

JP5 A2 Out Out Out Out In In

JP2 JP7 AC DC AC INPUT 4 AC Coupling Select

AC DC AC INPUT 3

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

JP1 THRES

AC DC AC INPUT 4

JP4

RTD 4-20 INPUT 1

JP6

RTD 4-20 INPUT 2

DC Coupling Select

4-20 mA Selected

E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


2.5.

The H Type Combo I/O Module

The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate using the Honeywell ‘DE Protocol’ with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature, pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters operating in the ‘analog mode’ are automatically given a ‘wake-up pulse’ and switched into the ‘DE’ Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.

H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)

TB? Terminal 2

Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)

TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5


TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8

Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Negative Terminal) êêêêêêêêêêêêê

TB? Terminal 9

Not Used

TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12




Module Address Jumpers

Green LED Indicates Any Activity Red LED Indicates OMNI is Transmitting

Transmitter Loop Status LEDs

Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 04/98


2-13

Chapter 2

Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow computer’s transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow computer’s database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer. Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the measured variable must be made via the flow computer. These entries are: o o o o

Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value) Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value) Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant) Transducer Tag Name

The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables. Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow computer (transducer tag name excepted).

2-14


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


2.6.

The HV Type Combo I/O Module

The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3 address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module is used to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module. Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more then one HV Combo I/O Module. Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into. HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1


TB? Terminal 2


TB? Terminal 3


TB? Terminal 4


TB? Terminal 5


TB? Terminal 6


TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8

Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Negative Terminal) êêêêêêêêêêêêê

TB? Terminal 9

Not Used

TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12




Module Address Jumpers

Green LED Indicates Any Activity Red LED Indicates OMNI is Transmitting

Transmitter Loop Status LEDs

Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings

ALL.71+ w 04/98


2-15

Chapter 2


2.7.

The SV Type Combo I/O Module

The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to communicate with devices such as Rosemount 3095 multivariable transmitters via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of the communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs. SV Modules and Other Combo Module Types The flow computer can handle only two SV Modules and three other A, B, E/D, E or H I/O Combo Modules. An HV module can also be installed in lieu of one of these I/O combo modules.

SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments TB? Terminal 1

Port #1 B (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 2

Port #1 A (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 3

Port #2 B (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 4

Port #2 A (RS-485)

TB? Terminal 5

Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 6

Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 7


TB? Terminal 8


TB? Terminal 9


TB? Terminal 10


TB? Terminal 11


TB? Terminal 12


Jumper In = 1st MV Module Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module

MV Address Selection Jumpers

IRQ 2 Always Selected

LED Indicators

PORT 1 (3)

PORT 2 (4)

RTS Always Selected

Transmitting (TX)/Ready-toSend (RTS) LEDs Red Receiving LEDs Green

Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated

MV RS-485 Termination Jumpers

Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings

2-16


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


3. Mounting and Power Options 3.1.

Mechanical Installation

Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based on customer specified requirements: q Panel Mounting q NEMA 4/4X q NEMA 7

3.1.1. Panel Mounting - Panels less than 1/8 inch thick can be used but will require that the rear of the computer be supported.

‹

CAUTION!

Panel Mounting

A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.

‹

These units have an integral latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards before withdrawing the unit from the case.

‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

The maximum length of the ribbon cable that connects the keypad to the CPU module is 18 inches. The operation of the Central Processor Module (CPU) will be significantly affected if this length is exceeded.

Fig. 3-1.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)


3-1

Chapter 3

Mounting and Power Options

3.1.2.

Nema 4 / 4X Configurations

Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5’ x 3” viewing window with a ¼” lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures are available. NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000 Dimensions

Weight

24 in x 24 in x 12 in

80 lbs

(610 mm x 610 mm x 305 mm)

(36 kg)

3.1.3.

Compliance q NEMA 4, -12 & -13 q UL 50, Type 4 q CSA Enclosure 4 q IEC 529, IP66

Nema 7 Specification

The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is sustained by a 3” circular glass ½” thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification variances. Custom enclosures are available. NEMA 7 Dimensions

FOR OMNI 6000

Weight 120 lbs (54 kg)

12 in x 18 in x 9 in (305 mm x 457 mm x 203 mm)

Compliance q NEC

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

Division 1 & 2 Class I; Groups B, C & D Class II; Groups E, F & G Class III q IEC

♦ Zone 0 & 1 ♦ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA NEMA 7

FOR OMNI 3000

Dimensions

Weight

12 in x 12 in x 8 in (305 mm x 305 mm x 203 mm)

110 lbs (50 kg)

Compliance q NEC

♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

Division 1 & 2 Class I; Groups B, C & D Class II; Groups E, F & G Class III q IEC

♦ Zone 0 & 1 ♦ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA

3-2


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


3.2. INFO - A recommended maximum of 500mA of transducer loop power is available with a fully loaded system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The computer must be DC powered if this 500 mA limit is to be exceeded.

Input Power

The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.

3.2.1.

AC Power

When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block. Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the unit is powered by AC. The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.

‹

CAUTION!

‹


3.2.2.

DC Power

When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output terminals).

3.2.3.

Safety Considerations

To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow. Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing page).

ENVIRONMENTAL - The maximum system configuration of 24 process inputs, 12 process outputs, 24 digital I/O points and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature rise of 15ºF over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


3-3

Chapter 3


3.3. 3.3.1.

Power Terminals CE Equipment Power Terminals

In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni 3000). The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.

Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow Model 225.003, manufactured by Littlefuse. All AC fuses are ½ amp, slow-blow Model 229.500, manufactured by Littlefuse

Earth Ground Requirements -To minimize the effects of electrical transients, the outer case of the flow computer should be connected to a high quality earth ground using the grounding stud located on the back of the unit (see Fig. 3-2). Connect the shields of all wiring to the same grounding stud. To eliminate earth loop currents, shields should be left unconnected and taped back at the other end.

Fig. 3-2.

3-4

Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


3.3.2.

Extended Back Panel Power Terminals

Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.

¼ Amp

Extended Back Panel Fuses - All DC fuses are ¼ amp fast-blow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 225.250. The main DC fuse is 3 amp. The AC fuse is ½ amp slowblow manufactured by Littlefuse, Model 239.500. The fuse for the back panel’s AC receptacle is a 5x20mm, ½ amp slow-blow.

½ amp

3 Amp

Fig. 3-3.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)


3-5

Chapter 3

3-6


Fig. 3-4.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)

Fig. 3-5.

Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


3.4.

Power Supply Module Switching Regulator

All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals. Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.

‹

CAUTION

‹

The Power Low and +5 v Adjust on the Power Supply Module are factory adjustments that require the use of special equipment. DO NOT attempt to adjust

Fig. 3-6.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Power Supply Module Model 68-6118


3-7

Volume 1


4. Connecting to Flowmeters 4.1.

Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module)

Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals. Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis ± 1/2 volt.

Fig. 4-1.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)


4-1

Chapter 4

Connecting to Flowmeters

4.2.

Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules

Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5 volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is approximately 0.5 volt.

Fig. 4-2.

4-2

Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


4.3.

Faure Herman  Turbine Meters (E Combo Module)

Faure Herman Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module must be installed.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Fig. 4-3.

Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC

Fig. 4-4.

Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC


4-3

Chapter 4

Connecting to Flowmeters

4.4.

Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules

A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)

Fig. 4-5.

4-4

Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


5.

Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters 5.1.

Wiring the Input Transducers

Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and insulated at the transducer end. Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated. The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer wired in the power leg of the loop.

Fig. 5-1.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)


5-1

Chapter 5

Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters

5.2.

Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact

Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown below.

Fig. 5-2.

5-2

Wiring for Dry C Type Contact


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


5.3. INFO - Each A or B Type Combo Module always has 1 RTD excitation current source available at Terminal 9. A second source is always available on B Types at Terminal 12.

Wiring RTD Probes

Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the DIN 43-760 curve (α= 0.00385) or the American curve (α=0.00392). The probe is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.

TIP - The excitation current source for an RTD need not come from the same combo module from which the signal is input. You will need to recalibrate the input channel if you choose to use an excitation source from another combo module.

Fig. 5-3.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe


5-3

Chapter 5


5.4. 5.4.1. INFO - Because the density pulse signal can be a small AC signal with a large DC offset, you must select AC coupling and low trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the AC position and JP11 out; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the AC positions and JP1 and JP8 out. Input impedance will be 10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

Wiring Densitometers Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module

Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an E/D type combo module. For example, Solartron and UGC densitometers can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.

5.4.2.

Solartron  Densitometers

Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices: the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the needs of the application.

INFO - When configuring the flow computer, select the DIN curve for this RTD temperature point.

Fig. 5-4.

5-4

Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹

Diagrams shown are based on published manufacturers’, data. Omni accepts no responsibility for wiring or installation of equipment in a hazardous area. Equipment must always be installed in compliance with local and national safety standards.

Fig. 5-5.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module


5-5

Chapter 5


5.4.3. INFO - Because the density pulse signal can be a small AC signal with a large DC offset, you must select AC coupling and low trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the AC position and JP11 out; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the AC positions and JP1 and JP8 out. Input impedance will be 10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

Sarasota  Densitometers

The Sarasota Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the needs of the application.

Fig. 5-6.

Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module

INFO - When configuring the flow computer, select the DIN curve for this RTD temperature point.

5-6


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹


Fig. 5-7.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module


5-7

Chapter 5


5.4.4. INFO - Because the density pulse signal is a large DC pulse signal with little or no DC offset, you must select DC coupling with normal trigger threshold for the combo module channel used; i.e.: on the B Type Combo Modules, JP13 in the DC position and JP11 in; on E/D Combo Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the DC positions and JP1 and JP8 in. Input impedance will be 1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level and >4V.0 for high level is required from the densitometer to reliably trigger the input.

UGC  Densitometers

The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.

Fig. 5-8.

5-8

Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

‹

NOTICE!


‹


Fig. 5-9.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module


5-9

Chapter 5


5.5.

Wiring of Honeywell  ST3000 Transmitters

Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is required.

Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter

5-10


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


5.6. 5.6.1.

Wiring Micro Motion  Transmitters Connecting Micro Motion  RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination Modules

The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739 Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter

ALL.71+ w 04/98


5-11

Chapter 5


5.6.2.

Connecting Micro Motion  RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications

Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205, with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB980401.)

OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER) RS-485 MODE SELECTED 7 (B) 8 9 10 11 (A)

Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #686205)

5-12


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


5.6.3.

Connecting Micro Motion  RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter

Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peerto-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter

ALL.71+ w 04/98


5-13

Volume 1


6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers 6.1.

Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-toAnalog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution. Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is available on each B Type Combo Module. To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output. Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many variables available (see Volume 3).

Fig. 6-1.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs


6-1

Chapter 6

Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers

6.2. 6.2.1.

Digital Inputs/Outputs Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output

Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port. The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may blow.

Fig. 6-2.

6-2

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


Fig. 6-3.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output


6-3

Chapter 6


6.2.2.

Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices

On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #1’. This in turn is connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #2’ which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni 3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1 through 12 on the back panel. The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers, among other devices.

Fig. 6-4.

6-4

Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


6.3. 6.3.1. INFO - The prover detector switch signal activates an interrupt request into the computer. Jumpers JP1 and JP2 on the digital I/O module (Fig. 1-5) control which edge of the signal will cause the interrupt. Pulse counting should start when the sphere first activates the detector switch. Install JP1 in cases where the detector switch’s normally opened contacts are used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in cases where the detector switch’s normally closed contacts are used.

Note: When using double chronometry proving, the detector switch input is on Terminal 7 of an E Type Combo I/O Module.

Provers Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches

Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration (see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe proving is not needed.

6.3.2.

Interfacing to a Brooks  Compact Prover

The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooks Compact Prover Skid Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface involves one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to monitor the position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between each meter run to be proved. Compact provers use the ‘Pulse Interpolation Method’ of measuring the flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the Omni’s combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called ‘first and final pickoff’ by Brooks are connected to the ‘Detector Switch’ input of each E Type Combo Module installed in the flow computer. The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.

Fig. 6-5.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover


6-5

Chapter 6


6.3.3.

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks  Compact Prover

The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings. The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure, and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber. Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either or ‘vent’ solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via relays (not shown).

checks the the ‘charge’ some user low voltage

An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.

Fig. 6-6.

6-6

Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


7. Connecting to Serial Devices 7.1. INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

RS-485 Communications with an RS-232-C Serial I/O Module #68-6005 - When connecting to RS-485 serial devices using Serial I/O Module #68-6005, a RS-232to-485 Converter device must be used.

Serial Port Connection Options

The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules; the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #686005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term. RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers, programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop mode.

Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computer must also have an SV Module to communicate with RS-485 compatible multivariable transmitters. This serial module must be jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an SV Module. Without an SV Module, the jumper must be placed at IRQ 2. The SV Module can only be used with this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 686005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


7-1

Chapter 7

Connecting to Serial Devices

7.2. 7.2.1. INFO - The speed that data can be accepted by the printer depends on the size of the input buffer (if any) and the print mode (draft or near letter quality). Typical printers provide about 120 printed characters/second.

Connecting to Printers Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)

The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission rate to the printer speed.

TIP - Most printers default to the draft mode. Leave it there for maximum performance. Because of impact printer limitations, no speed improvement is obtained by selecting baud rates over 2.4kbps.

Fig. 7-1.

7-2

Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


7.2.2.

Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)

Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.

INFO - Note that only 1 terminating pull-down resistor is jumpered in place.

Fig. 7-2.

7.2.3. Note: Refer to Volume 3, Chapter 2 for Printer Settings.

Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer

Print Sharing Problems

Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and consult the following checklist if you experience problems: 1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and parity settings as the printer. 2) All computers must have the ‘Transmitter Key Delay’ set to ‘zero’ (0). 3) One and only one computer must have its ‘Printer Priority Number’ set to ‘1’. All computers must have a different priority number. 4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the ‘Printer Ready’ signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the printer is ready. 5) When not using the ‘Printer Ready’ signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.

ALL.71+ w 04/98


7-3

Chapter 7


7.3. Note:

*

Depending upon whether a printer or Allen-Bradley PLC is used.

Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem

Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the computer’s database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12 Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.


Fig. 7-3.

7-4

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1



ALL.71+ w 04/98

Fig. 7-4.

Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector

Fig. 7-5.

Connecting Port #2 to a Modem


7-5

Chapter 7


7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications - The peer-to-peer communication feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers and other devices in RS-485 serial communications mode, and up to 12 using RS-232-C communications.

Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers (see Technical Bulletin TB980402).

Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multidrop Modes

Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications.

7.4.1.

Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB980401.)

UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS

®

OmniCom and Peer-toPeer - The OmniCom Configuration PC Software package supplied with your Omni Flow Computer cannot be used on Serial Port #2 when it is being used as a peer-to-peer link.

B

GND

A

RS-485 TWO-WIRE TERMINATED

Fig. 7-6.

7-6

RS-485 TWO-WIRE NON-TERMINATED



Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


7.4.2.

Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical Bulletin #TB-980401.)

Fig. 7-7.

7.4.3. Note: Refer to Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration”.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C Communications.

Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications

Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.


7-7

Chapter 7


7.4.4.

RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205.

UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES SLAVE

SLAVE

TX-B

MASTER PLC DEVICE A RX B

RX-A

A GND

TX-A

RX-B

TX B

RS-485 TERMINATED

RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED

Fig. 7-8.

7-8

Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


7.5.

Connecting to a SCADA Device

When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the computer’s database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.

Fig. 7-9.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem


7-9

Chapter 7


7.6.

Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley  KE Module

Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradley devices using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.

Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications Module

7-10


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features 8.1.

Introduction

In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are working and are calibrated to specification. The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types, ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and opto-isolation. When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning, opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter, typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained. Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll through all inputs. A typical display shows: INFO - When viewing an analog input point, the frequency displayed approximates 1000Hz/mA. When viewing a turbine or photo pulsar signal, the display is the actual input frequency.

Input % Freq/Period #1 2530 Input % /Freq/Period #2 3021 Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.

INFO - 0.0% corresponds to 4mA. 100.0% corresponds to 20mA.

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Analog Output % #1 55.79 Analog Output % #2 34.10


8-1

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows: Power Applied Time: 09:10:30 Date: 01/21/91 Power Last Lost Time: 10:25:21 Date: 01/20/91 The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event of a power failure. Scrolling down further displays: Main Task Timing-Sec 20 mS Task 00.00 50 mS Task 00.00 100mS Task 00.01 500mS Task 00.04 Background 00.02 This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a problem.

8.2. INFO - The Diagnostic LED glows red after a valid password has been asked for and entered.

Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode

In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and manipulated.

8.2.1.

Entering The Diagnostic Mode

To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key, then the [Diag] key. INFO - The ‘Select Input/Output’ screen must be displayed when making a new selection while in the Diagnostic Mode. Return to this screen by pressing the [Diag] key once.

8-2

The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation The fourth line of the display is used to show the user’s selection. The user can choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of digital I/O points.

8.2.2. INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode

To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known, (usually supplied on a separate sheet).

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha Shift] [Diag] keys. Input Channels

(n = 1 through 24)

Meter Temperature Meter Pressure Meter Density

(n = 1 through 4)

(n = 1 through 4)

(n = 1 through 4)

[Input] or [Input] [n] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n] [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n] [Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]

Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4)

[Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]

Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4)

[Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]

Prover Temperature (Left, Right)

[Prove} [Temp]

Prover Pressure (Left, Right)

[Prove} [Temp]

Output Channels Digital I/O

8.2.3.

(n = 1 through 24)

(n = 1 or 2)

[Output] [n] [Status] [n]

Leaving The Diagnostic Mode

Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

ALL.71+ w 04/98


8-3

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.3. 8.3.1. Note: You can also calibrate the input and output of your choice by entering the number of that input or output; e.g.: Press [Input] [1] [Enter]; press [Output] [4] [Enter]. With this method you can calibrate the inputs and outputs to the computer without having them assigned to any I/O point numbers.

Calibration Instructions Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input

While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or the input # if known). The display shows: Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit Meter 1 Temp Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated. Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed: Temperature #1 Input# & Module 1-a1 Override 60.0 Calibrate Input ? _

INFO - Unless previously entered, a request for a valid password is made at this point. The calibrate override value entered will be substituted for all process variables assigned to this physical I/O point when the user answers [Y] to ‘Calibrate Input ?’. It is automatically removed when the user presses the [Diag] key to exit or make a new selection.

8-4

The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1 connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1. Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be used in all calculations in place of the live value. Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed: Meter 1 % Value Input Volts mA Value


27.5 50.00 3.000 12.00

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1

System Architecture and Installation To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to 5.000 V signal.

INFO - The []/[] keys are used as a software ‘Zero’ potentiometer. Adjustments made when the Shift LED is on are approximately ten times more sensitive. Holding the arrow keys longer than two seconds speeds up the rate of adjustment.

6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.

2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 4.000 mA / 1.000 V. 4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 20.000 mA / 5.000 V.

7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.

TIP - The Span adjustment has no effect at 4mA or 1v. Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first at exactly 4mA or 1v.

8.3.2.

Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input # if known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's Densitometer integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and [Density] [Meter] [1] [Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp] allows the user to scroll through all density temperature channels.

Calibrating an RTD Input Channel

Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:

! "#$ %! &'(' ) *

ALL.71+ 04/98


8-5

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and a screen similar to the following is displayed: Dens#1 Deg.F 65.0 % Value 60.00 Resistance Value Ohms 100.00 To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

INFO - Each input channel of each combo module has had its temperature coefficient trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To avoid temperature gradient effects and for best results, always allow the internal temperature of the computer to stabilize before making your final calibration adjustments.

1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box. capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.

INFO - Installing the decade box at the actual RTD probe location provides maximum accuracy, but can be inconvenient. The errors introduced by installing the decade box at the back panel terminals of the flow computer are approximately 0.01% per 100 ohms of field wiring resistance.

6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.

2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 25.00 Ohms. 4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads 150.00 Ohms.

7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen. Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit

TIP - The Span adjustment has no effect at 4mA or 1v. Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first at exactly 4mA or 1v.


Fig. 8-1.

8-6

Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


8.3.3.

Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output

Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00 mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows: While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1] [Display]. The display shows: Analog Output #1 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA Override % 0.00 Calibrate Output ? _

‹

CAUTION!

‹

At this point, the analog output reflects the value of the currently displayed override, not the assigned variable. The user must ensure that any equipment using the output signal will not cause an unsafe condition to arise or cause erroneous results to be generated.

Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows: Analog Output #1 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA Override % 0.00 Override Now Active To calibrate the output channel follow these steps: 1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load. 2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override. 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp meter indicates 4.00 mA. 4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp meter indicates 20.00 mA. 6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained. 7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.

Leaving the Diagnostic Mode - In the ‘Select Input/Output’ screen, press the [Diag] key to return to the 'Display Mode' (Diagnostic LED will turn off).

ALL.71+ w 04/98

Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit


8-7

Chapter 8

Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.3.4.

Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points

The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1] for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24. Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display] and a screen similar to the following is displayed: Digital#1 I/O Points Input 001011001011 Overide 101010101010 Force To Output ? _

‹

CAUTION!

‹

After answering [Y], the digital outputs will reflect the value of the currently displayed override, not the assigned variable. The user must ensure that any equipment using the output signal will not cause an unsafe condition to arise or cause erroneous results to be generated.

INFO - To avoid a hardware conflict, only points that have been assigned as outputs will accept an override of ‘1’; i.e., entering a ‘1’ at an input position will be ignored and displayed as a ‘0’.

The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0' indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the following is displayed: Digital#1 I/O Points Input 101110001101 Overide 101010101010 Override Now Active The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module. Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the [Diag] key is pressed. Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:


8-8

Select Input/Output to Calibrate, Press "Diag" to Exit


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


9. Flow Computer Specifications 9.1.

Operating Temperature : q -15°C to +65°C

‹ NOTICE! ‹ Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Environmental Storage Temperature : q -20°C to +75°C Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum

9.2.

Electrical Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer loops) q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 1830 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer loops) Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for configurations (when AC powered)

most

Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically isolated from computer logic supply q Maximum common mode voltage on any input or output is ± 250 VDC to chassis ground.

9.3.

Microprocessor CPU Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16 q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state; Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000 floating point operations/sec EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max. RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1 Mbytes max. Real Time Clock : q Battery backed-up, time of day; programmable interval down to 1 msec q Maintains time during power loss q Reports downtime on power-up Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC approx. Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable

Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed) ALL.71+ w 04/98


9-1

Chapter 9

Flow Computer Specifications

9.4.

Backplane Type : q Passive; configured connectors


with

plug-in

DIN

Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots q Omni 6000: 10 slots

9.5. TYPE

Process Input/Output Combo Modules INPUT #1

INPUT #2

INPUT #3

INPUT #4

1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses

ANALOG OUTPUTS Two 4-20mA

• Pipe Proving

One 4-20mA

• Pipe Proving

A

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

B

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

E/D

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Frequency Density

Two 4-20mA

E

1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD

Flow Pulses

Two 4-20mA

1-5v; 4-20mA Flow Pulse

Frequency Density

H

Honeywell DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

HV

Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol

Two 4-20mA

PORT #1 SV

9.6.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

• Pipe Proving • Double Chron. Proving • Level A Pulse Fidelity

PORT #2

RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters

Six 4-20mA

Flowmeter Pulse Inputs Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.

Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are single ended referenced to DC ret.) Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for frequency and sequence. E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel will not effect totalizing q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected with 85% certainty

9-2


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


9.7.

Detector Switch Inputs (Non-Double Chronometry)

‹ NOTICE! ‹

Input Type : q Voltage

Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops proves. Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC Power Return) Debounce : q 2 sec in Software Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.8.

Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module (Double Chronometry) q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open switch. q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type detectors.

9.9.

Analog Inputs Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range selected by installing shunt resistor) Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/OF Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.10. RTD Inputs RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32°F Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/°F Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

ALL.71+ w 04/98


9-3

Chapter 9


9.11. Analog Outputs ‹ NOTICE! ‹ Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to these specifications without notice.

Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to transducer power return terminal) Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds

9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs (12 per module) Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source (Referenced to transducer power return terminal) Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC, will be recognized as on q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as off LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each channel Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum

9-4


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Volume 1


9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface 9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible (2 per Module) Serial Data Output Voltage : q ±7.5 Volts typical Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts Baud Rate : q Software selectable q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input, output and handshaking signals

9.13.2. RS-485 (2 per Module) Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts Baud Rate : q Software selectable q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input, output and handshaking signals

9.14. Operator Keypad Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and audio feedback Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords Key Debounce : q Software controlled

9.15. LCD Display Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix Character Height : q 4.75 mm Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight controlled from keypad

ALL.71+ w 04/98


9-5

Chapter 9


9.16. Electromechanical Counters Quantity : q Three, with programmable function


Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable Character Height : q 5 mm Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second

9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs Quantity : q Four Dual Color : q Red/Green Indication : q Active Alarm LED ♦ Green: to indicate acknowledged existing alarm ♦ Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged, existing alarm q Diagnostic LED ♦ Green: to indicate Diagnostic Calibration Mode is active ♦ Red: to indicate password is active q Program LED

or

♦ Green: to indicate Program Configuration Mode is active ♦ Red: to indicate password is active q Alpha Shift LED

or

♦ Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock Mode is active ♦ Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only

9.18. Security Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal keyboard program lockout Software : q Multi-level password control

9-6


ALL.71+ w 04/98

Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71

Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems with K Factor Linearization



®

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

BASIC OPERATION

Contents of Volume 2 Figures of Volume 2 ........................................................................................................ iii 1. Basic Operating Features......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions .......................................................................1-1 1.2. Operating Modes ....................................................................................................1-2 1.2.1. Display Mode ......................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode.......................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode ......................................................................... 1-2 1.2.4. Field Entry Mode ................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Special Keys ...........................................................................................................1-4 1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [á á]/[â â] ............................................................................... 1-4 1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ß ß]/[à à] ............................................................................. 1-4 1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED....................................................................................... 1-4 1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag] ................................................................... 1-5 1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key............................................................................... 1-5

1.4. Adjusting the Display..............................................................................................1-5 1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms .................................................................................1-6 1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms........................................................................ 1-6 1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms .................................................................. 1-6 1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges.................................................. 1-6

1.6. Computer Totalizing ...............................................................................................1-6

20/24.71+ w 04/98

OMNI Flow Computer, Inc.

i



2. PID Control Functions .............................................................................................. 2-1 2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions....................................................................... 2-1 2.2. PID Control Displays .............................................................................................. 2-2 2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode .......................................................... 2-3 2.3.1. Manual Valve Control.............................................................................................2-3 2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control........................................................................................2-3 2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select.............................................................................................2-4 2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select .........................................................................................2-4 2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint .........................................................2-4

2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint ................................................................................ 2-4 2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions.................................. 2-5 2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent .................................. 2-5 2.7. PID Control Tuning................................................................................................. 2-6 2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop ....................2-6 2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ...........................2-7

3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................... 3-1 3.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3-1 3.2. Batch Status ........................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3. Batch Schedule Stack............................................................................................ 3-2 3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks ..............................................................................3-2 3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack.........................................................3-2

3.4. Ending a Batch ....................................................................................................... 3-3 3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch.............................................3-3 3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad ..........................................................3-3

3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket ............................................... 3-4 3.6. Batch Preset Counters........................................................................................... 3-5 3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags.................................................................................................3-5 3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags .............................................................................................3-5

3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch ................................................................................ 3-5 3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection..................... 3-6

4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change................................................................ 4-1 4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag........................................... 4-1 4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag ............................ 4-1 4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits................................................... 4-2

ii


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

5. Meter Factors............................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1. Changing Meter Factors.........................................................................................5-1 5.2. Changing Meter Factors for the Running Product ...............................................5-2 5.3. Previous Meter Factor Saved data ........................................................................5-2

6. Proving Functions ..................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1. Auto-Prove Mode ....................................................................................................6-1 6.1.1. Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-Prove Mode....................................... 6-1

6.2. Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional and Bi-directional) .........................................6-2 6.3. Brooks Compact Prover.........................................................................................6-3 6.3.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers ................................................... 6-4

6.4. Other Proving Reports ...........................................................................................6-4

7. Printed Reports ......................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1. Fixed Format Reports.............................................................................................7-1 7.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports...................................................7-2 7.3. Printing Reports......................................................................................................7-2 7.4. Audit Trail ................................................................................................................7-3 7.4.1. Audit Trail Report .................................................................................................. 7-3 7.4.2. Modbus  Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report ........................................ 7-3

8. Index of Display Variables ........................................................................................ 8-1

Figures of Volume 2 Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad ..................................................................................... 1-1 Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes....................................................... 1-3 Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop....................................................................... 2-1

20/24.71+ w 04/98


iii

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

1. Basic Operating Features 1.1. INFO - Within the document the following convention is used to describe various key press sequences: Individual keys are shown in bold enclosed in brackets and separated by a space. Although not always indicated, it is assumed for the rest of this document that the [Display/Enter] key is used at the end of every key press sequence to enter a command.

Overview of the Keypad Functions

Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various punctuation and math symbols. The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention. This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike that the ‘Enter’ key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).

Fig. 1-1.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad


1-1

Chapter 1

Basic Operating Features Key words such as ‘Density’, ‘Mass’ and ‘Temp’ appear over each of the alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the [Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1], [Meter] [1] [Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to be displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject then can be displayed on four lines. The [ ]/[ ] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll through multiple screens.

1.2.

Operating Modes

Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.

1.2.1.

Display Mode

This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.

1.2.2.

Keypad Program Mode

Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed via the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by pressing the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red when a valid password is requested and entered.

1.2.3.

Diagnostic and Calibration Mode

The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by pressing the [Diag] key ([Alpha Shift] then [Prog]. This mode allows you to check and adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic LED glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.

1.2.4.

Field Entry Mode

You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or Diagnostic Mode.

1-2

20/24.71+ 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

Fig. 1-2.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes


1-3

Chapter 1

Basic Operating Features

1.3. 1.3.1.

Special Keys Display/Enter (Help) Key

This key is located bottom-right on the keypad. Pressing once while in the Field Entry Mode will store the data entered in the field to memory. Pressing twice within one second will cause the contextsensitive Help to be displayed. The Help displays contain useful information regarding available variable assignments and selections. When in other modes, use it at the end of a key press sequence to enter the command.

1.3.2.

Up/Down Arrow Keys []/[]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad.

When in the Display Mode, the [ ]/[ ] keys are used to scroll through data relevant to a particular selection. When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position the cursor on data to be viewed or changed. In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position the cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software ‘zero’ potentiometer.

1.3.3.

Left/Right Arrow Keys []/[]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.

The [ ]/[ ] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field. In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software ‘span’ potentiometer.

1.3.4.

Alpha Shift Key and LED

This key is located top-right on the keypad. Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off automatically when the next valid key is pressed. Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red and the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted value until the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is pressed. When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow keys are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is on.

1-4


20/24.71+ 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

1.3.5.

Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]

This key is located top-left on the keypad. While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back one menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.

1.3.6.

Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key

This key is located bottom-left on the keypad. Static Discharges - It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.

Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged. When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it causes the key to be interpreted as a space or blank. When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing the key input buffer.

1.4.

Adjusting the Display

Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer be subjected to transient electrical interference. While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press [Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions: Use Up/Down Arrows To Adjust Contrast; Left, Right Arrows To Adjust Backlight

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-5

Chapter 1

TIP - Alarm flags are latched while the red LED is on. To avoid missing intermittent alarms, always press [Alarms] [Display] to view alarms before pressing [Cancel/Ack].

Basic Operating Features

1.5.

Clearing and Viewing Alarms

1.5.1.

Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms

New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the Active Alarm LED to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm condition clears.

1.5.2.

Viewing Active and Historical Alarms

To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the [ ]/[ ] arrow keys to scroll through all active alarms.

The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for printing (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).

1.5.3.

Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges

It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.

1.6.

Computer Totalizing

Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical and non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory. The electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via the Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The software totalizers provide batch and daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weighted averages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flow weighted averages are also available in liquid application flow computers. Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via the Password Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software totalizers by pressing [Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross], [Net] or [Mass] will display the software for Meter Run ‘n’.

1-6


20/24.71+ 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

2. PID Control Functions 2.1.

Overview of PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of controlling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override variable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure). The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad and remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be adjusted via an analog input to the computer. Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions. A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value. Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between automatic and manual control is incorporated.

Fig. 2-1. 20/24.71+ w 04/98

Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop


2-1

Chapter 2

PID Control Functions

2.2. INFO - Select PID Loop 1 through 4 by entering ‘n’ as 1, 2, 3 or 4.

PID Control Displays

While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the Up/Down arrow keys to display the following screens: Screen #1

Indicates which parameter is being controlled; primary or secondary

PID #1 VALVE STATUS Open 50.00 Auto/Manual Auto Primary Controlling

Screen #2 PID #1 PRIMARY Measurement 20.00 Shows actual primary set point being used in engineering units

Setpoint

20.00

Screen #3 PID #1 SECONDARY Measurement 20.00 Shows actual secondary set point being used in engineering units

Setpoint

20.00

Screen #4 INFO - Data such as set points or operating mode cannot be changed while in the Display Mode.

2-2

PID #1 SET POINT Source is Local Remote S.P. Input Value is 20.00


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

2.3. INFO - Select PID Loop 1 through 4 by entering ‘n’ as 1, 2, 3 or 4. To access the next two screens you must enter the [Y] to select Manual Valve or Local Setpoint even if a ‘Y’ is already displayed. To cancel the Manual Mode or Local Setpoint Mode, enter [N].

Changing the PID Control Operating Mode

Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen: PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve(Y/N) N Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N Sec Set.Pt 750.0

2.3.1.

Manual Valve Control

To change to manual valve control enter [Y] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed: PID #1 MANUAL VALVE Up/Down Arrow to Adj Measurement 20.00 Open % 50.00

Primary Variable (Measurement in engineering units)

The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to open or close the valve. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen. PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve (Y/N) Y Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N Sec Set.Pt 750.0

Notice you are now in Manual Valve Control

2.3.2.

Automatic Valve Control

To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is selected.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-3

Chapter 2


2.3.3.

Local Setpoint Select

Enter [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed: PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT Up/Down Arrow to Adj Measurement 20.00 Setpoint 20.00

Primary Variable (Measurement in engineering units)

The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen. Notice you are now in Automatic with Local Valve Control

PID#1 OPERATING MODE Manual Valve(Y/N) N Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y Sec Set.Pt 750.0

Change the setpoint of the secondary variable here

2.3.4.

Remote Setpoint Select

To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [N] at the 'Local Set. Pt.(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be bumpless, depending upon the remote set point source.

2.3.5.

Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint

Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then enter the new setpoint.

2.4. ‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

You must assign a remote setpoint input even if one will not be used. The 4-20mA scaling of this input determines the scaling of the primary controlled variable.

2-4

PID Control Remote Setpoint

As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled in engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an RTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate possible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1, Chapter 8 for more details).


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

2.5.

Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions

These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate between 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section ‘PID Setup’ in Volume 3). Commands are provided to ‘Start’ the valve ramping open, ‘Shutdown’ to the minimum percent open valve or ‘Stop’ the flow by closing the valve immediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open. These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n], which will display the following: Mtr1 Batch Start Y ? Shutdown to Min% ? Batch Stop ? Print & Reset ?

2.6.

Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent

Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output % settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per ½ second (see Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the minimum output % for topoff purposes.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-5

Chapter 2


2.7. ‹

IMPORTANT!

‹

PID Control Tuning - The primary variable must be tuned first. When tuning the primary variable loop, you must set the secondary setpoint high or low enough to the point where it will not take control. Otherwise, the PID loop will become very unstable and virtually impossible to tune. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minute until you achieve stable control. Likewise, when tuning the secondary setpoint, the primary must be set so it cannot interfere. Once you have achieved stable control of both loops, you can then enter the setpoints established for each loop at normal operating conditions.

PID Control Tuning

Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for stable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on the secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust the secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the secondary variable.

2.7.1.

Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop

Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 % change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop gain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9. Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed to when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller gain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range of control. To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of operating conditions: (1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and note process variable values. (2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22% equals a 10% change). (3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m3/hr to 110 m3/hr equals a 10% change).

INFO - The primary gain interacts with the secondary gain. The actual secondary gain factor is the product of the primary gain and secondary gain factors.

2-6

(4) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain). (5) Secondary Gain = Estimate).

0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

2.7.2.

Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain

(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops. (2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control. (3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec) gain until some controlled oscillation is observed. (4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the oscillation in minutes). (5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop oscillate. (6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-7

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

3. Computer Batching Operations 3.1.

Introduction

A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the number of barrels or cubic meters delivered, change of product or on demand. The Omni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running any combination of 16 different products. Flowmeter runs can be combined and treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages are printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch starts automatically when the pulses from the flowmeter exceed the meter active threshold frequency. Pulses received up to that point which do not exceed the threshold frequency are still included in the new batch, but the batch start time and date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.

3.2.

Batch Status

The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either: o In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active. o Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active. o Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


3-1

Chapter 3

Computer Batching Operations

3.3.

Batch Schedule Stack

When running independent products on each meter run, each flowmeter run has a batch schedule stack which stores the setup information for up to 5 future batches. The setup information is popped off the appropriate stack by the computer at the beginning of each batch. When all meter runs are running the same product, the individual meter run batch schedule stacks are combined and organized to store up to the next 23 future station batches.

3.3.1. TIP - When ending a batch with flow occurring, remember that the next batch will start immediately after you end the current one. You should check that the batch schedule contains the correct setup information for that batch.

Empty Batch Schedule Stacks

The flow computer will use the batch setup data for the batch last completed if the meters batch schedule stack is empty at the beginning of a new next batch.

3.3.2.

Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack

Pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Setup] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup] displays the screen similar to that shown below. The screen shows information regarding the current running batch. The 16 character batch ID number appears on all reports and can be edited at any time during a batch. The starting size of the batch in net barrels is used to determine the value of the batch preset counter. It can be changed at any time during a batch and the batch preset counter will be adjusted accordingly. MTR #1 CURRENT BATCH ID: Butane 5010 Running Product 1 Size BBl 100

By using the [á á]/[â â] keys you can scroll through and modify any one of the 6 batch setups (in Independent Batch Stack) and 24 (in Common Batch Stack) in the Batch Schedule Stack. M1:1 I=Ins D=Del ? ID: EP-001-021-BUT Product to Run? 0 Size BBl 0

The number on the left on Line 1 is the flowmeter run number and stack position; i.e., M2:1 will be the next batch setup run for Meter #2, M2:2 the next and so on. Batch setups can be inserted before the displayed position or the displayed setup and can be deleted by entering ‘I’ or ‘D” on Line 1. Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.

3-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

3.4.

Ending a Batch

A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate “End Batch Flag’ in the computer’s database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed basis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command.

3.4.1.

Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch

Batches can be ended and products changed by using the ‘Product Change Strobes’ (Boolean 1707 and 1747 through 1750). Setting any of these Boolean commands, either through a digital input or writing it through a Modbus port, will cause the flow computer to: (1) End the batch in progress and print a batch report. (2) Determine what the next product to run will be by decoding the binary coded ’Product Select Input’ flags (Booleans 1743 through 1746). (3) Write the number of the selected product into the next batch stack position. (4) Pop the batch setup off the stack and start a new batch.

3.4.2.

Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad

Press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a screen similar to the following will be displayed: METER #1 BATCH Print & Reset ?

Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will display the following: STATION BATCH Print & Reset ?

Enter [Y] to the ’Print & Reset ?’ question and enter your password when requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out. The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see the following section).

20/24.71+ w 04/98


3-3

Chapter 3


3.5. Recalculating a Previous Batch - For more information on this topic, see Technical Bulletin TB-980202 “Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer” included in Volume 5.

Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket

To recalculate and reprint a previous batch, you must do the following: (1) Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni LCD screen will display: METER #1 BATCH Print & Reset ? Select Prev# Batch 1 Enter API60 .0 Enter SG60 .0000 Enter %S&W .00 Recalculate&Print?

(2) Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4 completed batches numbered as: 1 = last batch completed to 4 = oldest batch completed. (3) Press [↓ ↓] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a number between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previous batch’ data points within the database (see explanation in Technical Bulletin TB-980202) (4) Enter Password when requested. Scroll to either “Enter API60” or “Enter SG60”. Type in a valid value and press [Enter]. (5) Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter]. At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the report to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory. The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number and the number after the ‘-‘ is the number of times that the batch has been recalculated.

3-4


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

3.6. INFO - In order to activate the batch preset counter you must have entered a batch size other than zero before the batch started (i.e., starting with a batch size of zero disables the preset counter feature). Batch presets can be selected for gross, net or mass units (see Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring the Meter Station).

Batch Preset Counters

Independent batch preset counters are provided for each meter run when in the Independent Batch Stack Mode. Each batch preset counter is pre-loaded with the batch size taken from the appropriate batch schedule stack. The counter is automatically reduced by the meter runs net flow. Press [Batch] [Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset] to see the current value of the counter for a particular meter run: Meter#1 Batch Preset barrels 49978 Mtr#1 Preset Warning barrels 100

3.6.1.

Batch Preset Flags

The batch preset flags are Boolean variables within the database which are automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter reaches zero. They are available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.

3.6.2.

Batch Warning Flags

The batch warning flags are Boolean variables within the database which is automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter is equal or less than the programmed batch warning value. It is available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.

3.7. INFO - The batch preset counter can be selected for gross, net or mass units (see Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring the Meter Station).

Adjusting the Size of a Batch

The size of a running batch may change several times during the progress of the batch. This is usually due to product take-off or injection upstream of the metering station. While in the Display Mode, press [Prog] and then [Batch] [Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]. This will show the following screen. ADJUST #1 BATCH SIZE Enter Amount to Adjust 0 Size Now 100000

Press [Clear] and enter the number of barrels/cubic meters (lbs or kgs) that you wish to add to the size of the batch. Enter a minus number to reduce the size of the batch.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


3-5

Chapter 3


3.8.

Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection

Automatic batch changes can be made by the computer by monitoring the rate of change of the product’s specific gravity/density during the final moments of a batch. For example, a Boolean point can be programmed to be active whenever the specific gravity rate of change flag is set and the batch warning flag is set. A digital output can then be assigned to this ‘interface detected’ Boolean flag and can be used to cause a ‘batch end’ command. Specific gravity disturbances which may occur during the batch will be alarmed but will not be used to end a batch unless the batch warning flag has been reached.

3-6


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change 4.1. ∆SG & ∆Dens - Delta Specific Gravity (∆SG) refers to U.S. customary units and is measured per barrel. Delta Density (∆Dens) refers to metric units and is measured in kilograms per cubic meter. The ∆SG (or ∆Dens) function is the smallest difference in specific gravity (or density) between two products that will form the product interface.

Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag

The specific gravity/density rate of change alarm flag is a flag within the database which is set whenever the rate of change of the station gravity/density with respect to flow (∆SG or ∆Dens see sidebar) exceeds the preset limit. It is used to detect a change in flowing product and is available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.

4.2.

Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag

In many cases the densitometer or gravitometer used to detect the product interface is mounted many Bbls (m3 or liter3) ahead of the valve manifold used to cut the product and end the batch. A second gravity/density rate of change flag which is delayed by the amount of line pack Bbls or m3 provides an accurate indication of when the interface reaches the actual valve manifold. Next Interface Due Barrels 156 The 'Next Interface Due' counter shows the number of Bbls or m3 of line pack remaining before the leading edge of the product interface reaches the valve manifold. A minus number indicates that the leading edge has passed. Up to three interfaces can be tracked between the interface detector and the valve manifold.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


4-1

Chapter 4

Specific Gravity Rate of Change

4.3. ∆SG & ∆Dens - Delta Specific Gravity (∆SG) refers to U.S. customary units and is measured per barrel. Delta Density (∆Dens) refers to metric units and is measured per cubic meter. The ∆SG (or ∆Dens) function is the smallest difference in specific gravity (or density) between two products that will form the product interface.

Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits

To accurately detect the product interface it is important to set the ‘gravity’ rate of change limits correctly. This limit is expressed as change in Specific Gravity per Net Bbl or m3 (∆SG/Bbl or ∆Dens/m3 see sidebar) and as such is flow rate independent. Too small a limit will cause minor disturbances to be detected and too large will cause the interface to be missed. For example: A pipeline runs ISO-Butane (0.565), N-Butane (0.585) and Propane (0.507). The smallest ∆SG in this case is 0.585 minus 0.565, which equals 0.020 SG units. It was observed that once an interface was detected, 33 Bbls passed before the specific gravity stabilized at the new gravity. The actual gravity rate of change limit for this example is calculated as: 0.20 / 33 = 0.0006

(∆ ∆ SG/Bbl)

To ensure that we reliably detect the gravity rate of change, we set the rate of change limits to one third of the actual expected rate of change (i.e., 0.0006/2) which is 0.0002. To enter this value, press [Prog] [Meter] [Enter]. Scroll down to 'Grav Change' and enter 0.0006. Meter Station Grav Change Line Pack

4-2


.0006 250

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

5. Meter Factors 5.1.

Changing Meter Factors

To do this you must edit the product file information by pressing [Prog]. Then press [Product] [Enter] to scroll through all 16 sets of product data. Pressing [Product] [n] [Enter], where ‘n’ is 1-16, will allow you to go directly to data for a specific product number. A display similar to the following can be scrolled through: PRODUCT #5 Name PROPANE Table Select 2 Override API 150.9 Override Dens 5010 M.F. #1 1.0099 M.F. #2 1.0034 M.F. #3 1.0023 M.F. #4 .9995

Move the cursor to the appropriate meter factor, press [Clear] and re-enter the required meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than 1.2001 are allowed. The ‘Retroactive Barrels’ question will not be prompted unless the meter factor you want to modify is being used at the time.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-1

Chapter 5

Meter Factors

5.2.

Changing Meter Factors for the Running Product

Enter the Program Mode by pressing [Prog]. Then press [Factor] [Enter]; this will allow you to scroll through all meter factors; or press [Meter] [n] [Factor] [Enter] to go directly to the meter factor for Flowmeter ’n’ (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4). Flowmeter #1 Meter Factor

1.0000

Press [Clear] and then enter the required meter factor. You will be prompted to enter the number of retroactive gross barrels (or cubic meters) that the new meter factor will be applied to. Flow Meter #1 Meter Factor 1.0050 Retro Bbls ?

1000

Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less then 1.2001 are allowed as meter factors. The meter factor will automatically replace the previous meter factor in the appropriate product information file.

5.3.

Previous Meter Factor Saved data

Whenever a flowmeter is proved, the new meter factor is compared against the current meter factor. Additional data such as the flow rate and a time tag is needed in order for this data to be meaningful. This ‘Previous Meter Factor’ data is saved with the meter factor automatically whenever a meter factor is implemented after a prove or entered manually while it is being used.

5-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

6. Proving Functions 6.1.

Auto-Prove Mode

The auto prove mode requires that a prover is available on a continuous basis with motorized actuators on the appropriate valves. Flowmeters can be automatically proved whenever the flow rate varies more than a certain amount from the flow rate that existed when the flowmeter was last proved or when the meter factor was manually entered. Flowmeters can also be proved whenever a certain amount of flow has been measured without a proving, or after a meter has been shut-in for more than a certain period of time and flow has been started. Entries are provided in the [Prog] [Prove] [Setup] menu to: q Enter the percentage change in flow rate which will trigger an auto-prove request. q Enter a minimum number of Bbls (or m3)/hr flow rate change to trigger an auto-prove request (needed at the lower flow rates where the percentage change would be a very small volume change). q Specify the period of time that the flow must remain at the new changed rate before a prove sequence is started. q Specify the period of time that a meter must be shut in before the need for a prove sequence is flagged. q Specify the maximum amount of flow between proves. An additional entry in the [Prog] [Meter] [n] menu is required to activate or put a meter run into the Auto-prove Mode.

6.1.1.

Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-Prove Mode

If 10 consecutive prove aborts occur when trying to ‘auto-prove’ a specific meter, ‘auto-prove’ for that meter will be disabled (each prove abort reason will also be logged into the historical alarm stack). If during the Auto-prove Mode, a prove is completed and the meter factor is not implemented because of an unexpected meter factor shift. The computer will wait the allowed time (‘Inactive Timer’ under Prove Setup) before trying another prove run. If the second completed run cannot implement the meter factor, then the Auto-prove Mode for that meter will be disabled.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


6-1

Chapter 6

Proving Functions

6.2.

Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional and Bi-directional)

Proving functions are accessed via the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove] [Enter] and the following selection menu is displayed: * Prover Operation * Trial Report (Y/N) Trial Prove Mtr"n" _ Prove Meter "n" Abort Prove ? (Y) For a single 'Trial Prove', enter the meter number to be proved on the 2nd line. To disable a trial prove report, enter [Y] on line one. For a prove sequence enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 3rd line. To abort a prove in progress enter [Y] on the 4th line. After making your entry the flow computer will automatically return you to the Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts Display': Counts 0 Prove Run 1 Meter Selected 2 Check Temp Stability

The bottom line of this display shows the current status of the prover. As the prove sequence proceeds the 4th line is updated with the current status: Ball Launched Fwd. 1st Detector Switch In Flight Forward 2nd Detector Switch Over Travel Forward Ball Launched Reverse 1st Detector Switch In Flight Reverse 2nd Detector Switch Over Travel Reverse

The 'Prove Run' number on line 2 increments as each run is completed. Assuming a successful prove the 4th line indicates:

Prove Completed

6-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation When the required number of consecutive runs within the run deviation limits are accumulated. The run data are averaged and the prove calculations are performed. The resultant meter factor is compared against the current meter factor and if it is within acceptable limits can be automatically stored in the appropriate product file and implemented retroactively for the current batch.

6.3.

Brooks Compact Prover

Proving functions are accessed the same as with full sized provers; via the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove] [Enter] and the following selection menu is displayed: *PROVER OPERATION* Invar Rod Deg.F 75.5 Trial Report (Y/N) Trial Prove Mtr"n" Prove Meter "n" Abort Prove ? (Y)

An additional entry is included for a Brooks prover (Invar Rod temperature). The invar rod is part of the detector switch mechanism of the prover and is usually close to ambient temperature. Enter the correct temperature to enable the computer to correct for any thermal expansion. For a single 'Trial Prove' enter the meter number to be proved on the 3rd line. For a prove sequence enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 4th line. To abort a prove in progress press the down arrow and enter [Y] on the 5th line. After making your entry the flow computer will automatically return you to the Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts Display' : Counts 0 Prove Run 1 Meter Selected 2 Check Temp Stability

As with the full sized prover the bottom line of this display shows the current status of the prover. Two additional status states will appear.

Check Plenum Press

While the computer is checking for temperature stability it is also checking and adjusting the plenum chamber pressure. The status line above will only show if the plenum pressure is still not within the selected dead band by the time the temperature is stable. Piston Downstream

20/24.71+ w 04/98


6-3

Chapter 6

Proving Functions This status display occurs while the prover is returning the piston to the upstream position ready to launch. Use the arrow keys to scroll down the display. A second screen is relevant to the pulse interpolation method of accumulating prove pulse counts. Prove Counts 1034 Tdvol 2.234122 Tdfmp 2.202312 Piston Downstream The 1st line shows the integer counts. Tdvol is the time between detectors and Tdfmp is the time between the 1st flowmeter pulse after each of the detectors. A pass report is printed at the end of each set of passes.

6.3.1.

Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers

As the compact prove sequence progresses the flow computer will print the Pass Summary Report. This report is printed for each sequence of passes that comprise a prove run. The number of passes made per run is selectable from 1 to 25 (see Prover Setup in Volume 3. Note: an entry of 1 will disable this report). On completion of a successful prove a Meter Proving Report will be printed. This report is user configurable via the OmniCom configuration program.

6.4.

Other Proving Reports

The following reports are also available with this application: o Prove Abort Report o Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Method o Mass Proving Report

6-4


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

7. Printed Reports -

7.1.

Fixed Format Reports

Several reports use a ‘fixed format’ (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These are described below:

20/24.71+ w 04/98

q Status Report

Shows general information on current active flowmeters, batch status (In progress / Suspended / Ended), current running products, batch ID string, current alarms and future batch information.

q Historical Alarm Report

Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms, when they occurred and are cleared. Meter run specific alarms also snapshot the gross volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor changes are also recorded here.

q Audit Trail Report

Date and time tags of up to the last 150 changes to the flow computer database made via the local keypad. Changes made via either Modbus port will also be recorded if the password feature is being used on that port.

q Product File Report

Shows information related to the product setup of the flow computer. For turbine/PD liquid flow computers, this data includes product name, meter factors, override gravities/densities and the equation or standard to be used for each product. Gas flow computers print product name, fluid type, calculations standard, component analysis, viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG and heating value overrides for each product.

q Config Data Report

Lists most configuration settings currently in the flow computer.


7-1

Chapter 7

Printed Reports

7.2.

Default Report Templates and Custom Reports

The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration program. q q q q

7.3. INFO - Entering a number between 1 and 500 at the ‘Hist Alarm ?’ line will cause many previous alarms to be printed. When requesting reports, such as previous daily, batch or prover reports, you must enter a number between 1 and 8; 1 refers to the last report generated and 8 refers to the oldest report. Up to 150 previous data entry changes can be printed when the ‘Audit Trail’ is requested. Note: ** These entries only show up when the archive ram is installed.

Snapshot Report Batch Report Daily Report Prove Report

Printing Reports

A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be printed automatically on timed intervals (see 9. “Print Setup” in Chapter 9). Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *PRINT REPORT MENU* Snapshot Report ? Previous Snapshot? Status Report ?(Y) Prev. Batch (1-8) Prev. Ticket ? Prev. Daily (1-8) Prev. Prove (1-8) Hist Alarm ? Audit Trail ? (Y) ** Arch Starts ** # of Arc Days Product File ?(Y) Config Report ?(Y)

Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to latest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.

7-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

7.4.

Audit Trail

7.4.1.

Audit Trail Report

A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance. Note1: Password entries are recorded in this field. A threedigit code signifies the password source and level of the password entered. These codes are as follows:

PIPELINE COMPANY NAME

Date: xx/xx/xx Event No. xxx

7.4.2.

Audit Trail Report Time: xx:xx:xx

Time

Date

xx:xx:xx

xx/xx/xx

Index Number1 xxxxx

Page: 1 Computer ID: REV2271

Old Value/ # of Points x.xxxxxxxxxxx

New Value/ Serial Port x.xxxxxxxxxxx

Modbus  Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report

The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:

PASSWORD CODES 100 101 102

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Privileged Level Password entered at the keypad Level 1 Password entered at local keypad Level 2 Password entered at local keypad

300

Level A Password entered via Serial Port #3

301

Level B Password entered via Serial Port #3

302

Level C Password entered via Serial Port #3

103

Serial Port #2 Level A Password entered at local keypad

400


104


401


105


402


108

Level 1A Password entered at local keypad

500


200


501


201


502


202


503



7-3

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

8. Index of Display Variables Index of Display Variables -These lists contain variable groups and corresponding key press sequences needed to display them. In most cases, the sequence can be reversed (i.e.: [Temp] [Meter] [n] is the same as [Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all cases, the [Display/Enter] key (keypad bottom right) must be pressed to enter the command. Some variables may not be displayed based on the application or the physical I/O assignments.

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

Flow Rates and Totalizers Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below: Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross (IV)

[Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Batch Uncorrected Gross (IV)

[Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Corrected Net (GSV)

[Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumul. S&W Corrected Net (NSV)

[Net] [Net] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Net] [Net]

Batch Corrected Net

[Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]

Batch S&W Corrected Net (NSV)

[Net] [Net] [Batch] or [Batch] [Net] [Net]

Daily & Cumulative Mass

[Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Batch Mass

[Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Energy

[Energy] or [Energy] [Meter] [n]

Total @ Second Reference Temperature

[Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]

Current Instantaneous Values Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below:

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Meter Temperatures

[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Meter Pressures

[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]

Density

[Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]

Unfactored Density

[Density] [Meter] [n]

API Gravity & API @ Reference

[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]

Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference

[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Temperatures

[Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Pressures

[Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]

Prover Temperatures

[Prove] [Temp]

Prove Pressures & Plenum Pressure

[Prove] [Press]

Prover Density

[Prove] [Density]

Prover Density Temperature

[Prove] [Density] [Temp]

Prover Density Pressure

[Prove] [Density] [Press]

Auxiliary Inputs 1-4

[Analysis] [Input]


8-1

Chapter 8

Index of Display Variables

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

Calculation Factors Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses shown below. Volume Correction Factors (VCF)

[Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Pressure Correction Factors (Cpl)

[Press] [Factor] or [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Batch FWA Meter Factors

[Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors Meter Factors & K Factors

[Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Pycnometer Factors

[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors

[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Equilibrium Pressure / A, B & F Factors

[Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Linearizing Factor / Daily FWA LCF

[Factor]

Alarm Information Active Alarms

[Alarms]

Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits

[Meter] or [Meter] [n]

Product Information Product Number and Name Override API & SG Gravity Meter Factors Calculation Mode

[Product] or [Product] [n] Note: n = 1-16

Prover Sequence Information Prove Counts & Run Number Meter Selected to Prove Current Prover Status Tdvol & Tdfmp Timers

[Counts] or [Prove] [Counts]

Batch Schedule Stack & Presets Batch ID Character String Running Product Number

[Batch] [Setup] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]

Batch Preset Counters & Interface Due Line Pack Counter

[Batch] [Preset] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]

Miscellaneous Displays

8-2

Current Time & Date Power Last Applied Time & Date Power Last Lost Time & Date Task Timing Display

[Time]

Display of Raw Input Signals

[Input]

Display of Raw Output Signals

[Output] [Status]

Hardware Inventory / Software Version

[Status]

Honeywell Module Status

[Input] [Status]


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 2a

Basic Operation

DISPLAY VARIABLES

VALID KEY PRESSES

PID Control Displays Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote Remote Setpoint Value Primary Measurement & Setpoint Secondary Measurement & Setpoint Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status

[Control] [n]

User Displays Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for more details).

20/24.71+ w 04/98


8-3





®

Volume 3


CONFIGURATION AND ADVANCED OPERATION

Contents of Volume 3 Figures of Volume 3 ....................................................................................................... ix 1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71 ......................................................... 1-1 1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters .......................................................1-1 1.2. Product Configuration............................................................................................1-1 1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run....................................................................1-2 1.4. Configurable Sensors per Prover..........................................................................1-2 1.5. Temperature............................................................................................................1-2 1.6. Densitometers.........................................................................................................1-2 1.7. Station Capability....................................................................................................1-2 1.8. Auxiliary Inputs .......................................................................................................1-2 1.9. Number of products - Information Stored/Product...............................................1-2 1.10. Type of Products Measured.................................................................................1-2 1.11. Batching and Interface Detection ........................................................................1-3 1.12. Auto Proving Features..........................................................................................1-3 1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override Gravity ................................................1-3 1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor................................................................1-3 1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearizing...........................................................................1-3 1.16. PID Control Functions ..........................................................................................1-4 1.17. Flow Weighted Averages......................................................................................1-4

20/24.71 w 04/98


i



1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................ 1-4 1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions ................................................................. 1-4 1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions................................................................. 1-4 1.21. User-Programmable Variables ............................................................................ 1-4 1.22. User Display Setups............................................................................................. 1-4 1.23. User Report Templates ........................................................................................ 1-5 1.24. Serial Communication Links................................................................................ 1-5 1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................ 1-5 1.26. Archive Data ......................................................................................................... 1-5 1.27. OmniCom  Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5 1.28. OmniView  Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5

2. Flow Computer Configuration................................................................................... 2-1 2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode ................................................... 2-1 2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode ..................................................................................2-1 2.2.2. Changing Data........................................................................................................2-1 2.2.3. Menu Selection Method .........................................................................................2-2 2.2.4. Random Access Method........................................................................................2-2 Example:....................................................................................................................2-2 2.2.5. Passwords..............................................................................................................2-3 Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................2-3 Changing Passwords at the Keypad............................................................................2-4

2.3. Getting Help ............................................................................................................ 2-4 2.4. Program Inhibit Switch........................................................................................... 2-4 2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs ........................................................... 2-6 2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ...............................................2-6 2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ............................................2-7 2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings...........................................................................2-7 2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ...................................................2-8 2.5.5. Module Settings .....................................................................................................2-8 2.5.6. Meter Station Settings ...........................................................................................2-9 Auxiliary Input Assignment ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.5.7. Meter Run Settings .............................................................................................. 2-10 2.5.8. Prover Settings .................................................................................................... 2-12

ii


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation 2.5.9. PID Control Settings............................................................................................ 2-14 2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output Settings....................................................................... 2-16 2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings ........................................................................... 2-17 2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements................................................................. 2-18 2.5.13. Programmable Variable Statements ................................................................. 2-20 2.5.14. User Display Settings ........................................................................................ 2-22 User Display #1........................................................................................................ 2-22 User Display #2........................................................................................................ 2-22 User Display #3........................................................................................................ 2-22 User Display #4........................................................................................................ 2-23 User Display #5........................................................................................................ 2-23 User Display #6........................................................................................................ 2-23 User Display #7........................................................................................................ 2-23 User Display #8........................................................................................................ 2-23 2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings ...................................................................................... 2-24 2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings .......................................................................... 2-26 2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications Settings .......................................................... 2-27 2.5.18. Custom Modbus  Data Packet Settings .......................................................... 2-31 Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)................................................ 2-31 Custom Modbus Data Packet #2 (Addressed at 201)................................................ 2-31 Custom Modbus Data Packet #3 (Addressed at 401)................................................ 2-31 2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller Setup............................................................. 2-32 2.5.20. Archive File Setup ............................................................................................. 2-32

2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ..............................................................................2-33 2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu......................................................... 2-33 2.6.2. Time and Date Settings ....................................................................................... 2-33

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station..............................................................................2-34 2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu.............................................................. 2-34 2.7.2. Meter Station Settings......................................................................................... 2-34 Auxiliary Inputs ........................................................................................................ 2-36

2.8. Configuring Meter Runs .......................................................................................2-37 2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu ........................................................ 2-37 2.8.2. Meter Run Settings.............................................................................................. 2-37 Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings ............................................................... 2-38 K-Factor Linearization Settings ................................................................................ 2-39 More Meter Run Settings ......................................................................................... 2-40

2.9. Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature ............................................................2-41 2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu .................................................... 2-41

20/24.71 w 04/98


iii



2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings ................................................................................ 2-41 2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings .................................................................. 2-42 2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings .............................................................................. 2-42 2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings................................................................. 2-43

2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure .............................................................................. 2-44 2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu ......................................................... 2-44 2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings .................................................................................... 2-44 2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings....................................................................... 2-45 2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings................................................................................... 2-45 2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings ..................................................................... 2-47

2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / API Density ............................................ 2-48 2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu .............................................. 2-48 2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings ......................................................... 2-48 Specific Gravity, API or Density ............................................................................... 2-48 Digital Densitometers ............................................................................................... 2-49

2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs ...................................................................... 2-51 2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu..................................................... 2-51 2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings.............................................................................. 2-51 Operating Mode........................................................................................................ 2-51 Tuning Adjustments.................................................................................................. 2-51 Remote Setpoint ...................................................................................................... 2-52 Secondary Variable .................................................................................................. 2-53

2.13. Configuring Provers........................................................................................... 2-54 2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-54 2.13.2. Prover Settings................................................................................................... 2-54

2.14. Configuring Products......................................................................................... 2-58 2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu........................................................... 2-58 2.14.2. Product Settings ................................................................................................ 2-58 Product #1................................................................................................................ 2-58 Product #2................................................................................................................ 2-60 Product #3................................................................................................................ 2-60 Product #4................................................................................................................ 2-61 Product #5................................................................................................................ 2-61 Product #6................................................................................................................ 2-62 Product #7................................................................................................................ 2-62 Product #8................................................................................................................ 2-63 Product #9................................................................................................................ 2-63 Product #10.............................................................................................................. 2-64

iv


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Product #11 ............................................................................................................. 2-64 Product #12 ............................................................................................................. 2-65 Product #13 ............................................................................................................. 2-65 Product #14 ............................................................................................................. 2-66 Product #15 ............................................................................................................. 2-66 Product #16 ............................................................................................................. 2-67

2.15. Configuring Batches...........................................................................................2-67 2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors...................................................................2-68 2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu............................................................. 2-68 2.16.2. Factor Settings .................................................................................................. 2-68 Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution.......................................................................... 2-69 Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch and Prove Reports ....... 2-69

2.17. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-70 2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ............................................................ 2-70 2.17.2. Printer Settings.................................................................................................. 2-70

3. User-Programmable Functions ................................................................................ 3-1 3.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................3-1 3.2. User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements ...........................................3-1 3.2.1. What is a Boolean? ............................................................................................... 3-1 Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 → 1024).................................................................. 3-2 Programmable Boolean Points (1025 → 1088)........................................................... 3-2 Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 → 1099).................................................... 3-2 One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 → 1650)................................................................... 3-3 Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 → 1699)............................................................... 3-3 3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (6001 → 8999).............................. 3-3 3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions ..................................................................... 3-3 Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application ................................ 3-5 Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application'............................. 3-6 3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured................................................ 3-8 3.2.5. Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499) ................................................ 3-10 Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ......................................................................... 3-10 Micro Motion Alarm Status Points.......................................................................... 3-13 More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ................................................................ 3-13 3.2.6. Command and Status Boolean Points (1700 through 1799) .......................... 3-14 3.2.7. Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)....................................................... 3-18 3.2.8. Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999) ...................................................... 3-21 3.2.9. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags........................................................................... 3-24

20/24.71 w 04/98


v



3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points.................................... 3-25 3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a Poll ................................................................................................................... 3-25 3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ... 3-26 3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch ...................................... 3-26 3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags....................................................................... 3-26 3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ..................................................... 3-27 3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems................. 3-29 3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................ 3-29

3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements ................................................. 3-30 3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed............................... 3-30 Example 1: ............................................................................................................... 3-31 Example 2: ............................................................................................................... 3-31 Example 3: ............................................................................................................... 3-31 Example 4: ............................................................................................................... 3-32 3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements............................................... 3-32 Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-32 3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables ............................................... 3-33 3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt....................................................... 3-33 3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable ..................... 3-33 3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ........................................................... 3-34 Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-34

3.4. User Configurable Display Screens .................................................................... 3-35 Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-37

4. Modbus  Protocol Implementation......................................................................... 4-1 4.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2. Modes of Transmission.......................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format ....................................................................4-2 4.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format...............................4-2

4.3. Message Fields....................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3.1. Address Field .........................................................................................................4-2 4.3.2. Function Code Field ..............................................................................................4-3 4.3.3. Data Field................................................................................................................4-3 4.3.4. Error Check Field ...................................................................................................4-3 The LRC Mode ...........................................................................................................4-3 The CRC Mode ..........................................................................................................4-4

vi


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.4. Exception Response ..............................................................................................4-4 4.5. Function Codes.......................................................................................................4-5 4.5.1. Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status) ............................................................ 4-5 4.5.2. Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)..................................................... 4-7 4.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)........................................................... 4-8 4.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer) .................................................. 4-9 4.5.5. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) ...................................................... 4-10 4.5.6. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ................................................. 4-11 4.5.7. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-12 4.5.8. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-13

4.6. Custom Data Packets ...........................................................................................4-14 4.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus  Link .....................................................................4-15 4.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required........................................................4-15 4.9. Active Master.........................................................................................................4-15 4.10. Error Recovery....................................................................................................4-15

5. Flow Equations and Algorithms............................................................................... 5-1 5.1. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 20 (U.S. Units)...............................5-1 5.1.1. Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr .......................................................... 5-1 When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected:..................................................... 5-1 5.1.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (Except Propylene)........................... 5-1 5.1.3. Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)....................................................... 5-1 5.1.4. Equivalencies ........................................................................................................ 5-2 Table 6A, 23A Product Type: Crude Oil ..................................................................... 5-2 Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Fuel Oil........................................................................ 5-2 Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Jet Group..................................................................... 5-2 Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Gasolines..................................................................... 5-2 Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline............................................ 5-3 For Propylene ............................................................................................................ 5-3 Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes....................................................................... 5-3 Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC) ........................................ 5-3 Density of Ethylene (NIST)......................................................................................... 5-3 Density of Ethylene (API)........................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.5. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) .................................................. 5-4 5.1.6. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact) .......................................................................... 5-4 5.1.7. Prove Meter Factor ................................................................................................ 5-4

20/24.71 w 04/98


vii



5.1.8. Equivalencies .........................................................................................................5-4 For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover ................................................................................5-4 For Compact Prover...................................................................................................5-4 When Using Pulse Interpolation Method .....................................................................5-5 When Proving Propylene Product...............................................................................5-5 When Proving Ethylene Product.................................................................................5-5 5.1.9. PID Control .............................................................................................................5-5 5.1.10. Solartron  Density gm/cc ...................................................................................5-6 Uncompensated Density.............................................................................................5-6 Temperature Compensated Density ...........................................................................5-6 Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density .........................................................5-6 Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)...........................5-6 5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/cc .......................................................................................5-7 5.1.12. UGC Density gm/cc ..............................................................................................5-8 5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration Constants...................................................................5-8 5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficients........................................................................................5-8

5.2. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 24 (Metric Units)........................... 5-9 5.2.1. Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr ................................................................5-9 5.2.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (Except Propylene)............................5-9 5.2.3. Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene) ...........................................................5-9 5.2.4. Equivalencies .........................................................................................................5-9 5.2.5. Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulses is Selected ........................ 5-10 Table 54A Product Type: Crude Oil .......................................................................... 5-10 Table 54B, Product Type: Fuel Oil............................................................................ 5-10 Table 54B Product Type: Jet Group.......................................................................... 5-10 Table 54B Product Type: Gasolines ......................................................................... 5-10 Table 54B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline ................................................ 5-10 For Propylene:.......................................................................................................... 5-11 5.2.6. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes................................................................ 5-11 5.2.7. Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC).............................. 5-11 Density of Ethylene (NIST) ....................................................................................... 5-11 Density of Ethylene (API) ......................................................................................... 5-11 5.2.8. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) ................................................. 5-12 5.2.9. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)......................................................................... 5-12 5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor............................................................................................. 5-12

viii


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation 5.2.11. Equivalencies..................................................................................................... 5-12 For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover .............................................................................. 5-12 For Compact Prover ................................................................................................ 5-12 When Using Pulse Interpolation Method .................................................................. 5-13 When Proving Propylene Product ............................................................................ 5-13 When Proving Ethylene Product .............................................................................. 5-13 5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses................................................................................. 5-13 5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used:................................................................... 5-13 5.2.14. PID Control......................................................................................................... 5-13 5.2.15. Solartron  Density kg/m3.................................................................................. 5-15 Uncompensated Density .......................................................................................... 5-15 Temperature Compensated Density......................................................................... 5-15 Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density....................................................... 5-15 Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron  Only) ........................ 5-15 3 5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m ..................................................................................... 5-16

5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3 ............................................................................................ 5-17 5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration Constants ................................................................ 5-17

Figures of Volume 3 Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive Displacement and Coriolis Flowmeters1-1 Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch ................................................................................ 2-5 Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds .............................................. 3-6 Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching ................................................................. 3-7 Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys ..................................................................................... 3-36

20/24.71 w 04/98


ix

Volume 3


1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71 Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems with K Factor Linearization

1.1.

Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters

Minimum 1 run, Maximum 4 runs - Turbine, Positive Displacement Flow Meters or Mass Flow Meters. 'Level A' dual channel 'Pulse Fidelity' checking can be performed on all 4 meter runs.

1.2.

Product Configuration

Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different products.

Fig. 1-1.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive Displacement and Coriolis Flowmeters


1-1

Chapter 1

Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71

1.3.

Configurable Sensors per Meter Run

Meter Pulses, meter temperature and pressure, meter density, density temperature and pressure.

1.4.

Configurable Sensors per Prover

Prover inlet and outlet temperature and pressure, prover densitometer any type (analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron, Sarasota or UGC ).

1.5.

Temperature

Each temperature sensor can be individually selected to be a 4-20mA, 4-wire DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.

1.6.

Densitometers

Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared densitometers of any type (analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron, Sarasota or UGC ) the maximum number that can be connected is five. Each analog density can be specified as flowing or reference conditions. For mass proving a densitometer can be configured on the prover.

1.7.

Station Capability

Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow rates and totalizers.

1.8.

Auxiliary Inputs

Four auxiliary inputs are provided for miscellaneous sensors (for example: BS&W, Viscosity monitors, etc.) and can be individually selected to be a 420mA, 4-wire DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.

1.9.

Number of products - Information Stored/Product

Sixteen. - Product name, factors for each meter, gravity/density override, calculation mode to be used when running the product.

1.10. Type of Products Measured Crude oil, refined products, NGL’s using API 2540, LPG’s using GPA TP16 and propylene using API 11.3.3.2. Ethylene using NIST 1045, API 2565, or IUPAC equations. Mass measurement mode is also standard. ASTM D1550,D1555, 1952 Table 23,24 are also provided.

1-2


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


1.11. Batching and Interface Detection Six batch setups per meter run can be programmed with alphanumeric batch ID tag, product number to run and expected size of batch. Individual meter run batch preset down counters provide 'batch end warning' and 'batch end reached' alarms. Batches can be ended manually or automatically on size of batch, change of product, beginning of new day, day of the week or day of the month. Product interface detection is achieved using a station interface detector densitometer mounted ahead of the meter runs. Line pack count down counters allow up to three product interfaces to be tracked between the interface detector gravitometer and the valve manifold allowing pre-emptive product cuts.

1.12. Auto Proving Features Fully automated proving to API chapter 12. User configured for Uni-, Bidirectional and compact provers with optional inlet and outlet temperature and pressure sensors. Both up-stream and downstream water draw volume inputs are available. Plenum chamber pressure on a Brooks prover is also input as an analog and controlled by the computer. Master meter proving is also featured. Provings can be triggered on change of flow rate versus last known prove for each meter or on the amount of flow which has occurred since the last prove. Proves can also be triggered by a meter being shut in for more than a specified amount of time.

1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override Gravity Meter factors and override product gravity can be applied retroactively for a selectable number of barrels at any time during a batch. Meter factors determined by a prove can be automatically implemented from that point or retroactively to the beginning of the batch.

1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor Density correction factors can be applied retroactively for a selectable number of barrels at any time during a batch.

1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearizing Viscosity/Flow Rate Linearizing of Helical Turbine/Positive Displacement meters can be accomplished by apply a linearization correction factor (LCF) to the incoming flowmeter pulses. The LCF is calculated in real time by monitoring a live viscosity input signal which is input via the auxiliary inputs.

20/24.71 w 04/98


1-3

Chapter 1

Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71

1.16. PID Control Functions Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable with either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure inputs are activated to provide a startup and shutdown ramp function for each control loop if needed. Primary setpoint can be adjusted via an analog input, a keypad entry or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may be cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.

1.17. Flow Weighted Averages Flow weighted averages are calculated for all input variables and correction factors based on hourly, daily totals and running batch totals.

1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with variable 'Delay On' and 'Delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.

1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions Sixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter run switching, prover loop and provide user auxiliary control functions.

1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.

1.21. User-Programmable Variables Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include, special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection, special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e., change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system can make use of it).

1.22. User Display Setups The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display screens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with a descriptive tag defined by the user.

1-4


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


1.23. User Report Templates Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for the snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.

1.24. Serial Communication Links Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices such as printers, SCADA systems, PLC’s and other Omni Flow Computers. Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU). Printer data is ASCII data.

1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other as equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast between other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources such as a PLC.

1.26. Archive Data Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. 1) Formatted ASCII text using custom report templates, 2) Raw Data using archive records and files.

1.27. OmniCom  Software Communications Package OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user to configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.

1.28. OmniView  Software Communications Package A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also available as an option.

20/24.71 w 04/98


1-5

Volume 3


2. Flow Computer Configuration 2.1.

Introduction

Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied. Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods: 1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program and then uploading all data at once. 2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which uploads each change as it is entered. 3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program Mode. Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom Configuration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help. Method 3) is described here.

2.2.

2.2.1. INFO - Key presses are denoted in bold face between brackets; e.g.: the enter key appears in this manual as [Enter].

Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode Entering the Program Mode

While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be displayed on the first three lines of the LCD display. Press Keys to Select Group Entry, or Press "Prog" to Exit

th

The 4 line of the display is used to show the user key presses.

2.2.2.

Changing Data

Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-1

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration

2.2.3.

Menu Selection Method

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

! " # $ # $ % &

TIP - It is best to use the menu selection method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described on the facing page. While in the Program Mode (program LED on) press [Setup] [Enter]. A menu similar to the following will be displayed.

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.

2.2.4.

Random Access Method

In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice to get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go directly to the data for that group and that group only. Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear], re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would cause a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of data groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.

Example: Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs. Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.

th

The 4 line of the display is used to show the user key presses.

2-2

'


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:

2.2.5. INFO - Most entry groups occupy multiple screens so be sure to use the []/[] to scroll and see all data.

Passwords

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following: ❏ Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable) (Physical Serial Port #1) ❏ Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2) ❏ Modbus Port #3 - (Physical Serial Port #3) ❏ Modbus Port #4 - (Physical Serial Port #4)

Local Keypad Access Three password levels are provided: ❑ Privileged Level

Allows complete access to all entries within the flow computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2 below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password level.

❑ Level 1

This level allows technician access to most entries within the flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments, programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other than ‘Keypad Level 1’.

❑ Level 1A

This level allows technician access to the following entries only: ♦ Meter Factors ♦ K Factors ♦ Densitometer

Correction

Factors

(Pycnometer

Factor)

❑ Level 2

Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries include: ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦

20/24.71 04/98

Transducer Manual Overrides Product Gravity Overrides Prover Operations Batching Operations


2-3

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Changing Passwords at the Keypad


1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. 2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter]. 3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter]. 4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press [Enter]. 5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed if required.

INFO - See Technical Bulletin TB-960701 in Volume 5 for setting Level B and Level C passwords using OmniCom.

Note: Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad.

INFO - The Help System is not limited to just the Program Mode. Context sensitive help is available in all modes of operation.

6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords. These are labeled ‘Serial 1’ (if Modbus Protocol is selected), 'Serial 2', Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.

2.3.

Getting Help

Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by pressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the data field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so always use the [á á]/[â â] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter] once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.

2.4.

Program Inhibit Switch

A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents unauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be viewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to alter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on the bottom line of the LCD display. The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.

2-4


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

‹

CAUTION!


‹

These units have an integral latching mechanism which first must be disengaged by lifting the bezel upwards before withdrawing the unit from the case.

Fig. 2-1.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch


2-5

Chapter 2


2.5. Tip - It is best to use the Menu Selection Method (see 9.2.3) when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method (see 9.2.4).


INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer. You are advise to complete all entries under this menu before proceeding. Only transducers that have been assigned to physical I/O points will be available for further configuration (i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for or accept configuration data unless a transducer has been defined). (See 9.5.2.)

2-6

Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs

The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.

2.5.1.

Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu)

The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the ‘Misc. Setup’ menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see 9.2.1. “Entering the Program Mode”). Press Keys to Select Group Entry, or Press "Prog" to Exit Setup Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *** SETUP MENU *** Misc Configuration _ Time/Date Setup Station Setup The cursor automatically appears at the ‘Misc Configuration’ option. Press [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y) Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station?(Y) Config Meter “n” Config Prove ? (Y) Config PID ? “n” Config D/A Out“n” Front Pnl Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables? User Display ? “n” Config Digital“n” Serial I/O “n” Peer/Peer Comm(Y)? Custom Packet “n” Archive File “n” PLC Group “n” SCROLL UP FOR MORE


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.5.2.

Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration

Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed: Variable Selected is Not Assigned to a Physical I/O Point

If this message is displayed check the I/O point assignment for the variable.

2.5.3. INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Password Maintenance Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Password Maint ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: {PL} Privileged

Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including other passwords.

{PL} Level 1

_______________

Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determine the physical I/O personality of the computer.

{PL} Level 1A

_______________

Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors K Factors and Density Correction Factors only.

{PL} Level 2

_______________

Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overrides and meter factors.

{PL} Ser1 Passwd Note: In the privileged password area all passwords are legible upon entering the correct privileged password. In all other cases when requested for a password, upon entering the password, the Omni will display all entered characters as asterisk.

_______________

_______________

Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be read via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protection can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.

{PL} Lockout SW Active? N

_______________

Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port. Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.

{PL} Ser2 Passwd

_______________

Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.

20/24.71 w 04/98


_______________

{PL} Ser3 Passwd

_______________


_______________

{PL} Ser4 Passwd

_______________


_______________


2-7

Chapter 2


2.5.4. INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password

The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered: {PL} Model # (0=3000, 1=6000)

{PL} Re-configure Archive

CAUTION!

‹

If you change the number or type of installed I/O modules, you must perform the ‘Check Modules’ Function to inform the computer that you wish to use the new hardware configuration.

_______________

Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.

{PL} Archive Run (Y/N)

_______________

Enter [Y] to start the archive running.

{PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N)

_______________

Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been entered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settings after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot be zeroed.

{PL} Reset All Ram ? (Y/N)

‹

_______________

This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O capability of the computer.

_______________

Resetting all Ram will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means that all configuration data will have to be re-entered.

{PL} Input Calibrate Default ?

_______________

Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and span settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.

{PL} D/A Calibrate Default ?

_______________

Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and span settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also do this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.

2.5.5.

Module Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Check Modules ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu and a screen similar to the following will display: MODULE S-WARE H-WARE A-1 Y Y B-1 Y Y E/D-1 Y Y E-1 Y Y H-1 Y Y D-2 Y Y S-2 Y Y Update S-Ware ?

{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y)

_______________

A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modules recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software' question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The available I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number of each module (see Chapter 2 for more information).

2-8


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.5.6. INFO - The number of process variable I/O points available depends on the number of combo modules installed (see Chapter 2 in Volume 1 for more information). Point numbers range from 01 through 24. Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the assigning of a variable.

Meter Station Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Config Station ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: {PL} Station Configured As:

_______________

Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flow rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted. Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4. Enter [0] for no station totalizers.

I/O Type Mismatch - The computer will not let you assign the same I/O point # to incompatible transducer types; i.e., an I/O point cannot be assigned as a temperature input for Meter Run #1 and a pressure input for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Type Mismatch’ message is displayed, recheck the I/O.

{PL} Density I/O Point

_______________

Enter the I/O point number that corresponds to the station density or gravity input used as the product interface detector. Digital densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure effects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers can only be th assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a B Type Combo Module, or Channels 3 or 4 of an E/D Type Combo Module.

Density Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.

Enter Density Type Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to share transducers between meter runs. Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to cancel an incorrectly entered I/O point #, then enter the correct number.

_______________

Enter the densitometer type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear, 4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.

{PL} Temp I/O Point

_______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the station densitometer is connected. When a digital densitometer is used as the station transducer, it can be corrected for temperature effects by assigning a temperature I/O point. For the station product interface densitometer, enter a meter run temperature sensor in cases where a separate temperature transmitter is not available. st

Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the associated variable will be available for display and be used in all calculations, but will not be obtained via a live input. The variable value is usually downloaded into the flow computer database via a communication port or via a user variable statement.

RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes can nd also be assigned to the 2 channel of B Type combo modules.

Density T Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______________

Enter the densitometer temperature transmitter type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, Honeywell Smart Transmitter or 2=4-20mA linear output.

{PL} Press I/O Point

_______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the station digital densitometers is connected. When a digital densitometer is used as the product interface detector, it can be corrected for pressure effects by assigning a station pressure point. If a separate pressure transmitter is not available, enter a meter pressure transmitter I/O point.

Dens P Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD display.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-9

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Auxiliary Input Assignment

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

INFO - The number of process variable I/O points available depends on the number of combo modules installed (see Chapter 2 in Volume 1 for more information). Point numbers range from 01 through 24. Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the assigning of a variable. I/O Type Mismatch - The computer will not let you assign the same I/O point # to incompatible transducer types; i.e., an I/O point cannot be assigned as a temperature input for Meter Run #1 and a pressure input for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Type Mismatch’ message is displayed, recheck the I/O. Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to share transducers between meter runs. Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to cancel an incorrectly entered I/O point #, then enter the correct number.

{PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O

_______________

Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs can be used to enter S&W, viscosity and other miscellaneous variables.

Aux #1 Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______________

Enter the Auxiliary Input Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, 2=Honeywell Smart Transmitter or 4-20mA.


_______________

Aux #2 Tag

_______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______________


_______________

Aux #3 Tag

_______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______________


_______________

Aux #4 Tag

_______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______________

2.5.7.

Meter Run Settings

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config Meter "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

{PL} Flow I/O Point

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the number of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeter rd th pulse inputs can only be assigned to the 3 input channel of any combo module and 4 input channel of A Type combo modules. When working with compact provers using pulse interpolation, rd th you must assign each of the flowmeter pulse signals to the 3 or 4 channel of an E Type combo module.

Flow Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.

{PL} Dual Pulse ? (Y/N)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] to enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMS rd Chapter 5, Section 5). The 'Flow I/O Point' entered above must correspond to the 3 input channel of an E Combo Module. The flowmeter pulses are physically wired to Input Channels 3 and 4 of the E Combo Module.

{PL} Select Mass Pulse?

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] if the flowmeter used for this meter run produces mass pulses (i.e., pulses per mass unit). A coriolis mass meter usually provides this type of output signal.

{PL} Temp I/O Point

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.

2-10


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Temp Tag

Config Meter Runs Physical I/O information for up to 4 meter runs can be entered. Transducers that are not assigned an I/O point will not be available for display or further configuration. Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the associated variable will be available for display and be used in all calculations, but will not be obtained via a live input. The variable value is usually downloaded into the flow computer database via a communication port or via a user variable statement.

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

{PL} Press I/O Point

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.

Press Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.

{PL} Density I/O Point #

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital pulse th densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a rd th 'B' Type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D Combo Module.

Density Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______


Enter Density Type

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.

0=Flowing, 1=Ref

_______

_______

_______

3=4-20 Density linear,

_______

_______

This entry is applies only if you selected a 4-20mA type densitometer in the previous entry Specify if the density transducer signal represents density at: 0=flowing temperature and pressure, 1=reference temperature and pressure.

{PL} Dens T I/O Point

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effects at the densitometer for each meter run. If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the meter run temperature sensor.

Density T Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______


0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

{PL} Dens P I/O Point

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects at the densitometer for each meter run. If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the meter run pressure sensor.

Dens P Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______


20/24.71 w 04/98


2-11

Chapter 2


2.5.8.

Prover Settings

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

Enter [Y] at ‘Config Prove ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

{PL} Prover Temperature I/O Point

Configuring the Prover When an input and output transducer signal is available, the computer uses the average of both signals. Otherwise, it uses the signal from the available transducer. The pressure or temperature of the meter run being proved will be used to compensate the prover if neither left or right transducer is assigned to an I/O point #.

Inlet

Outlet

__________

__________

Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet temperature signal. Inlet and outlet temperature sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover temperature. To use the meter run temperature, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet. If there is only one temperature sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both prover inlet and outlet.

Inlet/Outlet T Tag

__________

__________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20

__________

__________

Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

{PL} Prover Pressure I/O Point

__________

__________

Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet pressure signal. Inlet and outlet pressure sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover pressure. To use the meter run pressure, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet. If there is only one pressure sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both prover inlet and outlet.

Inlet/Outlet P Tag

__________

__________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.

{PL} Prover Plenum I/O Point

_______________

Applies only when a Brooks compact prover is specified. Enter the I/O point number used to input the compact prover plenum pressure sensor input.

Plenum Tag

_______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this plenum pressure transducer on the LCD display.

{PL} Prover Density I/O Point

_______________

Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for the prover. The prover density I/O point is used to calculate the mass of liquid in the prover during a mass proving run (i.e., coriolis meter proving). Digital pulse densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure effects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers must be assigned th rd th to the 4 channel of a 'B' type module or the 3 or 4 channel of an E/D module.

Density Tag

_______________


Enter Density Type

_______________

Enter the Prover Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear, 4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.

2-12


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {PL} Prover Dens T I/O Point

INFO - The number of process variable I/O points available depends on the number of combo modules installed (see Volume I; Chapter 2 for more information). Point numbers range from 01 through 24. Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the assigning of a variable. I/O Type Mismatch - The computer will not let you assign the same I/O point # to incompatible transducer types; i.e., an I/O point cannot be assigned as a temperature input for Meter Run #1 and a pressure input for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Type Mismatch’ message is displayed, recheck the I/O. Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to share transducers between meter runs.

_______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the prover densitometer is connected. When a digital densitometer is used as the prover transducer, it can be corrected for temperature effects by assigning a temperature I/O point. For the prover densitometer, enter the same I/O points as the prover inlet/outlet temperature sensor in cases where a separate temperature transmitter is not part of the densitometer. st

RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes can nd also be assigned to the 2 channel of B Type combo modules.

Dens T Tag

_______________


0=DIN, 1=AM, 2=2-40

_______________

Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

{PL} Prover Dens P I/O Point

_______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the prover digital densitometer is connected. Enter the same I/O point as the prover inlet pressure sensor in cases where a separate pressure transmitter is not available.

Dens P Tag

_______________


Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to cancel an incorrectly entered I/O point #, then enter the correct number. Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the associated variable will be available for display and be used in all calculations, but will not be obtained via a live input. The variable value is usually downloaded into the flow computer database via a communication port or via a user variable statement.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-13

Chapter 2


2.5.9. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) -- For practical reasons we refer to PID Control Loops in this manual. However, your flow computer actually performs the Proportional Integral (PI) function and does not apply the derivative term. The addition of the derivative term would greatly complicate tuning of the control loop and besides is not normally applicable to the types of flow and pressure control used in pipelines.

PID Control Settings

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config PID ? "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: {PL} Assign Pri.

Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Rmk

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each variable assignment.

{PL} Pri. Action (F/R)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output % increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output % increases.

Valid Assignments - Any 32-bit integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be the primary or secondary controlled variable (see Volume 4 for a complete listing of database addresses and index numbers).

{PL} Remote S.P. Pt#

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24). Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port. Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.

{PL} Assign Sec.

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Rmk

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each variable assignment.

{PL} Sec. Action (F/R)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output % increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output % increases.

2-14


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


{PL} Error Select (L/H) INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry is used to determine under what circumstances the primary or secondary variable is to be controlled. There are two modes of low/high error select: Mode #1:

The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not exceeding a MAXIMUM delivery pressure (secondary).

Mode #2:

The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable BELOW its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not dropping below a MINIMUM pressure value (secondary).

Considering these modes, select your entry according to the following flow diagram.

MODE #1

MODE #2

Are both primary and secondary actions forward?

Are both primary and secondary actions forward?

yes

yes

Enter [L] (Low Error Select)

no yes

Is secondary action forward?

Enter [H] (High Error Select)

no yes

Is secondary action forward?

no

no

Enter [H] (High Error Select)

{PL} Startup Mode (L/M)

Enter [L] (Low Error Select)

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of power. Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before the system reset. Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual control mode and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.

{PL} PID Tag

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the PID controller output % signal on the LCD display.

20/24.71 04/98


2-15

Chapter 2


2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output Settings INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

Press [n] [Enter] at ‘Config D/A Out "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries (n = D/A Output #):


{L1} Analog Output #1

at 4mA

at 20mA

__________

__________

__________

Under ‘Assign’, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the digital-to-analog output points. Under ‘at 4mA’ and ‘at 20mA’, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at 4mA and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0 bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 bbls/hr).

Rmk

_______________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each digital-to-analog output.

{L1} Analog Output #2 Rmk

Rmk

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

__________

__________

_______________


__________

_______________

{L1} Analog Output #3

2-16

Assign

__________

__________

__________

_______________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings Enter [Y] at ‘Front Pnl Counters’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

{L1} Front Panel Counter

Counter A

Counter B

Counter C

__________

__________

__________

Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this electromechanical counter. 3

The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, m , etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10 pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output and continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.

Rmk

____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each front panel counter.

Pulses/Unit

__________

__________

__________

Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-17

Chapter 2


2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements Program Booleans - These 64 Boolean statements are evaluated every 100 msec starting at Point 1025 continuing through 1088. Each statement can contain up to 3 Boolean variables, optionally preceded by the slash (/) denoting the NOT Function and separated by a valid Boolean operator: Operator Symbol NOT / AND & OR + EXOR * EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003 Boolean 1025 is true when point 1002 is true AND point 1003 is NOT true. Note: Points 1002 and 1003 in this example reflect the status of Physical I/O Points 2 and 3. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be used in a statement. Statements can contain the results from other statements. E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105 Boolean 1026 is true when Boolean 1025 is NOT true OR Point 1105 is true. Using the ‘=’ operator, the result of a statement can initiate a command. E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026 Request a ‘Snapshot Report’ when Boolean 1026 is true. Note: See Volume 4 for detailed list of Booleans and Status Commands.

2-18

Enter [Y] at ‘Program Booleans ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: Boolean Point 10xx

Equation or Statement

Rmk (Comment or Remark)

25:

_______________________ _______________________

26:

_______________________ _______________________

27:

_______________________ _______________________

28:

_______________________ _______________________

29:

_______________________ _______________________

30:

_______________________ _______________________

31:

_______________________ _______________________

32:

_______________________ _______________________

33:

_______________________ _______________________

34:

_______________________ _______________________

35:

_______________________ _______________________

36:

_______________________ _______________________

37:

_______________________ _______________________

38:

_______________________ _______________________

39:

_______________________ _______________________

40:

_______________________ _______________________

41:

_______________________ _______________________

42:

_______________________ _______________________

43:

_______________________ _______________________

44:

_______________________ _______________________

45:

_______________________ _______________________

46:

_______________________ _______________________

47:

_______________________ _______________________

48:

_______________________ _______________________

49:

_______________________ _______________________

50:

_______________________ _______________________

51:

_______________________ _______________________

52:

_______________________ _______________________

53:

_______________________ _______________________

54:

_______________________ _______________________

55:

_______________________ _______________________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Boolean Point 10xx


Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

56:

_______________________ _______________________

57:

_______________________ _______________________

58:

_______________________ _______________________

59:

_______________________ _______________________

Program Booleans - These 64 Boolean statements are evaluated every 100 msec starting at Point 1025 continuing through 1088. Each statement can contain up to 3 Boolean variables, optionally preceded by the slash (/) denoting the NOT Function and separated by a valid Boolean operator: Operator Symbol NOT / AND & OR + EXOR * EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003 Boolean 1025 is true when point 1002 is true AND point 1003 is NOT true. Note: Points 1002 and 1003 in this example reflect the status of Physical I/O Points 2 and 3. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be used in a statement. Statements can contain the results from other statements. E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105 Boolean 1026 is true when Boolean 1025 is NOT true OR Point 1105 is true. Using the ‘=’ operator, the result of a statement can initiate a command. E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026 Request a ‘Snapshot Report’ when Boolean 1026 is true.

60:

_______________________ _______________________

61:

_______________________ _______________________

62:

_______________________ _______________________

63:

_______________________ _______________________

64:

_______________________ _______________________

65:

_______________________ _______________________

66:

_______________________ _______________________

67:

_______________________ _______________________

68:

_______________________ _______________________

69:

_______________________ _______________________

70:

_______________________ _______________________

71:

_______________________ _______________________

72:

_______________________ _______________________

73:

_______________________ _______________________

74:

_______________________ _______________________

75:

_______________________ _______________________

76:

_______________________ _______________________

77:

_______________________ _______________________

78:

_______________________ _______________________

79:

_______________________ _______________________

80:

_______________________ _______________________

81:

_______________________ _______________________

82:

_______________________ _______________________

83:

_______________________ _______________________

84:

_______________________ _______________________

85:

_______________________ _______________________

86:

_______________________ _______________________

87:

_______________________ _______________________

88:

_______________________ _______________________

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-19

Chapter 2


2.5.13. Programmable Variables These 64 variable statements are evaluated every 500 msec starting at the statement that determines the value of Points 7025 through 7088. Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. Variables can be optionally preceded by the ‘$’ symbol denoting the ABSOLUTE value of the variable is to be used. Constants are identified by placing a ’#’ symbol ahead of the number. These and other operators are: Operator Symbol ABSOLUTE $ CONSTANT # POWER & MULTIPLY * DIVIDE / ADD + SUBTRACT EQUAL = IF ) GOTO G MOVE : COMPARE % INDIRECT “ The order of precedence is: 1) ABSOLUTE 2) POWER 3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE 4) ADD/SUBTRACT In cases where operators have the same precedence, statements are evaluated left to right. E.g.: The value of floating point variable 7035 is defined as: 35:7027*7026 The power operator is evaluated first (the value of Point 7035 is set equal to the square root of the number contained in Point 7027) and the result is multiplied by the number stored in variable 7026. Note that statements can contain the results of other statements. (See OmniCom Help for more information by pressing [F1] on your PC keyboard in the “Configure Variable Statement’ menu.)

2-20

Programmable Variable Statements

Enter [Y] at ‘Program Variables ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: Prog Variable 70xx


Comment or Remark

25:

_______________________ _______________________

26:

_______________________ _______________________

27:

_______________________ _______________________

28:

_______________________ _______________________

29:

_______________________ _______________________

30:

_______________________ _______________________

31:

_______________________ _______________________

32:

_______________________ _______________________

33:

_______________________ _______________________

34:

_______________________ _______________________

35:

_______________________ _______________________

36:

_______________________ _______________________

37:

_______________________ _______________________

38:

_______________________ _______________________

39:

_______________________ _______________________

40:

_______________________ _______________________

41:

_______________________ _______________________

42:

_______________________ _______________________

43:

_______________________ _______________________

44:

_______________________ _______________________

45:

_______________________ _______________________

46:

_______________________ _______________________

47:

_______________________ _______________________

48:

_______________________ _______________________

49:

_______________________ _______________________

50:

_______________________ _______________________

51:

_______________________ _______________________

52:

_______________________ _______________________

53:

_______________________ _______________________

54:

_______________________ _______________________

55:

_______________________ _______________________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Prog Variable 70xx

TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you enter in the flow computer.

Note: See Volume 4 for detailed list of Booleans and Status Commands

Valid Numeric Variables These are any long integer or floating point number within the database (Points 50008999), including Boolean variables. For the purpose of evaluation, Boolean variables have the value of 1.0 if they are True and 0.0 if they are False.

20/24.71 w 04/98


Comment or Remark

56:

_______________________ _______________________

57:

_______________________ _______________________

58:

_______________________ _______________________

59:

_______________________ _______________________

60:

_______________________ _______________________

61:

_______________________ _______________________

62:

_______________________ _______________________

63:

_______________________ _______________________

64:

_______________________ _______________________

65:

_______________________ _______________________

66:

_______________________ _______________________

67:

_______________________ _______________________

68:

_______________________ _______________________

69:

_______________________ _______________________

70:

_______________________ _______________________

71:

_______________________ _______________________

72:

_______________________ _______________________

73:

_______________________ _______________________

74:

_______________________ _______________________

75:

_______________________ _______________________

76:

_______________________ _______________________

77:

_______________________ _______________________

78:

_______________________ _______________________

79:

_______________________ _______________________

80:

_______________________ _______________________

81:

_______________________ _______________________

82:

_______________________ _______________________

83:

_______________________ _______________________

84:

_______________________ _______________________

85:

_______________________ _______________________

86:

_______________________ _______________________

87:

_______________________ _______________________

88:

_______________________ _______________________


2-21

Chapter 2


2.5.14. User Display Settings Valid Index Number Assignments - Any 32-bit integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be viewed via a user display (see Volume 4 for a complete listing). Valid Key Press Sequences - You may select a sequence of up to 4 key presses to recall each display. This does not count the [Display/Enter] key press which must be used to signal the end of the sequence. Each key is identified by the red A through Z character on each valid key. Valid keys are listed below [A] - also labeled [Gross] [B] - also labeled [Net] [C] - also labeled [Mass] [D] - also labeled [Energy] [E] - also labeled [S.G./API] [F] - also labeled [Control] [G] - also labeled [Temp] [H] - also labeled [Press] [I] - also labeled [Density] [J] - also labeled [D.P.] [K] - also labeled [Orifice] [L] - also labeled [Meter] [M] - also labeled [Time] [N] - also labeled [Counts] [O] - also labeled [Factor] [P] - also labeled [Preset] [Q] - also labeled [Batch] [R] - also labeled [Analysis] [S] - also labeled [Print] [T] - also labeled [Prove] [U] - also labeled [Status] [V] - also labeled [Alarms] [W] - also labeled [Product] [X] - also labeled [Setup] [Y] - also labeled [Input] [Z] - also labeled [Output] The [↑ ↑ ]/[↓ ↓ ]/[← ← ]/[→ → ] (Up/ Down/Left/Right arrow) keys and the [Prog], [Alpha Shift] and [Clear] keys cannot be used in a key press sequence.

2-22

Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at ‘User Display ? “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

User Display #1 Key Press

_______________

Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User key press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.

Var #1 Tag

_______________

Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.

Var #1 Index

_______________

Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Each variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Boolean integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.

Var #1 Dec.

_______________

Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0 though 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.

Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


_______________ Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


_______________ Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation User Display #4

Valid Index Number Assignments - Any 32-bit integer or floating point variable within the database can be assigned to be viewed via a user display (see Volume 4 for a complete listing). Valid Key Press Sequences - You may select a sequence of up to 4 key presses to recall each display. This does not count the [Display/Enter] key press which must be used to signal the end of the sequence. Each key is identified by the red A through Z character on each valid key. Valid keys are listed below [A] - also labeled [Gross] [B] - also labeled [Net] [C] - also labeled [Mass] [D] - also labeled [Energy] [E] - also labeled [S.G./API] [F] - also labeled [Control] [G] - also labeled [Temp] [H] - also labeled [Press] [I] - also labeled [Density] [J] - also labeled [D.P.] [K] - also labeled [Orifice] [L] - also labeled [Meter] [M] - also labeled [Time] [N] - also labeled [Counts] [O] - also labeled [Factor] [P] - also labeled [Preset] [Q] - also labeled [Batch] [R] - also labeled [Analysis] [S] - also labeled [Print] [T] - also labeled [Prove] [U] - also labeled [Status] [V] - also labeled [Alarms] [W] - also labeled [Product] [X] - also labeled [Setup] [Y] - also labeled [Input] [Z] - also labeled [Output] The [↑ ↑ ]/[↓ ↓ ]/[← ← ]/[→ → ] (Up/ Down/Left/Right arrow) keys and the [Prog], [Alpha Shift] and [Clear] keys cannot be used in a key press sequence.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Key Press

_______________ Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________

Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


_______________


_______________ Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


_______________ Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________

Tag

Index #

Decimal Pos.

Var #1

____________

________

____________

Var #2

____________

________

____________

Var #3

____________

________

____________

Var #4

____________

________

____________


_______________


2-23

Chapter 2


2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at ‘Config Digital “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries: Assign

Digital #1

________

Rmk

Assigning as Pulse Outputs - Meter and Station Accumulators may be output in the form of pulses. Pulse Width - Pulse width is measured using 10msec ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second. Pulse per Unit - Pulse per unit entry can be used to provide unit conversion (e.g.: entering 4.2 pulses per barrel will give 1 pulse every 10 gallons as there are 42 gallons in a barrel). The units of volume, mass and energy flow are the same as is displayed on the LCD.

Digital #2

________

Rmk Digital #3

________

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #5

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #6

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #7

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #8

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #9

________

Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #10 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #12

2-24

________ ________

_______________

Digital #4

Rmk

________ ________

_______________

Digital #11 Assigning as Control Output - Any internal alarm or Boolean can be output.

________ ________

Delay Off

_______________

Rmk Config Digital ”n” - Assign each physical I/O point to a Modbus address of a Boolean variable. There are no limitations as to what Boolean points can be assigned to physical I/O points. Enter [0] (zero) for Modbus control.

Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Assign

Delay On/Off - Used to delay or stretch a control output. The delay is measured using 100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1 second. Assigning as Status or Command Inputs Switches, etc., can be used to trigger events within the flow computer, such as end a batch or start a prove sequence (see the facing page for more details).

Digital #13 Rmk Digital #14 Rmk Digital #15 Rmk

________ ________

________ ________

________

________ ________

________ ________

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #17 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #18

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #19 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #20 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #21 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #22 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #23 Rmk

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________

Digital #24

20/24.71 w 04/98

________

_______________

Digital #16

Rmk

________ ________

_______________

Rmk Note: See Volume 4 for valid assignments.

________ ________

Delay Off

_______________

Rmk 1700 Dummy Boolean Assign all physical I/O points which will be used only in Boolean statements for sequencing or control to 1700. This sets up the points as an input only.

________

Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On

________

________ ________

________ ________

_______________


2-25

Chapter 2


2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Serial I/O “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:


Port #1

Port #2

Port #3

Port #4

{L1} Baud Rate

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Number of Data Bit

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Number of Stop Bit

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Parity Bit (E/O/N)

_______

_______

_______

_______

{L1} Xmit Key Delay

_______

_______

_______

_______

You must enter [0] for Transmitter Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared printer.

{L1} Printer = 0, Modbus = 1

_______

This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only.

{L1} Protocol Type Baud Rates Available 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400.

_______

This entry corresponds to Serial Port #4 only. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port: 0=Modbus RTU, 1=Modbus ASCII, 2=Modbus RTU (modem), 3=Allen Bradley Full Duplex, 4=Allen Bradley Half Duplex.

{L1} Modbus ID Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU Modbus.

_______

{L1} Modbus Type Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2. Parity Bit - Odd, Even, None. Transmitter Carrier Key Delay - Delays are approximate only. 0=msec, 1=50msec, 2=100msec, 3=150msec. Modbus Type - Select the protocol type which matches the Modbus master device. If the master can support either ASCII or RTU, choose RTU protocol as it is approximately twice as efficient as the ASCII protocol. Modicon  Compatible OmniCom will not operate if downloading configuration with this entry set to ‘Y’.

2-26

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

_______

_______

_______

This entry does not apply to Serial Port #4. Enter the Modbus Protocol Type: 0=Modbus RTU binary protocol, 1=Modbus ASCII protocol, 2=Modbus RTU (Modem). Make sure that you have entered the correct number of Data Bits; 8 for RTU or 7 for ASCII.

{L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.: 984 series fitted with the Enhanced Executive Cartridge) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell TDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type. In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTU modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII mode transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bit registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, index numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100. IEEE Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:

NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT Byte #1

Byte #2

Biased Exponent

MS Mantissa

Byte #3

Byte #4

Mantissa

LS Mantissa

ORDER TRANSMITTED Byte #1

Byte #2

Byte #3

Byte #4

Mantissa

LS Mantissa

Biased Exponent

MS Mantissa


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} CRC Enabled

Skip CRC/LCR Check - If you have disabled the error checking on incoming messages, you must substitute dummy bytes in the message string. Outgoing messages will always include the error checking bytes.

_______

_______

_______

_______

Many protocols use either a CRC, LCR or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the eror checking on incomimg messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the master slave communication link. Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity always enter [Y] during normal running conditions. Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming messages. This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications Settings Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple Modbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-topeer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data. Enter [Y] at ‘Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following submenu: {L1} Activate Redundancy

_______________

The active redundancy feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow computer receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in “redundancy”. Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meter factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuring that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of the PID and ticketing functions. The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdog failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status, 2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB980402 in Volume 5.)

{L1} Next Master TIP - For maximum efficiency, always start Modbus ID numbers from 1.

_______________

Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communication sequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it will attempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID. Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on the communication link. Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbus slave port.

{L1} Last ID # Master in Sequence

_______________

Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peer communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unable to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt to establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying until the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1. Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.

{L1} Retry Timer

_______________

Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry to establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flow computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery from communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peer-to-peer links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time to respond.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-27

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration {L1} #1 Slave ID


_______________

Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved in the transaction. Modbus ID ‘0’ can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devices connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.

Read/Write

_______________

Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave. INFO - The Omni Flow Computer determines what Modbus function code and what data type is involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the Omni’s database. The Source Index determines the data type for a ‘write’. The Destination Index determines the data type for a ‘read’. Function codes used are: 01=Read Multiple Booleans 15=Write Multiple Booleans 03=Read Multiple Variables 16=Write Multiple Variables

Source

_______________

Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained, corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slave’s database index number when the transaction is a ‘read’, and the master’s database index number when the transaction is a ‘write’. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.

Points

_______________

Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of points that can be transferred depends on the type of data. IEEE floats (4bytes each)=63 max; 32-bit Integers (4 bytes each)=63 max; 16-bit integers (2 bytes each)=127 max; packed coils or status (8 to a byte)=2040 max. The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination index number determines the data type when the transactions is a ‘read’. The source index number determines the data type when the transaction is a ‘write’.

Dest Indx

_______________

Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index or address). If the transaction is a ‘read’, this will be the index number within the master Omni’s database. If the transaction is a ‘write’, this will be the register number within the remote slave’s database.

{L1} #2-Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #3 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #4 Slave ID

2-28

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} #5 Slave ID


_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #6 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #7 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #8 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #9 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #10- Slave ID

20/24.71 w 04/98

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________


2-29

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration {L1} #11 Slave ID


INFO - The Omni Flow Computer determines what Modbus function code and what data type is involved by the Modbus index number of the data within the Omni’s database. The Source Index determines the data type for a ‘write’. The Destination Index determines the data type for a ‘read’. Function codes used are: 01=Read Multiple Booleans 15=Write Multiple Booleans 03=Read Multiple Variables 16=Write Multiple Variables

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #12 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #13 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #14 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #15 Slave ID

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________

{L1} #16 Slave ID

2-30

_______________

Read/Write

_______________

Source

_______________

Points

_______________

Dest Indx

_______________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.5.18. Custom Modbus  Data Packet Settings INFO - Packets defined are usually read-only and must always be retrieved as a packet. When Modicon 984 is selected these packet setup entries are used to define a logical array of variables which can be read or written in any grouping. The number of data points is always input in terms of Omni “logical” elements; i.e., an IEEE floating piont number comprises two 16-bit words but is considered one logical element.

Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and 401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode). Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at ‘Custom Packet “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database address or Modbus index number for each data point of each group. Under Points, emter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data group.

Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001) Index # / Points

Index # / Points

Index # / Points

Index # / Points

#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____ #5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____ #9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____ #13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____ #17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____


Index # / Points

Index # / Points

Index # / Points

#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____ #5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____


Index # / Points

Index # / Points

Index # / Points

#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____ #5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____ #9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____ #13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____ #17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-31

Chapter 2


2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller Setup INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key presses.

Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 “Communicating with AllenBradley  Programmable Logic Controllers” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘PLC Group “n”’ submenu.


2.5.20. Archive File Setup

2-32

Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 “Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘Archive File “n”’ submenu.


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.6. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

Setting Up the Time and Date

2.6.1.

Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu

Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Time/Date Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.6.2.

Time and Date Settings

{L1} Time :

____:____:____

Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

{L1} Date :

____/____/____

Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or’dd/mm/yy’. To change only the month, day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

{L1} Select mm/dd/yy ?

_____________

Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]: Y= Month/day/year, N=Day/Month/Year).

Time and Date Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Time] [Enter] and use [] / [] keys to scroll.

20/24.71 04/98


2-33

Chapter 2


2.7. Meter Station Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [Enter] and use [] / [] keys to scroll. Meter Station Run Switching Flow Rate Thresholds - The Omni flow computer has 3 Boolean flags which are set or reset depending on the station flow rate: ❑ Run Switching Flag #1 at Modbus database point 1824. ❑ Run Switching Flag #2 at Modbus database point 1825. ❑ Run Switching Flag #3 at Modbus database point 1826. Each of these flags has a low threshold and high threshold flow rate. Each flag is set when the station flow rate exceeds the corresponding high threshold value. These flags reset when the station flow rate falls below the respective low threshold limit. See Chapter 3 for more information on how to include these flags in Boolean statements to automatically switch meter runs depending on flow rates.

Configuring the Meter Station

2.7.1.

Accessing the Station Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Station Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.7.2.

Meter Station Settings

{L1} Station ID

_______________

Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user custom reports (Modbus database point 4815).

Flow Low

_______________

Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point 1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point 1809).

Flow High

_______________

Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database point 1812).

{L1} G FullScal

_______________

Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)

{L1} M FullScal

_______________

Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable representing station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

Flag #1

{L1} Thre Lo

Flag #2

Flag #3

____________ ____________ ____________

Enter the flow rate Low Threshold value which resets each Station Run Switching Flag when the station gross flow rate falls below this limit (see sidebar).

{L1} Thre Hi

____________ ____________ ____________

Enter the flow rate High Threshold value which sets each Station Run Switching Flag when the station gross flow rate exceeds this limit (see sidebar).

2-34


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} Common Batch Stack


_______________

Enter [Y] to set up the flow computer to use a common product on all four meter runs; i.e., to run the same product at the same time on all 4 meter runs. Enter [N] to run different products at the same time on each meter run.

{L1} Batch Warning TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Some of these entries may not appear on the display or in OmniCom. Depending on the various configuration settings of your specific metering system, only those configuration options which are applicable will be displayed.

_______________

Enter the quantity of barrels for the Batch Preset Warning. This entry displays only when Common Batch Stack is selected. The Batch preset counters are activated when a non-zero number is entered for batch size on the batch sequence stack (see previous chapter on Batching Operations). The batch preset reached flag (database point 1819) will be activated whenever the batch preset counter counts down to zero. The batch warning flag (database point 1818) will be activated when the batch preset counter is equal or less than this entry.

{L1} Batch Preset Unit

_______________

Enter the selected Batch Preset Counter Units: 0=Net (standard) volume units, 1=Gross (actual) volume units, 2=Mass units.

{L1} Grv Change

_______________

This entry represents the Specific Gravity Rate of Change and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used to detect product changes in the pipeline (product interface). 3

INFO - See the previous chapter for a description of batching features of the Omni flow computer.

Enter the Gravity Rate of Change in specific gravity units per barrel or m for this limit. The Gravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1813) is activated if the flowing gravity measured by the station densitometer exceeds this preset rate of change.

{L1} Line Pack

_______________

This entry represents the Line Pack Delay and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. In many cases, the station densitometer that detects the product interfaces is 3 installed many net barrels (or net m ) in advance of the metering skid to provide prior warning of a product change. 3

Enter the Line Pack Delay as the quantity of net barrels or net m between the product interface detector densitometer or gravitometer and the valve manifold used to end the batch. A Delayed 3 Gravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1814) is set when this number of barrels or m has been measured after the Product Interface Flag (database point 1813) is activated; i.e., a line pack delay is counted down to zero when a product interface is detected.

{L1} Grav Sample Sec

_______________

This entry represents the Gravity Sample Time and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used with the previous entry to determine the gravity rate of change. Estimate the minimum amount of time (in seconds) it takes for a product change to be complete and set this timer by entering approximately 1/4 to 1/3 of that time. False triggering of the product interface detection flag can be eliminated by ensuring that any density change must exist for at least this many seconds.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-35

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Auxiliary Inputs


Auxiliary Input Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Analysis] [Input] [Enter] or [Analysis] [Input] [n] [Enter] (n = Auxiliary Input # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Low Limit

Input #1

Input #2

Input #3

Input#4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter thhe auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates. The Transducer Failed Low Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal falls 5% below this limit.

High Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates. The Transducer Failed High Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal rises 5% above this limit.

{L2} Override

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value depending, on the override code selected. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding each auxiliary input override value: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

{L1} at 4mA*

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 4mA or 1vol, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters t.

{L1} at 20mA*

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code

_______

_______

_______

_______

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTD Probe is specified.

2-36


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3


2.8. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Run Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll. Alternate Access to Meter Run Settings from Meter Station Setup - After entering the Meter Station Settings, without exiting, press the [] key and you will scroll down through each Meter Run setup entry.

20/24.71 04/98

Configuring Meter Runs

2.8.1.

Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Meter Run Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.8.2.

Meter Run Settings Meter #1

{L1} Meter ID

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID usually appears on reports.

Flow Low

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21) activates. The Low Low Alarm (database point 1n20) activates when the flow rate falls 5% below this limit.

Flow High

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point 1n22) activates. The High High Alarm (database point 1n23) activates when the flow rate rises 5% below this limit.

{L1} G Fullscal

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40 respectively. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

{L1} M Fullscal

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

{L1} Active Freq.

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equal or greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set. By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing by controlling the Disable Meter Run Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 & 1739). Example: 1030:1736=/1105 Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.


2-37

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Meter #1


{L1} ErrThreshold

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Setup). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled. Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogus alarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled until the sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting. Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be disabled until both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per second each.

{L1} ErrCounts

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Setup). It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled. Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. The alarm points are: q q q q

1n48 1n49 1n50 1n51

A/B Comparitor Error Detected A Channel Failed B Channel Failed A and B Channels not equal

The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated error counts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error counts are cleared for every batch. K-Factor Linearization Settings - Turbine and positive displacement flowmeters produce pulses proportional to the flow. The K factor is the quantity of pulses per unit volume 3 (barrels or m ) or mass (lb or kg) that each meter produces. These settings are used to calculate the gross flow rate and volume.

Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings {L1A} K-Factor

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see sidebar and ‘Viscosity Linear’ entry below). Enter the K Factor for each meter run. In this case, only one K Factor is entered per flow meter. Linearization is accomplished by applying a Linearization Correction Factor (LCF) to incoming flow pulses. The LCF is calculated in real-time by monitoring a live viscosity signal. The coefficient entries below are used to calculate the LCF for helical turbine or positive displacement (PD) flowmeters with the following equations: 2

3

4

5

6

LCF(HELICAL) = a + b/x + c/x + d/x + e/x + f/x + g/x TIP - Enter the viscosity linearization setting first and then return to configure the K Factor linearization.

2-38

C

LCF(PD) = a + [(x )/b] Enter the corresponding polynomial or equation coefficients of the linearizing algorithms used to calculate the LCF for each meter run:

Coeff. a

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. b

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. c

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. d

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. e

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. f

________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. g

________ ________ ________ ________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation K-Factor Linearization Settings

Meter Run Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Meter #1

{L1A} K-Factor #1

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry applies for simple flow-based linearization of K Factor; i.e., when “none” is selected for Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization (see sidebar and ‘Viscosity Linear’ entry below). Enter the K Factors for each meter run. In this case, up to 12 K Factors and the associated flowmeter pulse frequencies are entered per meter run to define the K Factor Curve. The flow computer will continuously monitor the flowmeter pulse frequency and calculate gross flow based on and interpolated K Factor derived from the entered data points. Use only K Factor #1 in cases where flowmeter linearizing is not required.

Freq Point 1

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flowmeter pulse frequency associated with the corresponding K Factor. The frequency points must be entered lowest to highest (Hz).

K-Factor #2 Freq Point 2 K-Factor #3 Freq Point 3 K-Factor #4 Freq Point 4 K-Factor #5 Freq Point 5 K-Factor #6 Freq Point 6 K-Factor #7 Freq Point 7 K-Factor #8 Freq Point 8 K-Factor #9 Freq Point 9 K-Factor #10 Freq Point 10 K-Factor #11 Freq Point 11 K-Factor #12 Freq Point 12

20/24.71 04/98

Meter #2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________


2-39

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration More Meter Run Settings


Meter #1

{L1} Auto Prove ? (Y)

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] to enable the auto-proving feature. Enter [N] to disable auto-proving. Enabling the autoprove function will cause the flowmeter to be automatically proved on flow rate changes and after a meter has been out of service. The auto-prove enable is cancelled whenever a meter fails an automatic prove on 10 consecutive attempts.

{L1} Use MF in Net ? (Y)

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] to apply the meter factor in the net and mass flow equations. Enter [N] to ignore the meter factor in flow calculations; nonetheless, it will still appear on all reports.

{L1} Use LCF in Gross ?

________ ________ ________ ________

This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see ‘Viscosity Linear’ entry below). Enter [Y] to apply the Linearization Correction Factor (LCF) to gross flow rate and gross totals. Enter [N] if the LCF is not to be applied. The calculation of the gross indicated volume for each option is as follows: q If “Yes” is selected ð Gross = (Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor) x LCF q If “No” is selected ð Gross = Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor

{L1} Temp Compensated ?

________ ________ ________ ________

In some cases, the flowmeter may be fitted with a mechanical or electronic temperature compensator. Enter [Y] for the Omni Flow Computer to set the temperature correction (VCF) to 1.0000 in all equations. Enter [N] if the meter provides gross uncompensated pulses.

{L1} S&W as Aux “n”

________ ________ ________ ________

Select the auxiliary input or other source to be used to input the S&W % for each meter run: 0=None, 1=Use Auxiliary Input #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= Use Auxiliary Input #1; 5=Modbus Direct. The flow computer will use this input to determine Net Standard Volume (S&W corrected volume). TIP - Enter the viscosity linearization setting first and then return to configure the K Factor linearization.

{L1} Viscosity Linear

________ ________ ________ ________

Select the source of the viscosity value for the LCF for each meter run: 0=None, 1=Use Auxiliary Input #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= Use Auxiliary Input #1; 5=Modbus Direct.

{L1} Select Helical ?

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter [Y] to select a Helical Turbine Flowmeter. Enter [N] to select a Positive Displacement (PD) Flowmeter. The algorithm used to linearize the flowmeter for flow and viscosity effects is different depending on whether the flowmeter is a helical turbine type or a PD type.

{L1} Meter Model

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

{L1} Meter Size

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

{L1} Serial No.

________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on the prove report.

2-40


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.9. INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Temperature Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Temp] [Enter], or [Temp] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Temp] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTD

Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature

2.9.1.

Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Temperature Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.9.2.

Meter Temperature Settings Station

Low Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry fail to low.

High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry fail to high.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

Probe is specified.

20/24.71 04/98


2-41

Chapter 2


2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Setup via the Random Access Method To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Density] [Temp] [Enter]. INFO - The Density Temperature sensor is used to compensate for temperature expansion effects which effect the periodic time of oscillation of the densitometer. It is also used when desired to calculate the density of the liquid to reference temperature using API 2540; Table 23, 23A or 23B.

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTD Probe is specified.

Meter Density Temperature Settings Station

Low Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________



{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

2.9.4. Prover Temperature Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Prove] [Temp] [Enter] or [Temp] [Prove] [Enter]. Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Prover Temperature Settings

Low Limit

Inlet

Outlet

___________

___________

Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

___________

___________

Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

___________

___________


{L2} Override Code

___________

___________

Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

2-42


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.


{L1} @ 4mA*

Inlet

Outlet

___________

___________


{L1} @ 20mA*

___________

___________


{L1} Damping Code

___________

___________

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

2.9.5.

Prover Density Temperature Settings

Low Limit

___________

___________

Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

___________

___________

Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

___________

___________


{L2} Override Code

___________

___________


{L1} at 4mA*

___________

___________


{L1} at 20mA*

___________

___________


{L1} Damping Code

___________

___________

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-43

Chapter 2


2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Meter Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Press] [Enter], or [Press] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Press] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Pressure Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings Station

Low Limit

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry fail to low.

High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry fail to high.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.

2-44


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3


2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels.

Station

Low Limit TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

Meter Density Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Density] [Press] [Enter]. INFO - The Density Pressure sensor is used to compensate for pressure effects which effect the periodic time of oscillation of the densitometer. It is also used when desired to calculate the density of the liquid at the densitometer to equilibrium pressure using API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or 11.2.2.

Note:

*

Not Valid when a RTD Probe is specified.

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________



{L1} at 4mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________ This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.

2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings Prover Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Prove] [Press] [Enter] or [Press] [Prove] [Enter].

Low Limit

Inlet

Outlet

___________

___________

Enter the pressure below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

___________

___________

Enter the pressure above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

___________

___________


{L2} Override Code

___________

___________


20/24.71 w 04/98


2-45

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration {L1} at 4mA

___________

___________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code

___________

___________

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry. For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.

{L1} Plenum Pressure at 4mA

___________

Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.

{L1} Plenum Pressure at 20mA

___________

Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.

{L1} Damping Code

___________


2-46


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels.

Low Limit TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer.

Prover Density Pressure Setup via the Random Access Method - To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Prove] [Density] [Press] [Enter]. INFO - The Density Pressure sensor is used to compensate for pressure effects which effect the periodic time of oscillation of the densitometer. It is also used when desired to calculate the density of the liquid at the densitometer to equilibrium pressure using API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or 11.2.2.

Note:

*

Not Valid when a RTD Probe is specified.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Inlet

Outlet

___________

___________

Enter the pressure below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

___________

___________

Enter the pressure above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

___________

___________


{L2} Override Code

___________

___________


{L1} at 4mA*

___________

___________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} at 20mA*

___________

___________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

{L1} Damping Code

___________

___________



2-47

Chapter 2


2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / API Density INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option.

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Grav/Density Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings Specific Gravity, API or Density Station

{L1A} Cor Factor

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. They are not available when using API or Specific Gravity gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually very close to 1.0000).

Low Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

{L2} Override

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.

{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average, 4=On transmitter failure use Station transducer value, 5=On transmitter failure use absolute value of override SG/API of the running product.

{L1} at 4 mA

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

2-48


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} at 20 mA

Meter Specific Gravity/Density Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then enter the key press sequence that corresponds to the options you want to configure: Specific Gravity/API: To access these settings, press [S.G./API] [Enter] or [S.G./API] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [S.G./API] [Enter]. Density: To access these settings, press [Density] [Enter] or [Density] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Meter] [n] [Density] [Enter]. Digital Densitometers: To access these settings, press [Factor] [Density] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Density] [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. (“n” represents the meter run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Note: Digital densitometers can only be configured via the Random Access Method. INFO - Densitometer constants are usually on a calibration certificate supplied by the densitometer manufacturer. Usually they are based on SI or metric units. For US customary applications you must ensure that the constants entered are based on gr/cc, °F and PSIG. Constants are always displayed using scientific notation; e.g.: K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc) To enter K0, press [Clear] and press [-1.490205] [Alpha Shift] [E] [+00] [Enter].

20/24.71 w 04/98

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

Digital Densitometers The following entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three selections which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 = UGC. ({L1} Password Level required, except for the Correction Factor.) Solartron

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2). Meter Station only applies Factor A.

Correction Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________ K0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K18

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K19

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K20A

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K20B

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K21A

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K21B

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

KR

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

KJ

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Sarasota

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).

Correction Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________ D0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

T0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

T coef

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

T cal

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcoef

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcal

________ ________ ________ ________ ________


2-49

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration UGC

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Digital Densitometer Setup via the Random Access Method - To access these settings, in the Program Mode press [Factor] [Density] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or [Density] [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).

2-50

Meter #1

Meter #2

Meter #3

Meter #4

Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).

Correction Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________ K0

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

TC

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pc

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp1

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp2

________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp3

________ ________ ________ ________ ________


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. PID Control Output Setup via the Random Access Method - Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Control] [n] [Enter] (n = PID Control Loop # 1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘PID Control Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings Loop #1

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Operating Mode Manual Valve (Y/N)

Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] to change to AUTO mode.

Local Set.Pt (Y/N)

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] for REMOTE set point mode.

Sec Set.Pt

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on the "Error Select" entry in the ‘Config PID’ menu.

Tuning Adjustments {L1} Primary Gain

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).

{L1} Pri. Rpts/Min

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/Integral Factor the reciprocal of the reset period).

{L1} Sec. Gain

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band). The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product of this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use this entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.

20/24.71 04/98


2-51

Chapter 2



{L1} Sec. Rpts/Min

Loop #2

Loop #3

Loop #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/Integral Factor ð the reciprocal of the reset period).

{L1} Deadband %

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out of this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error (deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.

{L1} Start Up Ramp PID Startup, Stop and Shutdown Ramp Command Points - These have been added to eliminate the need to manipulate the PID permissives directly. Using these command points greatly simplifies operation of the PID ramping functions. (See database points 17271730, 1788-1791, 1792-1795 respectively.)

Loop #1

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at start-up. st The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points 1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.

{L1} Shutdown Ramp

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at shutdown. st When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at the shutdown ramp rate. nd

During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points 1752-1755) is nd used to provide a “ramp hold” function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before entering the ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-down limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to 0% (see sidebar).

{L1} Min Output %

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In many cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control output be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The control output is then immediately set to 0%.

Remote Setpoint {L1} Low Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to drop while in the remote setpoint mode.

{L1} High Limit

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to rise while in the remote setpoint mode.

{L1} S.P. at 4mA

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 4 mA (1 volt) input. You must set this and the following entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used to determine the scaling of the primary controlled variable.

{L1} S.P. at 20mA

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 20mA (5 volt) input. You must set this and the previous entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used to determine the scaling of the primary controlled variable, which is usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.

2-52


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Secondary Variable {L1} Zero Value

_______

_______

_______

_______

If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable which will represent zero.

{L1} F.S. Value

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-53

Chapter 2


2.13. Configuring Provers INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Prover Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Prove] [Setup] [Enter] and use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Prover Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.13.2. Prover Settings {L2} # of Runs to Average

_______________

Enter the number of consecutive runs required to be considered a complete prove sequence This number must be between 2 and 10.

{L2} Maximum # Runs

_______________

Enter the maximum number of runs that will be attempted to achieve a complete prove sequence. This number must be between 2 and 99.

{L1} Prover Type

_______________

Enter the type of prover in use: 0=Unidirectional Pipe Prover, 1=Bi-directional Pipe Prover, 2=Unidirectional Compact Prover, 3=Bi-directional Small Volume Prover, 4=Master Meter, 5=2 Series Bi-directional Pipe Prover. Select the Unidirectional Compact [2] if you are using a Brooks Compact Prover. Select the Master Meter Method to compare meter 1, 2 or 3 against the master meter. Meter #4 is always the master meter. For Double Chronometry Proving use type 2 or 3.

{L2} Pv Volume

_______________

This entry does not apply when the prover type selected is a Uni-Compact. Enter the water draw volume of the prover at base temperature and pressure. Certain models of compact provers have different water draws, depending on whether the meters are upstream or downstream. This entry represents the “round-trip” volume for bidirectional provers and the downstream volume for compact provers. When using the Master Meter Method, enter the minimum volume that must flow through the master meter (Meter #4) for each prove run.

# Passes to Avg

_______________

This entry applies to Unidirectional and Bi-directional compact provers only. Enter the number of single passes that will be averaged to make each run when using the pulse interpolation method. Valid entries are 1 through 25. A pass is round trip when using a bi-directional prover.

2-54


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Exp. Coeff


_______________

This entry applies to unidirectional compact provers only (except Brooks SVP see following setting). Enter the squared coefficient of thermal expansion for any switch rod components which may affect the water draw volume of the compact prover. This Thermal Expansion Coefficient is used to calculate the CTSP factor for the compact prover: q For US Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000124; Stainless Steel = 0.0000177. q For Metric Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000223; Stainless Steel = 0.0000319.

Coef Invar

_______________

This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. This prover uses an invar rod to separate the optical detector switches. The rod has a coefficient of 0.0000008 per °F (US units) or 0.0000014 per °C (metric units).

Plenum Con

_______________

This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Nitrogen Spring Plenum Pressure Constant for used to calculate the plenum pressure needed to operate a the Brooks Compact Prover. This pressure is related to the prover line pressure at the time of proving: Plenum Pressure = (Line Pressure / Plenum Constant) + 60 Psig The plenum constant depends on the size of the Brooks Compact Prover. Valid values are: SIZE

PLENUM CONSTANT

SIZE

PLENUM CONSTANT

8-inch

3.50

18-inch

5.00

12-inch Mini

3.20

24-inch

5.88

12-inch Standard

3.20

Larger

Refer to Brooks

Deadband %

_______________

This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Plenum Pressure Deadband %. The Brooks Compact Prover requires that the plenum pressure be maintained within certain limits. The flow computer calculates the correct plenum pressure at the beginning of each prove sequence and will charge or vent nitrogen until the measured plenum pressure is within the specified deadband %.

{L1} Up Volume

_______________

This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the upstream water draw volume at base temperature and pressure, if applicable.

Down Vol

_______________

This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the downstream water draw volume at base temperature and pressure, if applicable.

OverTravel

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the estimated amount of flow that the sphere or piston displaces after activating the first detector switch, multiplied by 1.25.

{L2} Inactive Sec

_______________

Enter the time in seconds before the prove is aborted due to prover inactivity. Make sure you allow enough time for the sphere or piston to travel between detector switches at the lowest flow rate expected. When using the Master Meter Method, allow enough time for the amount of flow to pass through the master meter at the lowest expected flow rate.

{L1} Dia. Inch/mm

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the internal diameter of the prover tube in inches or mm.

{L1} Wall Inch/mm

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the wall thickness of the prover tube, which is used to calculate the CPSP factor

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-55

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration {L1} Elast

Prover Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press Prove] [Setup] [Enter] and use [] / [] keys to scroll.

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube Modulus of Elasticity used to calculate the CPSP factor. ❑ For US Units: Mild Steel = 3.0E7; Stainless Steel = 2.8E7 to 2.9E7. ❑ For Metric Units: 2.07E8 or 1.93E8 to 2.0E8.

{L1} Cubic Exp

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Compact Provers and Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube Cubical Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for full sized pipe provers, used to calculate the CTSP factor. ❑ For US Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000186; Stainless Steel = 0.0000265. ❑ For Metric Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000335; Stainless Steel = 0.00000477.

{L1} Base PSIG

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the atmospheric pressure in Psig or kPag at which the prover was water drawn.

{L1} Base Deg.F/C

_______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Base Temperature in °F or °C at which the prover was water drawn. This entry is used to calculate CTSP.

{L2} Stability Sc

_______________

Enter the Stability Check Sample Time in seconds, used to calculate the rate of change of temperature and flow rate at the prover or master meter. The prove sequence will not start until the temperature and flow rate are stable.

{L2} Sample Dev

_______________

Enter the temperature change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous entry). The change in temperature per sample period must be less than this value for the temperature to be considered stable enough to start a prove.

{L2} Delt Flow

_______________

Enter the flow rate change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous two entries). The change in flow rate per sample period must be less than this value before the flow rate is considered to be stable enough to start a prove.

{L2} Temp Devia

_______________

Enter the prover-to-meter temperature range allowable after the temperature and flow rate have stabilized. The temperature at the meter and the prover must be within this limit or the prove sequence attempt will be aborted.

{L2} MF Repeatability ?

_______________

Enter for the run repeatability calculation based on: 0= run counts, 1= run calculated meter factor. Run counts repeatability is a more stringent test but may be difficult to achieve due to changing temperature and pressure during the prove sequence. Calculating repeatability based upon the calculated meter factor takes into account variations in temperature and pressure, and may be easier to achieve.

{L2} Run Devia %

_______________

Enter the maximum allowable percentage deviation between run counts or run meter factors (depending on selection of previous entry). The deviation is calculated by comparing the high/low meter counts or meter factors based on their low point, as follows: Deviation = 100 (High - Low) / Low Point This deviation is always calculated using the meter factor when the Master Meter Method of proving is selected.

2-56


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L2} MF Devia %


_______________

The prove meter factor (just calculated) is compared against the current meter factor and must be within this percentage range to be accepted as a valid meter factor.

{L2} Auto Implement MF?

_______________

Enter [Y] to automatically implement the new meter factor and store in the appropriate product file. Enter [N] to select not to automatically implement the meter factor determined from the prove.

{L2} Retroactive MF ?

_______________

If you selected to auto-implement the meter factor for the previous entry, enter [Y] to retroactively apply the Meter Factor from the beginning of the batch. The old meter factor will be back calculated out of the current batch and daily totals. The batch and daily totals will be recalculated using the new meter factor. Enter [N] to have the Meter Factor applied from this point on.

Flow Change %

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Auto-Prove Flow Rate Change Percent Threshold. The Flow Rate Percent Change Flag will be set if the current flow rate differs from the last meter proving flow rate by more than this percent (i.e., a request for an auto-prove sequence will be flagged if the net/mass flow rate differs from the last proved rate by more than this percent, and remains outside this limit for the flow rate change period). A request for an automatic prove will only be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow Change Flag are set (see following entry).

Flow Change

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Minimum Flow Rate Change Threshold for automatic proving. The Minimum Flow Change Flag will be set if the current flow rate differs from the last meter proving flow rate by more than this amount. A request for an automatic prove will be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow Change Flag are set (see previous entry). This entry eliminates unnecessary proves that would occur at low flow rates where the percentage change threshold would be a very small flow rate change.

F Stable Min

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Flow Rate Stable Period in minutes, for auto-proving. A change in flow rate must be sustained for at least this period of time before an auto-prove sequence will be attempted.

Mtr Down Hr

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Meter Shut-in Period in hours, for auto-proving. The need for an auto-prove will be flagged if a flowmeter is shut-in for more than this period of time.

Startup Pv

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the startup flow for auto-proving. This is the amount of flow which must occur after startup before an auto-prove is attempted, after a meter has been shut-in for more than the Meter Shut-in Period (see previous entry).

Max. Flow

_______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Maximum Flow between Proves. This entry represents the maximum amount of flow that can occur before a meter will be flagged for an auto-prove sequence, if the flow remains stable and the meter is not shut-in

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-57

Chapter 2


2.14. Configuring Products INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Product Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Product] [Enter] or [Product] [n] [Enter] (n = Product # 1 through 16). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Product Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.14.2.

Product Settings

Product #1 {L1} Name

_______________

Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters), right justified.

{L1} Table Select

_______________

Enter the number that corresponds to the API or GPA table to use for the product: 0 = API 2540 Table 24A (US units) / Table 54A (metric units). 1 = API 2540 Table 24B (US units) / Table 54B (metric units). 2 = Table 24C (US units) / Table 54C (metric units). 3 = GPA TP16 (US units) / TP16M (metric units). 4 = Mass Calculation 5 = Propylene API 11.3.3.2 9US units) / 11.3.3.2M (metric units). 6 = E/P Mix. 7 = P/P Mix. 8 = Ethylene IUPAC 9 = Ethylene NIST 1045 10 = Ethylene API 2565/11.3.2. 11 = Carbon Dioxide CO2PAC 12 = Table 24 - 1952 Edition (US units) / Table 54 - 1952 Edition (metric units) 13 = ASTM D1550/1551 14 = ASTM D1555

{L2} Override API

_______________

This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table is selected above. Enter the API Gravity at reference conditions. It is used to calculate the Volume Correction Factor (VCF) and the Pressure Correction Factor (Cpl). The flow computer will accept any positive override value and use it as the API in calculations. The override gravity can also be entered as specific gravity (see next entry). To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form the densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration). Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to ‘5=On transmitter failure’, use absolute value of override SG/API for this product.

2-58


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L2} Override SG

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. INFO - The following data, rounded to 4 digits, is from GPA 2145-92 and TP16: Product Ethane Propane HD5

S.G. .3562 .5070 .5010 .5050 .5100 Propylene .5228* Iso Butane .5629 .5650 n-Butane .5840 .5850 Iso Pentane .6247 n-Pentane .6311 n-Hexane .6638 Natural Gasolines .6650 n-Heptane .6882 n-Octane .7070 n-Nonane .7219 n-Decane .7342

To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form the densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration). Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to ‘5=On transmitter failure’, use absolute value of override SG/API for this product.

{L2} Override Ref Dens 3

kg/m 355.85 506.90 500.50 504.50 509.50 522.28* 562.34 564.44 583.42 584.42 624.08 630.48 663.14 664.34 687.52 706.30 721.19 733.48

* Propylene figures are derived from API 11.3.3.2. INFO - API 2540; Tables 23A or 23B (US), or 53A or 53B (metric); are also automatically used when applicable. Tables 24A and 53A apply to Generalized Crude Oils (SG range: 1.076-.6110; Dens range: 1075-610.4). Tables 24B and 53B apply to Generalized Products (SG range: 1.076-.6535; Dens range: 1075-652.8). GPA TP16 and TP16M apply to LPG/NGL Products (SG range: .637-.495 on Version 20, and 636.4-494.5 on Version 24 of the Omni. These calculation methods use API Chapter 11.2.1 or 11.2.2, and 11.2.1M or 11.2.2M to calculate the pressure correction factor Cpl.

20/24.71 w 04/98

_______________

This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table is selected above. You may enter an override gravity as either API or SG units when measuring crude oil or generalized refined products. The Computer will accept any positive override value and use it in the calculations.

_______________

This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24) depending on which table is selected above. 3 This is the density at reference conditions (kg/m at reference temperature). It is used to calculate the volume correction factor VCF and the pressure correction factor Cpl. Using a Live Densitometer Signal - Entering a value with a minus sign ahead of it causes the flow computer to use the live density signal to calculate the density at reference temperature. Using the Product Override if the Densitometer Fails - Selecting 'fail code 5' at the densitometer setup menu will cause the flow computer to stop using the live density signal should it fail, and substitute the absolute value of the density override entry as the reference density. E.g.: Entering -750 causes the computer to ignore the override and use the live densitometer signal as 3 long as the transducer is OK. A reference density of 750 kg/m will be used if the densitometer should fail.

{L2} Ref Temperature

_______________

This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24 - Table 54C). Enter the base or reference temperature at which net corrected volumes represent equivalent volumes of liquid.

Alpha Alpha Coefficient. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. API 2540, Tables 24C/54C equations require you to enter a value for 'alpha'. This alpha value is used to calculate the volume correction factor 'VCF'. Enter the thermal expansion coefficient at reference temperature as 0.000xxxx.

F Fact

_______________

F Factor Override. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. Enter 0.0 if you wish the flow computer to use API 11.2.1 or 11.2.2 to calculate the compressibility factor 'F' used in the Cpl equation. Enter the compressibility factor 'F' if you wish to override the API calculated value.

Vapor Pressure

_______________

Vapour Pressure Psia (abs) @ 100°°F (37.8°°C). This entry applies only when GPA TP16 is entered for table select. The GPA TP16 standard specifies that the equilibrium pressure of the flowing fluid be calculated according to GPA TP15. Two equations are specified. The first designed for mainly pure products such as propanes, butanes and natural gasolines requires no input data other than the temperature at flowing conditions and the specific gravity at reference conditions. The second improved correlation is suitable for use with more varied NGL mixes where different product mixes could have the same specific gravity but different equilibrium pressures. If you wish to use the improved second method enter the vapor pressure at 100°F or 37.8°C. Enter a minus number to use the normal TP15 method for propanes, butanes and natural gasolines.


2-59

Chapter 2


Meter Factors

M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Enter the meter factor to be used by this flowmeter whenever this product is flowing. This factor will be automatically updated whenever a meter factor is changed due to a manual entry or an automatic implementation after a successful prove sequence.

Density Factor A/B

_______________

Density correction factor. Enter [0] to select Density Factor A to correct the densitometer. Enter [1] to select Density Factor B to correct the densitometer.

Product #2 Product Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Product] [Enter] or [Product] [n] [Enter] (n = Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________

Override API (Rev 20)

_______________

Override SG (Rev 20)

_______________

Override Ref Dens (Rev 24)

_______________

Ref Temperature (Rev 24)

_______________

Alpha F Factor Vapor PSIA (ABS)

Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #3 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

2-60


_______________

20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Product #4


Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #5 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

20/24.71 w 04/98


_______________

2-61

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Product #6

Product Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Product] [Enter] or [Product] [n] [Enter] (n = Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #7 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

2-62


_______________

20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Product #8


Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #9 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

20/24.71 w 04/98


_______________

2-63

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Product #10 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #11 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

2-64


_______________

20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Product #12 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #13 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

20/24.71 w 04/98


_______________

2-65

Chapter 2

Flow Computer Configuration Product #14 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

Product #15 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

2-66


_______________

20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Product #16 Name

_______________

Table Select

_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


_______________


Meter Factors

_______________ M.F. #1

M.F. #2

M.F. #3

M.F. #4

_______

_______

_______

_______

Density factor A/B

_______________

2.15. Configuring Batches Note: See Chapter 3 “Computer Batching Operations” in Volume 2 for information on configuring your flow computer for batches.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-67

Chapter 2


2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer; i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for configuration data unless a transducer has been defined. Flow Computer Configuration via the Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method when programming an application for the first time as every possible option and variable will be prompted. Once a computer is in operation and you become familiar with the application you can decide to use the faster Random Access Method described below. Once you have finished entering data in a setup submenu, press the [Prog] key to return to the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen. Proceed as described in this manual for each setup option. Factor Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [[Factor] [Enter], or [Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter], or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4). Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

!

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Factor Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.16.2. Factor Settings {L1} Weight H2O

_______________

Weight of Water. Also known as absolute density of water. Weight of a barrel of water @ 60°F or 15°C, and 14.696 PSIA or 101.325 kPa(a). Used to convert from specific gravity units to mass. (From GPA 2145-92 = 8.3372 lbm/Gal. = 350.162 lbs/BBL). Note: This is the true weight of water, NOT the conversion factor used to convert gr/cc to lb/bbl sometimes given as 3 350.507. For metric versions (Revision 24), the default value is 999.012 kg/m .

{L1} Flow Avg Factor

_______________

The flow averaging factor is the number of calculation cycles used to smooth the displayed flow rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A calculation cycle is 500msec).

Alarm Deadband %

_______________

Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or low alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms leaving no room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm' entry. A variable must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before the alarm is cleared. E.g.: High limit is 100°F, Low limit is 20°F, Alarm deadband is set to 2 percent. A transducer input which exceeded 100°F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer signal must drop 2 percent below the high alarm setpoint (98°F) before the alarm will clear.

{L1} Atmos PSIA (ABS)

_______________

Atmospheric Pressure in PSIA (ABS). This is used to convert flowing pressure readings in Psig to absolute pressure units Psia for US Units, and for the metric version in absolute units in conformance to pressure (metric) units selected.

Select Pressure Units This entry is a global selection for all pressure variables within the flow computer: 2

1 Bar = 100 kPA, 1 kg/cm = 98.0665 kPA Display resolution is as follows: XX.X kPA,

X.XXX Bar,

{L1} # Digits, 0=9, 1=8

X.XXX kg/cm

2

_______________

Roll All Totalizers. Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits. Default value is 9 (0). This is a read-only entry. This entry can only be changed at the keypad of the flow computer.

2-68


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. To change totalizer resolution you must first 'Clear All Totals' in the 'Password Maintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You will then be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimal place settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX. Dec Places Gross & Net

_______________

Decimal Places for Gross and Net Totalizer Resolution.

Decimal Places Mass

_______________

Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer Resolution.

Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch and Prove Reports The following two entries determine the number of decimal places for the following factors: Ctlm, Ctlp, Cplm, Cplp, Ctsp, Cpsp, CCF. Meter Factor and Density Pycnometer factor remain fixed at 4. For STRICT adherence to API MPMS 12.2 (default) select 4 decimal places. This is the recommend selection. Selecting 5 decimal places causes the flow computer to perform the normal API internal rounding and truncating rules with the exception of the last round which is to 5 places. Selecting 6 decimal places causes the flow computer to perform no internal rounding and truncating and round the final result to 6 decimal places. Dec Factor Batch Report

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the batch report.

MF Decimal Batch Report

_______________

Enter the number of decimal placesrequired for the meter factor appearing on the batch report.

Dec Factor Prove Report

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the prove report.

MF Decimal Prove Report

_______________

Enter the number of decimal places required for the meter factor appearing on the prove report.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-69

Chapter 2


2.17. Configuring Printers INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ refer to password levels. TIP - Use the blank lines provided next to each configuration option to write down the corresponding settings you entered in the flow computer. Printer Setup via the Random Access Method Setup entries require that you be in the Program Mode. In the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The Program LED will glow green and the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen will appear. Then press [Print] [Setup] [Enter] and use [] / [] keys to scroll.

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Printer Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.17.2. Printer Settings {L1} Computer ID

_______________

Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.

{L1} Interval Min

_______________

Print Interval in Minutes. Enter the number of minutes between each interval report. Entering [0] will disable interval reports. The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will provide one interval report per 24-hour period.

{L1} Interval Start

_______________

Print Interval Start Time. Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based (e.g.: Entering ‘01:00’ with a Print Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every odd hour only).

{L1} Daily RPT Time

_______________

Daily Report Time. Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the contract day (e.g.: 07:00).

{L1} Disable Daily RPT?

_______________

Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from printing. Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.

{L1} Daylight Start

_______________

Daylight Savings Time Start. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.

{L1} Daylight End

_______________

Daylight Savings Time End. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.

{L1} Clr Daily at Batch

_______________

Clear Daily at Batch. Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter regardless of what product is run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch. This would mean that the daily totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but the amount of flow since the last batch end or the daily report

2-70


20/24.71 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation {L1} Auto Hourly Batch ?


_______________

Automatic Hourly Batch Select. Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the hour. If customized reports are selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are selected no batch end report will be printed.

{L1} Weekly Batch ?

_______________

Automatic Weekly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end report in addition to a daily report on a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.).

{L1} Month Batch ?

_______________

Automatic Monthly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch end report in place of a daily report on a specific day of the month (0=No batch end).

{L1} Print Priority

_______________

Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharing a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned the number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority number between 2 and 12.

{L1} Number Nulls

_______________

For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after each carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to ‘0’ if your printer supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector to terminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).

{L1} Default Template ?

_______________

Use Default Report Templates? Y/N. Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default report formats for Daily Batch End, Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have downloaded your own custom report templates using the OmniCom program. Common Printer Control Codes Epson, IBM & Compatible: Condensed Mode= OF Cancel Condensed= 12 OKI Data Models: Condensed Mode= ID Cancel Condensed= IE HP Laser Jet II & Compatible: Condensed= 1B266B3253 Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053

{L1} Condensed

_______________

Condensed Print Mode Control String. Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns when the computer is configured for 4 meter runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character string which will put the printer into the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). Maximum 5 control characters.

{L1} Uncondens

_______________

Cancel Condensed (Normal) Print Mode Control String. Enter the hexadecimal character string which when sent to the printer will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5) Maximum 5 control characters

{L1} Company Name

_______________

Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.

{L1} Location

_______________

Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.

20/24.71 w 04/98


2-71

Volume 3


3. User-Programmable Functions 3.1.

Introduction

The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of data, but there are always some application-specific control functions, calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated. The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application. o o o o

User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements User Programmable Variables and Statements User Configurable Display Screens User Customized Report Templates

The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.

3.2.

3.2.1.

User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements What is a Boolean?

A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer and represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is given an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the state (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to a physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A maximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit switches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-1

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Boolean points are numbered as follows:

INFO - The 4-digit ‘point’ numbers referred to in this chapter are Modbus index numbers used to identify each variable (Boolean or other) within the Modbus database.

1001 through 1024 1025 through 1088 1089 through 1099 1100 through 1199 1200 through 1299 1300 through 1399 1400 through 1499 1500 through 1699 1700 through 1799 1800 through 1899 1900 through 1999* 2100 through 2199 2200 through 2299 2300 through 2399 2400 through 2499 2100 through 2199 2600 through 2623 2700 through 2759 2800 through 2899

Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24 Programmable Boolean Points (64 total) Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total) Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #2 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #3 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #4 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements Command or Status Inputs Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.) Prover Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.) Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #2 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #3 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #4 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.) Miscellaneous Boolean Command Points Station Totalizer Flags

Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 → 1024) Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to 100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have associated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable from 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.

Programmable Boolean Points (1025 → 1088) There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64 Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec. starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O points.

Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 → 1099) There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089 through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel Counters.

3-2


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 → 1650) The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or used in the Boolean statements described above.

Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 → 1699) The 49 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as momentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.

3.2.2.

Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (6001 → 8999)

The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.

3.2.3.

Boolean Statements and Functions

Each Boolean statement consists of up to 7 variables optionally preceded by the Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions 'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to represent the functions: Function

Symbol

NOT AND OR EX OR EQUAL IF GOTO MOVE COMPARE

/ & + * = ) 'G' : %

The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point). Evaluation precedence is left to right.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-3

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions To program the Boolean points proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y)_ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station ? (Y) Config Meter "n" Config Prove ? (Y) Config PID ? (Y) Config D/A Out "n" Front Panel Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables ? User Display ? "n" Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans are as yet programmed, the display shows: Boolean Point #10xx 25: _ 26: 27: Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (TRUE).

INFO - Points 1005 and 1006 reflect the current status of physical I/O Points 05 and 06 which could be inputs connected to the outside world or outputs controlling relays, etc.

For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the 'NOT' function). Boolean Point #10XX 25: /1005+1006 26: _ 27 Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1106 which indicates that meter #1 is being proved (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON whenever 'Meter 1 is being proved' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is ON).

TIP - Leave plenty of empty statements between programmed ones. This will allow you to modify the execution order of your program if you need to later.

Boolean Point #10xx 25: /1005+1006 26: 1106&1025 27: _ Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean points.

3-4


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from 1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the correct order.

Example 1: INFO - Use the Exclusive OR function ‘*’ to compare 2 points. The result of an Exclusive OR of 2 points is true only if both points are different states.

Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application

Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline, provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting command point 1719. How the hardware is configured:

INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026 and 1027 are only used as an example here. Any unused programmable Booleans can be used for this function.

Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700 (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected to flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches activate with flow. Physical I/O point 03 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A 'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on for at least 5 seconds. The Booleans are programmed as follows:

True if Meter #1 fails. True if Meter #2 fails. Request snapshot if either meter fails.

Boolean Point #10xx 25: 1105*1002 26: 1205*1003 27: 1719=1025+1026 28:

Notes: q Boolean Point 1025 is true (Meter 1 failed) whenever 'Meter 1 Active' (Point 1105) differs from 'Flow Detected' Flow Switch 1 (Point 02). q Boolean Point 1026 is true (Meter 2 failed) whenever 'Meter 2 Active' (Point 1205) differs from 'Flow Detected' Flow Switch 2 (Point 03). q Boolean Point 1027 is true (Meter 1 OR 2 failed) whenever point 1025 OR 0126 are true. The Boolean Command Bit 1719 is set when Boolean Point 1027 is true.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-5

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application' Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example shown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow meter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs open for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of the flow meters used.

Fig. 3-1.

Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds

Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings' in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the actual station flow rate. The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points to them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements. Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3 Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3

3-6


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part of the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1 and 2 equations. Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way they will be input. First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify: 1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

25: /1825&/1826

Next the flow Zones are defined: Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

26: /1824&1025

Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

27: 1824&1025

Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3

28: 1824&1825&/1826

Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3

29: 1824&1825&1826

The program thus far looks like: / Flag 2 & / Flag 3

Boolean Point #10xx 25: /1825&/1826 26: /1824&1025 27: 1824&1025 28: 1824&1825&/1826 29: 1824&1825&1826

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed, energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully open position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).

Fig. 3-2.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching


3-7

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions

3.2.4.

How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured

We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply their I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011). Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point 1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through V4 as explained below. The Boolean equations are as follows: V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1

Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least 1 of the other 3 valves is fully open. Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion. V2 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 V3 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 3 V4 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3) OR Zone 4

To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is used to determine V3 and V4. Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the way they will be input. 1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4

30: /1013&/1014

1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2

31: /1011&/1012

The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows: V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1 32: /1012&1030+1026 V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 33: /1011&1030+1027 V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3 34: 1031&/1014+1028 V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4 35: 1031&/1013+1029

The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR variable comes last.

3-8


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation The final program consists of 11 statements:

Zone 1

Boolean Point #10xx 25: /1825&/1826 26: /1824&1025 27: 1824&1025 28: 1824&1825&/1826 29: 1824&1825&1826 30: /1013&/1014 31: /1011&/1012 32: /1012&1030+1026 33: /1011&1030+1027 34: 1031&/1014+1028 35: 1031&/1013+1029

Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4

V1 V2 V3 V4

The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:

PHYSICAL I/O POINT

ASSIGNED TO BOOLEAN

WIRED T O

SYMBOL

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1700 1700 1700 1700 1032 1033 1034 1035

Valve 1 Fully Open Switch Valve 2 Fully Open Switch Valve 3 Fully Open Switch Valve 4 Fully Open Switch Valve 1 Actuator Valve 2 Actuator Valve 3 Actuator Valve 4 Actuator

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 V1 V2 V3 V4

INFO - A summary list of common Boolean flags and alarms is included on the following pages.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-9

Chapter 3


3.2.5. Notes: q For meter run Boolean points, n=meter run #1, #2, #3, #4. q Meter Active (Point 1n05) is set whenever the pulses from the flow meter equal or exceed the 'Active Frequency' threshold. q Meter Being Proved (Point 1n06) is set whenever the meter has been selected as the meter to be proved, and remains set for the duration of the prove. q Batch End Ack (1n08) toggles state at the end of each batch. q Batch Preset Warning Flag (1n09) is set whenever the batch preset counter counts down to less than the warning barrel count. q Calculation Out of Limits Flag (1n13) is set whenever the operating temperature, pressure or density are outside of the chosen calculation algorithm limits of operation.

Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499)

Each meter run has an identical set of Boolean points. The only numbering difference is the second digit which indicates the number of the meter run; i.e., 11XX indicates a Meter Run # 1 Boolean, 12XX indicates a Meter Run # 2 Boolean.

Meter Run Status and Alarm Points The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405 would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4. *

1n01

Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume

*

1n02

Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)

*

1n03

Pulses - Mass

*

1n04

Pulses - Net Standard Volume S&W corrected GSV.

1n05

Meter Run Active Flag Flow pulses above threshold frequency.

1n06

Meter Being Proved Activates during proving of this meter.

1n07

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter Clears if acknowledged.

1n08

Batch End Acknowledge Toggle ON/OFF.

1n09

Auto Prove Problem Ten consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.

1n10

Batch Preset Reached Batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.

Note: * Used to assign an accumulator to the front panel counters or digital I/O points)

1n11

Batch Preset Warning Flag Batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5n38).

1n12

Batch End Acknowledge 500 msec pulse.

1n13

Calculation Alarm Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.

INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

INFO - Transducer and flow rate alarms remain set while the alarm condition exists.

3-10

1n14

Override In Use - Density Pressure Override in use for any reason.

1n15

Auto Prove Flag Indicates that flowmeter “n” will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate or meter run time, etc. Cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.

1n16

Override In Use - Temperature

1n17

Override In Use - Pressure

1n18

Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer

1n19

Override In Use - Density Temperature

1n20

Flowrate - Low Low Alarm For points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.

1n21

Flowrate - Low Alarm

1n22

Flowrate - High Alarm

1n23

Flowrate - High High Alarm


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation 1n24

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n25

Meter Temperature - Low Alarm

1n26

Meter Temperature - High Alarm

1n27

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n28

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29

Meter Pressure - Low Alarm

1n30

Meter Pressure - High Alarm

1n31

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n32

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33

Gravity/Density - Low alarm

1n34

Gravity/Density - High Alarm

1n35

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n36

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37

Density Temperature - Low Alarm

1n38

Density Temperature - High Alarm

1n39

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n40

Spare

to 1n43

Spare

1n44

Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

1n45

Density Pressure - Low Alarm

1n46

Density Pressure - High Alarm

1n47 1n48

Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.

1n49

Turbine - Channel A Failed Total absence of pulses on Channel A.

1n50

Turbine - Channel B Failed Total absence of pulses on Channel B.

1n51

Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel Missing or added pulses.

1n52

Spare

1n53

Spare

1n54

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.

1n55

Meter Off-line Flag

1n56

Batch in Progress Flag

Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false. Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.

1n57

Batch Start Acknowledge Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.

1n58

Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.

1n59

20/24.71 w 04/98

Spare


3-11

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Micro Motion  Alarm Status Points

Micro Motion  - Data obtained via RS-485 link with Micro Motion device.

INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run.

The following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT via Modbus and placed in the ‘Micro Motion Alarm Word’ as the destination address 3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be logged into the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur. 1n60

Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure

1n61

Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made

1n62

Micro Motion - Sensor Failure

1n63

Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure

1n64

Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged

1n65

Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged

1n66

Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured

1n67

Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure

1n68

Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated

1n69

Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed

1n70

Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits

1n71

Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure

1n72

Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure

1n73

Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected

1n74

Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress

1n75

Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred

More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points Note: See 2n00 area for even more meter run alarms and status points.

1n76

Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge Flag Pulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.

1n77

Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.

1n78

Non-correctable Totalizer Error Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.

1n79

Spare

to 1n99

20/24.71 w 04/98

Spare


3-13

Chapter 3


3.2.6. INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will result if a command which has been assigned to a digital I/O point directly also needs to be activated via a Modbus write. This is because the On/Off state of the digital I/O point overwrites the command point every 100 msec and most command point actions are only triggered every 500 msec.

Command and Status Boolean Points (1700 through 1799)

Boolean points numbered 17XX are used as command or status points within the computer. These Boolean points can be altered by manipulating them via the Modbus ports or by assigning them to a physical digital I/O point. The various Boolean command and status flags are monitored for change of state by the appropriate software tasks running within the computer. For example, Point 1701 (Prover Ready) would be checked by the computer during a prove run to ensure that the 4-way valve did not move. Each physical I/O point configured as an input is scanned by the computer every 50 msec and the Boolean assigned to each point would be set On or Off depending on the state of the physical I/O point. Edge changes are also stored to ensure that a momentary signal would not be missed. Physical digital I/O points that will be used only in Boolean statements should be assigned to Point 1700 (dummy Boolean). Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement. 1700

Dummy Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be assigned to as many I/O points as needed.

1701

Prover Seal is OK Must be true when sphere is between detectors.

1702

End Batch - Station End batch on all meter runs defined in station.

1703

End Batch - Meter #1 Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.

1704

End Batch - Meter #2

1705


1706


1707

Station - ‘Change Product’ Strobe Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1745. Used with Station Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).

1708

Prove - Meter #1 Request Edge triggered.

1709

Prove - Meter #2 Request

1710


1711


1712

Station Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledges all alarms.

1713

Reset Power Failed Flag See power fail Flag 1829.

1714

Trial Prove - Meter #1 Request Edge triggered.

3-14

1715

Trial Prove - Meter #2 Request

1716


1717



20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Notes: q Inputs are scanned every 50 msec so signals must be present for at least 50 msec in order to be recognized. Points marked with ‘*’ are positive edge triggered commands. q Prover Start Permissive if configured (Point 1726) must be true before a prove sequence will start. q Prover Seal OK if configured (Point 1701) must be true while the prover sphere is between the detector switches or the prove in progress will be shorted. q Compact Prover Piston Downstream if configured (Point 1731) must be false before the Compact Prover Run signal (Point 1927) will be set active low. q Product Select Inputs (Points 1743-1746) must be set up with next product to run before any of the Product Change Strobes (Points 1707 and 1747-1750) are activated. q PID Start Permissive if configured (Points 17221725) must be true before the control outputs will be allowed to ramp open. They will ramp closed when it is negated.

Notes:

#

*

These points are defaulted to ‘active’ and need not be manipulated unless the application requires it. These points also affect station totalizing (see also point 1761). Level sensitive.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Configuration and Advanced Operation 1718

Abort the Prove in Progress

1719

Request Local Snapshot Report Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.

1720

Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer

1721

Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer

Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402. Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.

#

1722

1st PID Permissive - Loop #1 Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter (see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.

#

1723

1st PID Permissive - Loop #2

#

1724


#

1725


#

1726

Prover Start Permissive Checked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves are lined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.

1727

Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1 st

nd

Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.

1728

Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #2

1729


1730


1731

Compact Prover Piston Downstream Applies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.

1732

Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1 Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.

1733

Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #2

1734


1735


*

1736

Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1

*

1737


*

1738


*

1739


1740

Spare

1741

Remote Up Arrow Key Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1742

Remote Down Arrow Key Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1743

Product Select - Bit 0 Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 = product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).

1744

Product Select - Bit 1

1745


1746



3-15

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions 1747

INFO- Notice that all write commands have indexes / point addresses with a ‘7’ in rd the 3 digit from the right.

‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #1 For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product specified by points 1743-1746.

1748

‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #2

1749


1750


1751

Freeze Analog Inputs Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.

1752

2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1 Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 17221725). Level sensitive.

1753

2nd PID Permissive - Meter #2

1754


1755


1756

Spare

to 1759

Spare

1760

Leak Detection Freeze Command Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see 5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.

1761

Disable Flow Totalizing Station This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.

1762

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1 At local printer.

to 1769

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8

1770

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1 At local printer.

to 1777

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8

1778

Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1 At local printer.

to 1785

Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #8

1786

Remote Print - Alarm Report At local printer.

1787

Implement Last Prove Meter Factor Causes the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented and saved. Edge triggered.

3-16


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


Shutdown PID - Loop #1 st

Note: More ‘Command Boolean Points’ are located at address 2701.

INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

‹

CAUTION

‹

Stored archive data may be lost! See chapter on ‘Raw Data Archive’ before manipulating these data points. These functions are duplicated using integers at 13920 and 13921.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.

1789

Shutdown PID - Loop #2

1790


1791


1792

Stop Flow PID - Loop #1 st

nd

Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to the ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the ‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.

1793

Stop Flow PID - Loop #2

1794


1795


‹ 1796

Raw Data Archive ‘Run’ Level sensitive.

‹ 1797

Reconfigure Archive Level sensitive.

1798

Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Station The previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.


3-17

Chapter 3


3.2.7. Notes: q The station is defined as a set of meter runs whose flows are added or subtracted. q Batch End Acknowledge (Point 1817) is toggled at the end of each batch; i.e., True for every other batch. q Run Switching Flags (Points 1824-1826) are controlled by the station gross flow rate and the 'Meter Station Threshold Limits'. q Power Failed Flag (Point 1829) is set automatically when power or reset is applied. It is cleared by momentarily activating the 1713 command point.

Note:

The station also has a set of Boolean points. Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group alarms and status points. *

1801

Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

*

1802

Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

*

1803

Positive - Mass Pulses

*

1804

Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

*

1805

Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

*

1806

Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

*

1807

Negative - Mass Pulses

*

1808

Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

1809

Flowrate - Low Low Alarm

1810


1811


1812


1813

Gravity Rate of Change Flag

1814

Delayed Gravity Rate of Change

Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.

For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.

Set when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.

* Used to assign accumulators to the front panel electromechanical counters and digital I/O points.

Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)

Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.

1815

Any System Alarm Includes acknowledged alarms also.

1816

Any New System Alarm Does not include acknowledged alarms.

1817

Batch End Acknowledge

1818

Batch Preset Warning Flag

Toggle state at batch end (see 1835). Station batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset. ‘X’ is defined in 5815.

1819

Batch Preset Reached Flag Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset size.

1820

Station - Current Product ID Bit 0 Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product for the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).

1821

Station - Current Product ID Bit 1

1822


1823


1824

Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1 Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings and are based on current station flow rates.

1825

Run Switching - Threshold Flag 2

1826


1827

Leak Detection Freeze Command was received See point 1760.

3-18


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation #

1828

Day Start Flag True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).

Note:

# These points pulse high

1829

Power Fail Flag

1830

Print Buffer Full Flag

True after power up (see 1713 for reset).

for one 500 msec cycle time.

Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ or jammed with paper.

#

1831

Hour Start Flag

#

1832

Week Start Flag

#

1833

#

1834

True at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.

Month Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month.

Year Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January.

#

1835

Batch End Acknowledge Pulses at batch end (see 1817).

#

1836

Snapshot Printed Indicates snapshot report printed.

1837 INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

EPROM error Flag Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.

1838

Peer-to-Peer Master Flag Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.

1839

Zero Value Always false.

~ 1840

Boolean Statement Alarm Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.

~ 1841

Variable Statement Alarm Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.

1842

Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the first will be flagged.

to

Notes:

#

1857

Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error

1858

Calendar Day Start Flag Format: 00:00:00.

~ The system limits the maximum number of statement evaluations to 100 to protected against possible lock-ups due to recursive loops. Any additional statement evaluations are ignored.

# These points pulse high for one 500 msec. cycle time.

* These flags are usually used to conditionally print appropriate information messages on the batch and daily reports.

20/24.71 w 04/98

#

1859

#

1860

#

1861

Calendar Week Start Flag Format: 00:00:00 Monday.

Calendar Month Start Flag Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.

Calendar Year Start Flag st

Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

1862

Station Density - Transducer Failed Low

1863

Station Density - Low Alarm

1864

Station Density - High Alarm

1865

Station Density - Transducer Failed High


3-19

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions 1866

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low

to 1869

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High

1870


to 1873

Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High

*

1874

Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag

*

1875

Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag

1876

Batch Recalculation Acknowledge Flag Pulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.

1877

Spare

*

1878

Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag

*

1879

*

1880

Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.

Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.

Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.

Note:

>

Applies only to Revision 24 for metric units.

*> 1881

Liter Units Selected Flag Set when Liter is the selected volume unit.

*> 1882

Cubic Meter Units Selected Flag 3

Set when m is the selected volume unit.

1883

Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low

1884

Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm

1885

Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm

1886

Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High

1887


to 1890


1891


to 1894


1895


to 1898 Note: See 2600 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

3-20

1899

Auxiliary Input #4 - Transducer Failed High Net Volume @ 2

nd

Reference Temperature Appears on Reports Flag

Set when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the following: Boolean #10xx 25: /1834&/1026 26: /1835&/1025

1026 is set by 1834 and cleared by 1835

3.2.8. Notes: q Point numbers marked with '*' are updated at the end of a prove and are not reset until the beginning of the next prove. q Point numbers marked 'm' are momentary lasting 2 seconds. q Run Compact Prove (Point 1927) is normally high and goes low to activate a run.

Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999)

Boolean points numbered 19XX are dedicated to the prover alarms and status. point numbers. The second digit ‘9’ defines a prover. See the 1700 area for command points associated with the prover. 1901

Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1902

Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1903

Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1904

Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1905

Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1906

Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

1907

Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1908

Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

Note:

#

1909

Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable

# These alarms are active

#

1910

Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded

until the next prove sequence is started.

#

1911

Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed

#

1912

Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete

1913

1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction

1914

3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction

1915

2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction

1916

4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction

1917

Launch Sphere - Forward Direction Two second pulse.

1918

Launch Sphere - Reverse Direction Two second pulse.

#

1919

Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded

#

1920

Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between Detectors

#

1921

Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable

#

1922

Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive Received

See 1701.

See 1726.

#

1923

Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented

#

1924

Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not Flowing See 1n05.

1925

Plenum - Charge Required Points 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can be automatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.

1926

Plenum - Vent Required

1927

Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command Output Active low output to launch piston.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-21

Volume 3


Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag 500 msec pulse at end of prove.

1929

Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature

1930

Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature

1931

Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure

1932

Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure

*

1933

Mass Prove Flag

*

1934

Net Prove Flag

*

1935

Mass Prove Report Flag

*

1936

Net Prove Report Flag

*

1937

Mass Calculation in Use Flag

*

1938

Meter Factor Repeatability in Use Flag

*

1939

Set when run deviation is based on meter factor. Note:

Count Repeatability in Use Flag Set when run deviation is based on meter counts.

* These flags are used to cause data to be conditionally printed on the prover report.

1940

Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1941

Prover Density - Low Alarm

1942

Prover Density - High Alarm

1943

Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1944

Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to 1947

Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1948

Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to 1951

Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1952

Spare

to 1954

Spare

*

1955

Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected

*

1956

Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected

1957

Spare

1958

Spare

*

1959

Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors

*

1960


*

1961


*

1962

Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors

*

1963


*

1964


*

1965

Prove Report - Print 5 Decimal Places for Intermediate Meter Factors

*

1966


*

1967


1968

Spare

to 1999

20/24.71 w 04/98

Spare


3-23

Chapter 3


3.2.9.

Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions of these flags. Note: The ‘In Progress’ flags are those which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as a SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note: See 1800 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

3-24

2n01

Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n02

Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n03

Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n04

Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n05

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n06

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n07

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n08

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n09

Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n10

Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n11

Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n12

Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n13

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n14

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n15

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n16

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20

Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n21

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n25

Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n26

Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n27

Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n28

Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n29

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n30

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n31

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n32

Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33

Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n34

Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n35

Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2

2n36

nd

Previous Daily - 2

nd

Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation 2n37

Meter ‘n’ - Product in Use - Binary Code Decimal Bit 0

2n37


2n37


2n37


3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

2601

Auxiliary Input #1 - Override in Use

to 2604


2605

Inlet Temperature - Override in Use

2606

Outlet Temperature - Override in Use

2607

Inlet Pressure - Override in Use

2608

Outlet Pressure - Override in Use

2620

Calibration Data Checksum Error Correctable as secondary copy was OK.

2621

System Initialized Flag

2622

Day Light Savings Time

True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713). ‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623

Archive Memory Alarm 0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.

3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a Poll INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

Note: Notice that all write commands have indexes / point addresses with a ‘7’ in rd the 3 digit from the right.

20/24.71 w 04/98

Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes the appropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.

2701

Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1

2702


2703


2704


2705


2706


2707


2708


2709


2710


2711


2712



3-25

Chapter 3


3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor the other. 2713

Others - Watchdog Status

2714

Others - Master Status

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863). Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).

2715

Assume Master Status Command Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.

2716

Assume Slave Status Command Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.

3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

2756

Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1 When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 is recalculated. Edge triggered.

2757

Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #2

2758


2759


3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.

In Progress Flags - The ‘In Progress’ flags are the flags which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as an SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

3-26

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run versions of flags. 2801


2802

Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2803


2804


2805


2806


2807


2808


2809


2810


2811


2812



20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3




2814

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2815


2816


2817


2818

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819


2820


2821

Previous - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2822

Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2823

Previous - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2824

Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2825


2826


2827


2828


2829


2830


2831 2832

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833

Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2834

Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2835

Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2836

Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2837

Spare

to 2851

Spare

3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.

Note: It is unlikely that the user would have any use for these variables.

20/24.71 w 04/98

All totalizers within the flow computer are ‘long integer types’. This data type uses an ‘implied’ decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes. 2852

Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors

2853


2854


2855

Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors

2856


2857


2858

Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross & Net Totalizer

2859


2860

Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer

2861


2862

Spare


3-27

Volume 3


3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems 2863

Watchdog Status Out Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see 2713).

2864

Master Status Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see 2714).

3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

2865

Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer

2866


2867

Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

2868


2869

Spare

to 2999

20/24.71 w 04/98

Spare


3-29

Chapter 3


3.3.

User Programmable Variables and Statements

There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be displayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or accessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables and statements include providing measurement units conversions, special averaging functions, limit checking and comparisons.

3.3.1.

Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed

Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following symbols are used to represent the functions: Operator TIP - The order of precedence is: ABSOLUTE, POWER, MULTIPLY & DIVIDE, ADD & SUBTRACT. Where operators have the same precedence the order is left to right.

ADD SUBTRACT MULTIPLY DIVIDE CONSTANT constant POWER ABSOLUTE EQUAL IF STATEMENT GOTO STATEMENT MOVE COMPARE INDIRECT variable

Symbol

Description

+ * / #

Add the two variables or constants Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH Multiply the two variables or constants Divide the two variables or constants The number following is interpreted as a

& $ = ) G : % “

Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following Make the variable on left equal to the expression Compares the variable to another (What if?) Go to a different variable Move statement or result to another variable. Compare a value with or equal to Variable contains point address of target

To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y)_ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station ? (Y) Config Meter "n" Config Prove ? (Y) Config PID ? "n" Config D/A Out "n" Front Panel Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables ?

3-30


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no variables are as yet programmed, the display shows: PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: _ 26: 27: Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.

Example 1: To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in barrels per day' in place of the usual barrels per hour, multiply the 'barrels/hour' variable (7101) by the constant 24. PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: _ 27:

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day

Example 2: To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert the 'barrels per hour'variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 = 42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of minutes in an hour). PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27:

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day bbls/hr x0.7 = gal/min

Example 3: To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in 'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105) and divide the result (7027) by 1.8. bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min °F - 32.0

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27: 7105-#32 28: 7027/#1.8

(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-31

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions Example 4: Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7101*#24 26: 7101*#.7_ 27: 7105-#32 28: 7027/#1.8 29: 5101*5114

bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min °F - 32.0 (°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C Gross bbls x Meter Factor

3.3.2.

Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements

Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the Boolean point has a value FALSE.

Example: Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour on January 1 of each year. Add 1.0 at Batch End Clear batch report number on Jan 1 Contract Hour

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 25: 7025+1835 26: 1834)7025=#0 Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point 1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.

3-32


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


3.3.3.

Entering Values Directly into the User Variables

In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable (not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report Number' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in the Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display: USER VARIABLE #7025 Value 1234 7025 + 1835

Current value - you can change this. Expression for this variable you cannot change from this entry.

3.3.4.

Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt

Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged. For example: USER VARIABLE 7025 Value ? .00018 Enter Lbs to SCF ?

3.3.5.

Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable

The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require ‘Level 2’ password. the remaining variables require ‘Level 1’.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-33

Chapter 3


3.3.6.

Using Variables in Boolean Expressions

In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on the value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values, ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.

Example: Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr, but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr. Result can be positive or negative. Absolute flow difference minus 10.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx 30: 7102- 7202 31: $7030-#10 32: 7102-#1000

Positive if flow rate is >1000

Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run #1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr. User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes to minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point #02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026. Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only): True when both are positive. Snapshot report when alarm active.

Note: See the beginning of this chapter on how to program a Boolean expression if necessary:

3-34

BOOLEAN POINT #70xx 25: 7031&7032 26: 1719 = 1002 To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025 and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000 ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the ‘delay off’ to 0.


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


3.4.

User Configurable Display Screens

The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any variable within the data base can be selected for display. Steps needed to configure a display screen are: INFO - The computer checks for the user display key presses first so you may override an existing display screen by selecting the same key press sequence.

1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall the display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on each key. For each variable (four maximum): 2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any valid characters on the keypad can be used. 3) Specify the database index or point number. 4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the right of the decimal point). Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be automatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to scientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999. To configure the user display screens proceed as follows: From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed: *** Misc. Setup *** Password Maint?(Y)_ Check Modules ?(Y) Config Station ? (Y) Config Meter "n" Config Prove ? (Y) Config PID ? "n" Config D/A Out "n" Front Panel Counters Program Booleans ? Program Variables ? User Display ? "n" Config Digital "n" Serial I/O "n" Custom Packet ? (Y) Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n"’ and enter 1 through 8 to specify which screen you wish to configure.

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-35

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions The screen for Display #1 shows: USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press _ Var #1 Tag Var #1 Index Var #1 Dec. Var #2 Tag Var #2 Index Var #2 Dec. Var #3 Tag Var #3 Index Var #3 Dec. Var #4 Tag Var #4 Index Var #4 Dec. Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display. The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.

Fig. 3-3.

3-36

Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Example: You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below. USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press A L O Var #1 Tag Var #1 Index Var #1 Dec. Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index number and decimal position required for each variable.

Press [Gross] [Meter] [1] Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Flow Rate Display XXXX.XX Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Batch Barrels Display XXXXXXXXX Description Tag Index # for Meter #1 Preset Count Display XXXXXXXXX Description Tag

USER DISPLAY #1 Key Press A L O Var #1 Tag M1 MSCF Var #1 Index 7101 Var #1 Dec. 2 Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF Var #2 Index 5101 Var #2 Dec. 0 Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET Var #3 Index 5116 Var #3 Dec. 0 Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT Var #4 Index 5114 Var #4 Dec. 4 Var #4 Tag _

Index # for Meter #1 Batch F.W.A.M/F Display X.XXXX Description Tag

20/24.71 w 04/98


3-37

Chapter 3

User-Programmable Functions In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1: Variable #1

Flow rate in MSCF per Hour

Variable #2

Accumulated Batch MSCF

Variable #3

Batch Preset MSCF To Deliver

Variable #4

Meter Factor for the Batch

The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays: USER DISPLAY # 1 M1 MSCF 1234.56 M1 MMSCF 123456789 M1 PRSET 1234567 M1 MFACT 1.0000

3-38


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4. Modbus  Protocol Implementation 4.1.

Introduction

Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocol on Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems. Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer response time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time. The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a common communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device address in the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction. Transactions are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a time) or a broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same time). A transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a single broadcast frame.

4.2.

Modes of Transmission

Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.

AVAILABLE T RANSMISSION MODES T RANSMISSION MODE ASCII

RTU

Hexadecimal

8-bit binary

Start Bits

1

1

Data Bits

7

8

Odd, Even, None (1 or 0)

Odd, Even, None (1 or 0)

1 or 2

1 or 2

LRC

CRC

1.1 - 38.4 kbps

1.1 - 38.4 kbps

Coding System NUMBER OF BITS:

Parity (Optional) Stop Bits Error Checking Baud Rate

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-1

Modbus  Protocol Implementation

Chapter 4

4.2.1.

ASCII Framing and Message Format

Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon (:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line feed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to receive an immediate reply.

ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT BEGINNING ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

FRAME

READY TO RECEIVE RESPONSE

:

2 Char

2 Char

Nx2 Char

2 Char

CR

LF

7 Bits

14 Bits

14Bits

N x 14 Bits

14 Bits

7 Bits

7 Bits

OF

FRAME

Assuming 7 bits per transmitted character.

4.2.2.

DATA

ERROR CHECK

END OF

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format

Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes will be processed looking for a valid address. RTU MESSAGE FORMAT

4.3. 4.3.1.

ADDRESS

FUNCTION

DATA

ERROR CHECK

8 Bits

8 Bits

N x 8 Bits

16 Bits

Message Fields Address Field

The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists of 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating. In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.

4-2


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.3.2. Note: See 4.5 for descriptions and examples of these function codes. See 4.4 for a description of exception responses.

Function Code Field

The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message. FUNCTION CODE 01 03 05

READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT

06 15

WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS

16

WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 VARIABLES READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER

65 66

4.3.3.

ACTION

OR 32 BIT

Data Field

The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a query. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text buffers.

4.3.4.

Error Check Field

This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or RTU mode.

The LRC Mode The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries, and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any imbedded non ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see page 1-7 of the Gould Modbus  Reference Guide for more details).

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-3


Chapter 4 The CRC Mode

The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16 (shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x16+x15+x2+1) expressed as the binary number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the 16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbus Reference Guide for more details).

4.4.

Exception Response

Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message, no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in an exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When such a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the master echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception code and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an error, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1. EXCEPTION CODE 01 02 03 04 05

4-4

DESCRIPTION ILLEGAL FUNCTION ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL DATA VALUE DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN PASSWORD NEEDED


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.5.

Function Codes

4.5.1.

Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status)

This function allows the user to obtain the ON/OFF status of Booleans used to control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point number to be read (Starting point) and the number of points that will be read to obtain the Boolean data. Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes the slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data characters and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). The low order bit of the first character contains the addressed flag, and the remainder follow. For Boolean quantities that are not even multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled in with zeros at high order end. Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

: 3031

3031

DATA STARTING POINT #

NUMBER OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

3034

3630

3030

3043

3845 CR LF

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

01

01


NUMBER OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

04

60

00

0C

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

: 3031

3031

3032

3038

3030

4634 CR LF

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

LCR CHECK 8-BIT

01

01

02

08

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000 (binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is on. The other data flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested, the last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains the

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-5

Chapter 4

Modbus  Protocol Implementation status of only 4 flags. The 4 left most bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8-bit format.

4-6


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.5.2.

Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function Code 03 allows the master to obtain the binary contents of holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 sixteen-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not allowed for function 03. These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.

REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS / POINT POINT M ESSAGE

POINT # RANGE

VARIABLE TYPE

3XXX or 13XXX

Short Integer

1 Register

2 Bytes

125

4XXX

8-Char. ASCII String

4 Registers

8 Bytes

31

5XXX or 15XXX

Long Integer

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

7XXX or 18XXX

IEEE Floating Point

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

14XXX


8 Registers

16 Bytes

15

The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent MS Byte first. Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.


FUNCTION CODE

02

03


QUANTITY OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

0B

C4

00

02

‘nn’ ‘nn’


DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

02

03

04

1F

40

1F

3E

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the data field followed by the actual data field. In the above example the data field contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-7


Chapter 4

4.5.3.

Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)

This message forces a single Boolean variable either ON or OFF. Boolean variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280 (FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean ON, writing the value zero will turn it OFF; all other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean. Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 ON Slave #2.


FUNCTION CODE

02

05

BOOLEAN POINT #

DATA

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

06

AF

FF

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

02

05

BOOLEAN POINT #

DATA

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

06

AF

FF

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as received after the Boolean state has been altered.

4-8


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.5.4.

Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)

Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table can have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX. When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one 16bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., Load address 3106 with data 0003). Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE POINT #

DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

02

06

0C

22

00

03

‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode POINT #

DATA

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK

02

06

0C

22

00

03

‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-9


Chapter 4

4.5.5.

Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )

Function code 0FHEX writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive block of Boolean variables to a desired ON or OFF state. Each Boolean is packed in the data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = ON 0 = OFF). The data field consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points). Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'. The use of slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode)will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables starting at address 1703. The data field value 05 1703 through 1710, and data field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced ON and 1704 and 1706 through 1715 are to be forced OFF (the 2 most significant positions of the second byte are unused and set to 0). Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.


FUNCTION CODE

03

0F

STARTING ADDRESS

QUANTITY OF POINTS

06

00

A7

0E

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

02

05

20

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

03

0F

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

06

00

A7

QUANTITY 0E

CRC CHECK 'nn'

'nn'

The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address, function code, starting address and quantity of points written.

4-10


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.5.6.

Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function code 10HEX allows the master to change the binary contents of holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 16bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of zero (00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously (Broadcast mode). These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.

REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS / POINT POINT M ESSAGE

POINT # RANGE

VARIABLE TYPE

3XXX or 13XXX

Short Integer

1 Register

2 Bytes

125

4XXX


4 Registers

8 Bytes

31

5XXX or 15XXX

Long Integer

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

7XXX or 17XXX

IEEE Floating Point

2 Registers

4 Bytes

62

14XXX


8 Registers

16 Bytes

15

The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating the number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent as multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent MS Byte first. Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2. Byte Count: The Byte Count will be increments of 2, 4, 8 or 16 bytes depending on the address range of the points downloaded.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE FUNC ADDR CODE 02

10

STARTING POINT #

OF POINTS

0B

00

C4

QUANTITY 02

DATA

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

04

1F

40

1F

3E

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

02

10

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

0B

00

C4

QUANTITY 02

CRC CHECK 'nn'

'nn'

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number and quantity of points.

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-11


Chapter 4

Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4 POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE FUNC ADDR CODE 04

10

STARTING POINT #

OF POINTS

QUANTITY

13

00

ED

01

DATA

DATA

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

HI

LO

04

00

4F

20

4E

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’


FUNCTION CODE

04

10

STARTING ADDRESS

OF POINTS

QUANTITY

13

00

ED

01

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point number and quantity of points.

4.5.7.

Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 41HEX allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII text buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^2 (end of file character). Example: Read 2nd packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

HI

POINT # LO

PACKET # HI LO

05

41

23

29

00

01

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

4-12

POINT #

PACKET #

ADDR

FUNC CODE

HI

LO

HI

05

41

23

29

00

…………

Lo

DATA Byte 0

01

30

…………


Data B YTE 128 ………… 41

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.5.8.

Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)

Function code 42HEX is used by the master to download an ASCII text buffer to an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^2 (end of file character). Example: Write 1st packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2. POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE POINT #

PACKET #

FUNC CODE

HI

LO

HI

Lo

DATA BYTE 0

…………

ADDR

DATA ………… BYTE 128

02

42

23

2A

00

00

39

…………

2F

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

20/24.71 w 04/98

ADDRESS

FUNCTION CODE

POINT # HI

LO

PACKET # HI LO

02

42

23

2A

00


00

CRC CHECK ‘nn’

‘nn’

4-13


Chapter 4

4.6.

Custom Data Packets

Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1 message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located at points 1, 201 and 401 in the database. Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.


FUNCTION CODE

02

03

STARTING POINT #

QUANTITY OF POINTS

HI

LO

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

00

01

00

00

‘nn’ ‘nn’

Dummy number of points


FUNCTION CODE

BYTE COUNT

HI

LO

………… …………

HI

LO

CRC CHECK 16-BIT

02

03

??

??

??

…………

??

??

‘nn’

Depends on the size of packet configured

4-14

DATA

ADDRESS


‘nn’

Depends on the number and type of data points included

20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


4.7.

Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus  Link

Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics”).

4.8.

Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required

The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals wired in parallel (see Chapter 3). This allows all devices to hear all transmissions; even their own.

4.9.

Active Master

Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see Chapter 5 'Peer-To-Peer') it will in turn hand over control to the next master in the sequence.

4.10. Error Recovery Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the current master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance and fastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters consecutively starting from 01.

20/24.71 w 04/98


4-15

Volume 3


5. Flow Equations and Algorithms 5.1.

Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 20 (U.S. Units)

The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:

5.1.1.

Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr

Gross Flow Rate (IV) =

Total Pulses per Second x 3600 Nominal K Factor (Pulses / Bbls)

When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected: Gross Flow Rate = Gross (IV) =

5.1.2.

Pulses x LCF x 3600 K Fator

Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (Except Propylene)

Net Flowrate (GSV) = Gross Flowrate (IV) x VCF x CPL x MF (NSV) = GSV x CSW

5.1.3.

Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)

Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate (IV) x Flowing Density x MF / 1000 If no Live Density is applied: Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate (GSV) x Density @ 60OF / 1000

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-1

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms

5.1.4.

Equivalencies

Where: MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or other remote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves Flowing Density = [Flowing gr/cc / .999012] x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696 Psia. Density at 60OF = SG 60 x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696 Psia. CSW = [1- (% S&W/100)] VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250) = Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T)) Delta T = T Actual - T Reference Rhot = Product density at reference temperature = 141.5 x Density of Water / (API + 131.5) Where API = API gravity at reference temperature Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature = [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot

2

When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group: Alpha T = A + B / Rhot

2

Where: K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published by the American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards and are as follows:

Table 6A, 23A

Product Type: Crude Oil

Gravity API: 0-100, Relative Density: .6110 to 1.0760 K0 = 341.0957 K1 = 0.0

Table 6B, 23B

Product Type: Fuel Oil

Gravity API: 0 -37, Relative Density: .8400 to 1.0760 K0 = 103.8720 K1 = 0.2701

Table 6B, 23B

Product Type: Jet Group

Gravity API: 37.1-47.9, Relative Density: .7890 to .8395 K0 = 330.3010 K1 = 0.0

Table 6B, 23B

Product Type: Gasolines

Gravity API: 52.1-85, Relative Density: .6535 to .7705 K0 = 192.4571 K1 = .2438

5-2


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation Table 6B, 23B

Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline

Gravity API: 48-52, Relative Density: .7710 to .7885 A = -0.00186840

B = 1489.0670

F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1 for liquids 0 - 90 API using API Chapter 11.2.2 for Hydrocarbons 0.350 to 0.637 relative density and -50OF to 140OF CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid = 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F P = Flowing pressure in PSIG Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlations developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Company for member companies of the GPA and published as GPA Technical Publication No. 15. Temperature Range : -50OF to 140OF. Relative Density Range : .49 to .676

For Propylene Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing SG x Wt of H2O @60OF & 14.696 Psia where: CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 60OF and Saturation Pressure. Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure Calculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2 3

Flowing SG = (Calculated Flowing Density in Lbs/Ft x 0.0161846) / 0.999012

Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on a computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithm was based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.

Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC) The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity and isentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculated using equations based on the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).

Density of Ethylene (NIST) Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-3

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms Density of Ethylene (API) Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1 (formerly API 2565). This is the unmodified original standard.

5.1.5.

Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) = Total (Pulses/Second ) / (Pulses/Bbl) * 3600

5.1.6.

Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact) = (Prover Volume / Tdvol) * 3600

5.1.7.

Prove Meter Factor = (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / (Prove Pulses x CTLM x CPLM)

5.1.8.

Equivalencies

Where: PV = Base prover volume at 60OF and 0 PSIG CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel

For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover = 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OF of the prover tube T = The average prover temperature in OF

For Compact Prover = [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci] tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover tube tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover switch rod CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel = 1 + ((P- pbase x D) / (E x t)) P = Internal pressure in PSIG D = Internal diameter in inches E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube t = Wall thickness of prover tube in inches Pbase = Base pressure of Prover CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature = CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover during a prove

5-4


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure = CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature = CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter during a prove CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure = CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove

When Using Pulse Interpolation Method Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)

When Proving Propylene Product CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000 CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at Reference Conditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2

When Proving Ethylene Product All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculated based on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.

5.1.9.

PID Control

Primary Variable error % ep ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span Forward Action ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span Reverse Action Secondary Variable error % es es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function) C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + ∑e) Controlling on Primary Variable C0 = Primary Gain * (es + ∑e) Controlling on Secondary Variable Integral Error ∑e ∑e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable ∑e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-5

Chapter 5


5.1.10. Solartron  Density gm/cc Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as detailed below.

Uncompensated Density 2

D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t ) Where: t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds. K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature Compensated Density Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 68)) + K19 x (Tf - 68) Where: Tf = Temperature in degrees F K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P) Where: Pf = Flowing pressure in PSIG K20 = K20A + K20B x P K21 = K21A + K21B x P K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron  Only) For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 gr/cc the following term can be applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp. Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)

3

Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron to obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'. (Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5) User not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.

5-6


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/cc Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below. Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0'] Where: t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0 DCF = Density correction factor do’ = A calibration constant, mass/volume* t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds K = Spool calibration constant Tf = Flowing temperature OF Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OF Pf = Flowing pressure in psig Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / psig Pcal = Calibration pressure in psig * Note: d0' must be expressed in the units of gm/cc

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-7

Chapter 5


5.1.12. UGC Density gm/cc UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below. 2

Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t ) 2

2

Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D + Kt2D + Kt1) x (Tf - T) + Density) Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are entered via the keypad DCF = Density correction factor D = Uncorrected density gm/cc t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds Pf = Flowing Pressure in psig Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.F T =Calibration temperature in Deg.F Pc = Calibration pressure Psig

5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration Constants In many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers are based on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered are based on gr/cc, degrees Fahrenheit and PSIG. Contact the densitometer manufacture or Omni if you require assistance.

5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficients for Helical Turbine Meters: LCF = a + b/x + c/x^2 + d/x^3 + e/x^4 + f/x^5 + g/x^6 for PD Meters: LCF = a + (x^c)/b Where x = Flowrate Q/ Viscosity u = (Bbl/hr) / Centistokes

5-8


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


5.2.

Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 24 (Metric Units)

The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:

5.2.1.

Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr 3

Gross Flowrate = Total Pulses/Second / Nominal K-Factor (Pulses / m ) * 3600

5.2.2.

Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (Except Propylene)

Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x VCF x CPL x MF

5.2.3.

Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene)

Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x Flowing Density x MF / 1000 If no Live Density is applied: Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate x Density @15OC and equilibrium pressure / 1000

5.2.4.

Equivalencies

Where: MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or other remote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250) = Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T)) Delta T = T Actual - T Reference Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature = [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot

2

When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group: Alpha T = A + B / Rhot

2

Where: K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published by the American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards and are as follows:

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-9

Chapter 5


5.2.5.

Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulses is Selected

Gross Flowrate (m 3 / hr) =

Mass Pulses x 3600 Density x Meter Factor

Mass Flowrate (m 3 / hr) =

Mass Pulses x 3600 K Factor

Mass Pulses x VCF x CPL x 3600 Density

Net Flowrate (m 3 / hr) = where: K Factor = Pulses/kg

Table 54A

Product Type: Crude Oil 3

Density: 610.5 to 1075 kg/m K0 = 613.9723 K1 = 0.0

Table 54B,

Product Type: Fuel Oil 3

Density: 839 to 1075 kg/m

K0 = 186.9696 K1 = 0.4862

Table 54B

Product Type: Jet Group 3

Density: 788 to 838.5 kg/m K0 = 594.5418 K1 = 0.0

Table 54B

Product Type: Gasolines 3

Density: 653 to 771 kg/m

K0 = 346.4228 K1 = .4388

Table 54B

Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline 3

Density: 770.5 to 787.5 kg/m A = -0.00336312

B = 2680.3206

F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1M for 3 Crude Oil (638 to 1075 kg/m density, -30OC to 90OC), using API Chapter 3 11.2.2M for Hydrocarbon Products (350-637 kg/m density, -46OC to O 60 C).

5-10


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid = 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F P = Flowing pressure in kpa g Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlations developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Company for member companies of the GPA and published as GPA Technical Publication No. 15. 3

Temperature Range: -46OC to 60OC. Density Range: 490 to 676 kg/m

For Propylene: Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing Density (kg/m3) where: CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 15 deg.C and Saturation Pressure. Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure Calculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2* * Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted using appropriate conversion factors.

5.2.6.

Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes

Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on a computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithm was based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.

5.2.7.

Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC)

The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity and isentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculated using equations based on the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).

Density of Ethylene (NIST) Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)

Density of Ethylene (API) Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1* (formerly API 2565). This is the unmodified original standard. * Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted using appropriate conversion factors.

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-11

Chapter 5


5.2.8.

Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) 3

= Total (Pulses/Second) / (Pulses/m ) * 3600

5.2.9.

Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact) = (Prover Volume/ Tdvol) * 3600

5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor = (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / [(Prove Pulses/K) x CTLM x CPLM]

5.2.11. Equivalencies Where: PV = Base prover volume at 15OC and 0 kpa CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel

For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover = 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OC of the prover tube T = The average prover temperature in OC Tbase = User entry

For Compact Prover = [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci] tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover tube tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover switch rod CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel = 1 + ((P - Pbase x D) / (E x t)) P = Internal pressure in kpa D = Internal diameter in centimeters E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube t = Wall thickness of prover tube in centimeters CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature = CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover during a prove CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure = CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove

5-12


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3

Configuration and Advanced Operation CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature = CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter during a prove CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure = CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove

When Using Pulse Interpolation Method Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)

When Proving Propylene Product CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000 CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at Reference Conditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2* * Note: API Chapter 11.3.3.2 requires input variables to be US units of measure and provides flowing density in US units. The Omni converts metric units to and from US units and uses the algorithm as is.

When Proving Ethylene Product All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculated based on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.

5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses MFm =

BPV x C TSP x CPSP x Avg Density x DF Pulses / K Factor

where: BPV = Base Prover Volume Avg Density = Average Density during each run DF = Density Factor for the Densitometer

5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used: Prover Density = Meter Density x

C TLP x C PLP C TLM x C PLM

5.2.14. PID Control Primary Variable error % ep

20/24.71 w 04/98

ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span Action

Forward

ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span Action

Reverse


5-13

Chapter 5

Flow Equations and Algorithms Secondary Variable error % es es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function) C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + ∑e) Controlling on Primary Variable C0 = Primary Gain * (es + ∑e) Controlling on Secondary Variable Integral Error ∑e ∑e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable ∑e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable

5-14


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


5.2.15. Solartron  Density kg/m3 Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as detailed below.

Uncompensated Density 2

D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t ) Where: t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds. K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature Compensated Density Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 20)) + K19 x (Tf - 20) Where: Tf = Temperature in degrees C K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P) Where: Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g K20 = K20A + K20B x P K21 = K21A + K21B x P K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron. These are usually based on Bar pressure units. They must be converted to kpa based pressure units.

Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only) For LPG Products in the range of 350 - 550 kg/m3 the following term can be applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp. Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)

3

Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron to obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients ' Kr' and ' Kj'. (Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 500.) Users not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-15

Chapter 5


5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m3 Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below. Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0'] Where: t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0 DCF = Density correction factor do’ = A calibration constant, mass/volume* t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds K = Spool calibration constant Tf = Flowing temperature OC Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OC Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / kpa.g Pcal = Calibration pressure in kpa.g 3

* Note: do' must be expressed in the units of kg/m

5-16


20/24.71 w 04/98

Volume 3


5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3 UGC Density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC densitometer and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown below. 2

Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t ) 2

2

Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D + Kt2D + Kt1) x (Tf - T) + Density) Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are entered via the keypad DCF = Density correction factor 3

D = Uncorrected density kg/m

t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds Pf = Flowing Pressure in kpa.g Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.C T =Calibration temperature in Deg.C Pc = Calibration pressure kpa.g

5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration Constants In many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers are based on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered are 3 based on kg/m , degrees Celsius and kpa⋅gauge. Contact the densitometer manufacture or Omni if you require assistance.

20/24.71 w 04/98


5-17







®

Modbus  Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4

MODBUS DATABASE ADDRESSES AND INDEX NUMBERS

Contents of Volume 4 1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999)........................................ 1-1 1.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays...............1-1 1.2. Archive Control Flags.............................................................................................1-1 1.3. Status / Command Data..........................................................................................1-2 1.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O....................................................... 1-2 1.3.2. Programmable Booleans....................................................................................... 1-2 1.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points ..................................................................... 1-2 1.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ..................................................................... 1-3 1.3.5. Micro Motion  Alarm Status Points ..................................................................... 1-5 1.3.6. More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ............................................................ 1-6 1.3.7. User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ........................................................................ 1-6 1.3.8. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points........................................................ 1-6 1.3.9. Command Boolean Points/Variables.................................................................... 1-7 1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ............................................................ 1-10 1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status Points ....................................................................... 1-14 1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags......................................................................... 1-16 1.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ................................... 1-17 1.3.14. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a Poll...................................................................................................................... 1-18 1.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ... 1-18 1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch ...................................... 1-19 1.3.17. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ...................................................................... 1-19

20/24.71+ w 04/98


i



1.3.18. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ..................................................... 1-20 1.3.19. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems................. 1-21 1.3.20. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................ 1-21

2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ............................................................................. 2-1 2.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables............................................................. 2-1 2.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1..........................................................................................2-1 2.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2..........................................................................................2-1 2.1.3. Custom Data Packet #3..........................................................................................2-1

2.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data......................................................................... 2-2 2.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................... 2-2 2.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 2-4 2.5. User Display Definition Variables.......................................................................... 2-4 2.5.1. User Display Number 1 ..........................................................................................2-4 2.5.2. User Display Number 2 ..........................................................................................2-4 2.5.3. User Display Number 3 ..........................................................................................2-4 2.5.4. User Display Number 4 ..........................................................................................2-5 2.5.5. User Display Number 5 ..........................................................................................2-5 2.5.6. User Display Number 6 ..........................................................................................2-5 2.5.7. User Display Number 7 ..........................................................................................2-5 2.5.8. User Display Number 8 ..........................................................................................2-5

2.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records.......................................... 2-6 2.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................... 2-8 2.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data .......................................................................... 2-8 2.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run ............................................. 2-10 2.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence .................................................................................... 2-10 2.9.2. Meter #2 Batch Sequence .................................................................................... 2-10 2.9.3. Meter #3 Batch Sequence .................................................................................... 2-11 2.9.4. Meter #4 Batch Sequence .................................................................................... 2-11

2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables ......................................................... 2-11 2.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................... 2-12 2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 2-12

3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) ............................................................ 3-1 3.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data.................................................................................. 3-1 3.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data .............................................................................. 3-2 3.3. User Display Definition String Variables............................................................... 3-2 3.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs ............................ 3-3 ii


20/24.71+ w 04/98

Volume 4


3.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data ........................................................3-3 3.5.1. Meter #1 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5 3.5.2. Meter #2 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5 3.5.3. Meter #3 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5 3.5.4. Meter #4 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-6

3.6. Prover ASCII String Data ........................................................................................3-6

4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999) .............................................................................. 4-1 4.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data................................................................................4-1 4.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................4-4 4.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data ....................................................................................4-5 4.4. More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data ......................................................................4-6 4.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.3. Meter #3 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.4. Meter #4 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6

4.5. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data......................................................................................4-9 4.5.1. Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses ..................................................... 4-10

5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)......................................................... 5-1 5.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-1 5.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data....................................................5-2 5.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables .....................5-2 5.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...........................................................5-3 5.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data........................................................5-6 5.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .........................................................5-7 5.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................................5-8 5.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-10 5.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ....................................................5-11 5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point......................................................................5-15 5.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover........................................................................... 5-15 5.10.2. Last Prove Data.................................................................................................. 5-17 5.10.3. Data Rejected During Prove.............................................................................. 5-17 5.10.4. Prove Run Data.................................................................................................. 5-18 5.10.5. Prove Average Data ........................................................................................... 5-19 5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter Data ......................................................................... 5-20 5.10.7. Proving Series Data........................................................................................... 5-21 5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved .............................................................................. 5-22 20/24.71+ w 04/98


iii



5.10.9. Mass Prove Data................................................................................................. 5-22

5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.............................. 5-24 5.11.1. Previous Batch Average .................................................................................... 5-24 5.11.2. Previous Hour’s Average ................................................................................... 5-25 5.11.3. Previous Day’s Average..................................................................................... 5-25 5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs............................ 5-26 5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages................................................................ 5-26 5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data ........................................................... 5-26 5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages ...................................................... 5-27 5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities................................................................................. 5-27 5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data............................................................. 5-28 5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data........................................................... 5-28

6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) ..................................................................... 6-1 6.1. Custom Report Templates ..................................................................................... 6-1 6.2. Previous Batch Reports......................................................................................... 6-1 6.3. Previous Prove Reports......................................................................................... 6-2 6.4. Previous Daily Reports .......................................................................................... 6-2 6.5. Last Snapshot Report ............................................................................................ 6-2 6.6. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ................................................................................. 6-3

7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999) .............................................. 7-1 7.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................... 7-1 7.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data...............................................................................7-1 7.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................7-3 7.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.................................7-4 7.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.......................................................7-4 7.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...........7-6 7.1.6. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data....................7-7 7.1.7. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data ....................................................7-9 7.1.8. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 7-14

7.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ........................ 7-17 7.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data ................................... 7-19 7.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ........................ 7-27

iv


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) 1.1. INFO - This data is accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads and 16 for writes. Boolean data bits are packed 8 to a byte.

Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays

These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read or written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when setting up the serial port. 0001

Custom Data Packet / Array #1 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index 3001-3040).

0201

Custom Data Packet / Array #2 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Index 3041-3056).

0401

Custom Data Packet / Array #3 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Indices 3057-3096).

1.2.

Archive Control Flags

Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by resetting or setting this variable. 1000

Archive Control Flag Report data following flag will be archived not printed.

2000

Archive Control Flag Report data following flag is printed and archived.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-1

Chapter 1

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)

1.3. 1.3.1. ‹

IMPORTANT

‹

Never set a physical I/O point which has been assigned as an input as this could cause a DC voltage to appear on the input terminals of that point which may conflict with any voltage already present on those terminals.

Status / Command Data Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O

The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or 01 though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001 through 1024. All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus must first have the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point Assign' (see Chapter 9). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application software from overwriting the Modbus write. 1001

Digital I/O Point #1

to 1024

1.3.2. INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

Digital I/O Point #24

Programmable Booleans

Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value of the programmable Boolean statements (see Chapter 10). You may read from or write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic statement. 1025

Boolean Point #25

to 1088

1.3.3.

Boolean Point #88

Programmable Accumulator Points

Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through 7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089. 1089

Programmable Accumulator #1 Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.

to 1099

Programmable Accumulator #11 Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.

1-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

1.3.4. Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note: * Used to assign accumulator to the front panel counters or digital I/O points)

Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405 would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4. *

1n01

Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume

*

1n02

Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)

*

1n03

Pulses - Mass

*

1n04

Pulses - Net Standard Volume S&W corrected GSV.

1n05

Meter Run Active Flag Flow pulses above threshold frequency.

1n06

Meter Being Proved Activates during proving of this meter.

1n07

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter Clears if acknowledged.

1n08

Batch End Acknowledge Toggle ON/OFF.

1n09

Auto Prove Problem Ten consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.

1n10

Batch Preset Reached Batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.

1n11

Batch Preset Warning Flag Batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5n38).

1n12

Batch End Acknowledge 500 msec pulse.

1n13

Calculation Alarm Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.

1n14

Override In Use - Density Pressure Override in use for any reason.

1n15

Auto Prove Flag Indicates that flowmeter ‘n’ will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate or meter run time, etc. It is cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

1n16

Override In Use - Temperature

1n17

Override In Use - Pressure

1n18

Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer

1n19

Override In Use - Density Temperature


1-3

Chapter 1

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) 1n20


INFO - Transducer and flow rate alarms remain set while the alarm condition exists.

Flowrate - Low Low Alarm For points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are either gross volume or mass units (depending on which unit is selected) for all products.

1n21


1n22


1n23


1n24

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n25

Meter Temperature - Low Alarm

1n26

Meter Temperature - High Alarm

1n27

Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n28

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29

Meter Pressure - Low Alarm

1n30

Meter Pressure - High Alarm

1n31

Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n32

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33

Gravity/Density - Low alarm

1n34

Gravity/Density - High Alarm

1n35

Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n36

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37

Density Temperature - Low Alarm

1n38

Density Temperature - High Alarm

1n39

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n40

Spare

to 1n43

Spare

1n44


1n45

Density Pressure - Low Alarm

1n46

Density Pressure - High Alarm

1n47


1n48

Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.

1n49

Turbine - Channel A Failed Total absence of pulses on Channel A.

1n50

Turbine - Channel B Failed Total absence of pulses on Channel B.

1n51

Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel Missing or added pulses.

1-4


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


1n52

Spare

1n53

Spare

1n54

Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.

1n55

Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.

1n56

1n58

Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.

1.3.5.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Batch Start Acknowledge Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.

1n59

Micro Motion  - Data obtained via RS-485 link with Micro Motion device.

Batch in Progress Flag Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.

1n57 INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run.

Meter Off-line Flag

Spare

Micro Motion  Alarm Status Points

The following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT via Modbus and placed in the ‘Micro Motion Alarm Word’ as the destination address 3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be logged into the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur. 1n60

Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure

1n61

Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made

1n62

Micro Motion - Sensor Failure

1n63

Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure

1n64

Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged

1n65

Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged

1n66

Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured

1n67

Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure

1n68

Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated

1n69

Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed

1n70

Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits

1n71

Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure

1n72

Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure

1n73

Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected

1n74

Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress

1n75

Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred


1-5

Chapter 1


1.3.6. Note: See 2n00 area for even more meter run alarms and status points.

1n76

More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge Flag Pulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.

1n77

Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.

1n78

Non-correctable Totalizer Error Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.

1n79

Spare

to 1n99

1.3.7.

Spare

User Scratch Pad Boolean Points

There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received over a Modbus data link. 1501

Scratchpad - Point 01

to 1599


1600

Reserved DO NOT USE!

1601


to 1649

1.3.8.


User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points

Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to. 1650

Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01

to 1699

1-6

Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'.

Command Boolean Points/Variables

Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement. 1700

Dummy Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be assigned to as many I/O points as needed.

1701

Prover Seal is OK Must be true when sphere is between detectors.

1702

End Batch - Station End batch on all meter runs defined in station.

Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will result if a command which has been assigned to a digital I/O point directly also needs to be activated via a Modbus write. This is because the On/Off state of the digital I/O point overwrites the command point every 100 msec and most command point actions are only triggered every 500 msec.

1703


1704


1705


1706


1707

Station - ‘Change Product’ Strobe

Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.

Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1746. Used with Station Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).

1708

Prove - Meter #1 Request Edge triggered.


1709


1710


1711


1712

Station Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledges all alarms.

1713

Reset Power Failed Flag See power fail Flag 1829.

1714

Trial Prove - Meter #1 Request Edge triggered.

1715


1716


1717


1718

Abort the Prove in Progress

1719

Request Local Snapshot Report Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.

1720

Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.

1721

Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-7

Chapter 1

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) #

INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

1722

Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter (see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.

#

1723


#

1724


#

1725


#

1726

Prover Start Permissive Checked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves are lined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.

1727

Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1 st

nd

Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.

Note:

#


These points are defaulted to ‘active’ and need not be manipulated unless the application requires it.

1728


1729


1730


1731

Compact Prover Piston Downstream Applies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.

1732

Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1 Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.

1733


1734


1735


Note:

*

1736


*

*

1737


*

1738


*

1739


1740

Spare

1741

Remote Up Arrow Key

These points also affect station totalizing (see also point 1761). Level sensitive.

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1742

Remote Down Arrow Key Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1743

Product Select - Bit 0 Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 = product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).

1744

1-8


1745


1746



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 1747 Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #1 For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product specified by points 1743-1746.

1748


1749


1750


1751

Freeze Analog Inputs Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.

1752

2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1 Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 17221725). Level sensitive.

1753


1754


1755


1756

Spare

to 1759

Spare

1760

Leak Detection Freeze Command Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see 5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.

1761

Disable Flow Totalizing Station This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.

1762

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1 At local printer.

to


1769

Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8

1770

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1 At local printer.

to 1777

Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8

1778

Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1 At local printer.

to 1785

Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #8

1786

Remote Print - Alarm Report At local printer.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-9

Chapter 1

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) 1787

Implement Last Prove Meter Factor Causes the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented and saved. Edge triggered.

Note: More ‘Command Boolean Points’ are located at address 2701.

1788

Shutdown PID - Loop #1 st

Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on. INFO - Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edge triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' or 'True' to that point. It is not necessary to write a '0' or 'False' after the command is given. The status of a command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable statement.

‹

CAUTION

‹

Stored archive data may be lost! See chapter on ‘Raw Data Archive’ before manipulating these data points. These functions are duplicated using integers at 13920 and 13921.

1789


1790


1791


1792

Stop Flow PID - Loop #1 st

nd

Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to the ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the ‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.

1793


1794


1795


‹ 1796

Raw Data Archive ‘Run’ Level sensitive.

‹ 1797

Reconfigure Archive Level sensitive.

1798

Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Station The previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.

1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

Note:

Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group alarms and status points. *

1801

Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

*

1802

Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

*

1803

Positive - Mass Pulses

*

1804

Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

*

1805

Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

*

1806

Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

*

1807

Negative - Mass Pulses

*

1808

Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

1809

Flowrate - Low Low Alarm

Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.

* Used to assign accumulators to the front panel electromechanical counters and digital I/O points.

For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units (depending on which unit is selected) for all products.

1-10

1810


1811


1812



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 1813

Gravity Rate of Change Flag Set when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.


1814

Delayed Gravity Rate of Change Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.

1815

Any System Alarm Includes acknowledged alarms also.

1816

Any New System Alarm Does not include acknowledged alarms.

1817


1818

Batch Preset Warning Flag

Toggle state at batch end (see 1835). Station batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5815).

1819

Batch Preset Reached Flag Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset

1820

Station - Current Product ID Bit 0 Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product for the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).

1821


1822


1823


1824

Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1 Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings and are based on current station flow rates.

1825


1826


1827


Note:

#

1828

Day Start Flag True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).

# These points pulse high for one 500 msec cycle time.

1829

Power Fail Flag

1830


True after power up (see 1713 for reset). Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ or jammed with paper.

#

1831

Hour Start Flag

#

1832

Week Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.

#

1833

Month Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month.

#

1834

Year Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January.

#

1835

Batch End Acknowledge Pulses at batch end (see 1817).

#

1836

Snapshot Printed Indicates snapshot report printed.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-11

Chapter 1



EPROM error Flag Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.

1838


1839

Zero Value Always false.

~ 1840

Boolean Statement Alarm Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.

~ 1841

Variable Statement Alarm Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.

1842


to

Notes:

1857


#

1858

Calendar Day Start Flag

#

1859

#

1860

Format: 00:00:00.


Calendar Week Start Flag Format: 00:00:00 Monday.

Calendar Month Start Flag Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.

#

1861


Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

# These points pulse high for one 500 msec. cycle time.


1862

Station Density - Transducer Failed Low

1863

Station Density - Low Alarm

1864

Station Density - High Alarm

1865

Station Density - Transducer Failed High

1866

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low

to 1869

Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High

1870


to 1873


*

1874

Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag

*

1875

Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag

1876

Batch Recalculation Acknowledge Flag Pulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.

1877

1-12

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 * Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note:

>


1878

Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.

*

1879

*

1880



*> 1881

Liter Units Selected Flag Set when Liter is the selected volume unit.

*> 1882

Cubic Meter Units Selected Flag 3

Set when m is the selected volume unit.

1883


1884


1885


1886


1887


to 1890


1891


to 1894


1895


to 1898 Note: See 2600 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

1899


Net Volume @ 2nd Reference Temperature Appears on Reports Flag Set when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-13

Chapter 1


1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status Points INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.

Alarm and Status points connected with the meter proving system are grouped here. The second digit ‘9’ defines a prover. See the 1700 area for command points associated with the prover.

1901

Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1902

Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1903

Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1904

Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1905

Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1906

Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

1907

Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1908

Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

Note:

#

1909

Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable

# These alarms are active

#

1910

Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded

until the next prove sequence is started.

#

1911

Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed

#

1912

Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete

1913

1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction

1914

3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction

1915

2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction

1916

4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction

1917

Launch Sphere - Forward Direction Two second pulse.

1918

Launch Sphere - Reverse Direction Two second pulse.

#

1919

Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded

#

1920

Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between Detectors

#

1921

Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable

#

1922

Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive Received

#

1923

Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented

#

1924

Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not Flowing

See 1701.

See 1726.

See 1n05.

1925

Plenum - Charge Required Points 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can be automatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.

1926

Plenum - Vent Required

1927

Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command Output Active low output to launch piston.

1928

Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag 500 msec pulse at end of prove.

1-14


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 1929

Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature

1930

Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature

1931

Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure

1932

Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure

*

1933

Mass Prove Flag

*

1934

Net Prove Flag

*

1935

Mass Prove Report Flag

*

1936

Net Prove Report Flag

Note:

*

1937

Mass Calculation in Use Flag

* These flags are used to

*

1938

Meter Factor Repeatability in Use Flag

*

1939


cause data to be conditionally printed on the prover report.

Set when run deviation is based on meter factor.

Count Repeatability in Use Flag Set when run deviation is based on meter counts.

1940

Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1941

Prover Density - Low Alarm

1942

Prover Density - High Alarm

1943

Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1944

Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to 1947

Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1948

Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to 1951

Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1952

Spare

to

20/24.71+ w 04/98

1954

Spare

*

1955

Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected

*

1956

Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected

1957

Spare

1958

Spare


1-15

Chapter 1

User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) *

1959



*

1960


*

1961


*

1962


*

1963


*

1964


Note:

*

1965


*

1966


*

1967


* These flags are used to cause data to be conditionally printed on the prover report.

1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions of these flags. Note: The ‘In Progress’ flags are those which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as a SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

1-16

2n01


2n02

Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n03


2n04


2n05


2n06


2n07


2n08


2n09


2n10


2n11


2n12


2n13


2n14

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n15


2n16


2n17


2n18

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19


2n20



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



2n21

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n25


2n26


2n27


2n28


2n29


2n30


2n31


2n32

Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33

Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n34

Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n35

Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n36

Previous Daily - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n37


2n37


2n37


2n37


1.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

2601


to 2604


2605

Inlet Temperature - Override in Use

2606

Outlet Temperature - Override in Use

2607

Inlet Pressure - Override in Use

2608

Outlet Pressure - Override in Use

2620


2621

System Initialized Flag True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).

2622

Day Light Savings Time ‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623

Archive Memory Alarm 0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


1-17

Chapter 1





2701


2702


2703


2704


2705


2706


2707


2708


2709


2710


2711


2712


1.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor the other.

2713

Others - Watchdog Status Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).

2714

Others - Master Status Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).

2715

Assume Master Status Command Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.

2716

Assume Slave Status Command Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.

1-18


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.


20/24.71+ w 04/98

2756

Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1 When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 is recalculated. Edge triggered.

2757


2758


2759


1.3.17. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run versions of flags. 2801


2802

Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2803


2804


2805


2806


2807


2808


2809


2810


2811


2812


2813


2814

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2815


2816


2817


2818

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819


2820



1-19

Chapter 1




2822

Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2823


2824

Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2825


2826


2827


2828


2829


2830


2831 2832

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833

Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2834

Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2835

Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2836

Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2837

Spare

to 2851

Spare


Note: It is unlikely that the user would have any use for these variables.

1-20



2853


2854


2855


2856


2857


2858


2859


2860


2861


2862

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



2864


1.3.20. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

2865


2866


2867


2868


2869

Spare

to 2999

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


1-21


Volume 4

2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) 2.1. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

2.1.1.

Custom Data Packet Definition Variables Custom Data Packet #1

The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed below. 3001

Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number

3002

Group 1 - Number of Index Points

to 3039


3040


2.1.2.

Custom Data Packet #2



3042


to 3055


3056


2.1.3.




3058


to

20/24.71+ w 04/98

3095


3096



2-1

Chapter 2

16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)

2.2. Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note:

>


> 3097

Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Select Units 0=m3; 1=Liter.

3098

Number of Totalizer Digits Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.

3099

Select Batch Preset Unit 0=Net; 1= Gross; 2=Mass.

2.3.

Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406. 3n01

Override Code - Temperature For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If transmitter fails use last hours average.

3n02

Override Code - Pressure

3n03

Override Code - Gravity/Density

3n04

Override Code - Density Temperature

3n05

Override Code - Density Pressure

3n06

Active Threshold Hz Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.

3n07

Prover Volume Select Brooks SVP: 0=Use downstream; 1=Use upstream.

3n08

Auto Prove Enable 0=No auto-prove; 1=Enable auto-prove.

3n09

Spare

3n10

Viscosity Linearized Gross (IV) Volume 0=No; 1=Apply Liquid Correction Factor (LCF).

3n11

Spare

3n12

Spare

3n13

Meter Factor Used in Net and Mass 0=No; 1=Yes.

3n14

Is Meter Already Temperature Compensated? 0=No; 1=Yes.

3n15

Viscosity Correction Polynomial 0=Positive Displacement Meter; 1=Helical Turbine Meter.

3n16

BS&W Source 0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.

2-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 3n17

Viscosity Source 0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.

3n18

Micro Motion - Alarm Word Via RS-485 from device (see also 1n60 -1n75).

3n19

PID Control Mode

3n20

Setpoint Mode

Do not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.

INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.

3n21

PID Loop Status Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.

3n22

Frequency Point - K Factor #1 For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.

3n23

Frequency Point - K Factor #2

3n24


3n25


3n26


3n27


3n28


3n29


3n30


3n31


3n32


3n33


3n34

Comparitor Error Threshold When ‘dual pulse’ error checking enabled only.

3n35

Notes:

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments;. i.e., 1000 represents 100.0%

* Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

~ 2s complement numbers based on the 4-20 mA spans. Values are expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments; i.e., 1000 equals 100.0 %.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare

to 3n39

Spare

#

3n40

Current Net (GSV) Flowrate

*

3n41

Net (GSV) Totalizer

#

3n42

Current Gross Flowrate

*

3n43

Gross Total

#

3n44

Current Mass Flowrate

*

3n45

Mass Total

~ 3n46

Current Meter Run Pressure

~ 3n47

Current Meter Run Temperature

~ 3n48

Current Transducer Density/Gravity

#

3n49

Current S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Flowrate

*

3n50

S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Total

3n51

Move Previous Batch Number to Print Area

3n52

Number of Calculation Times of Batch Report


2-3

Chapter 2



Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar operations. 3501

Scratchpad - Short Integer #1

to 3599

2.5.


User Display Definition Variables

The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with setting up User Displays.

2.5.1.

User Display Number 1

3601

Database Index Number of 1st Variable

3602

Decimal Places for 1st Variable

3603

Database Index Number of 2nd Variable

3604

Decimal Places for 2nd Variable

3605

Database Index Number of 3rd Variable

3606

Decimal Places for 3rd Variable

3607

Database Index Number of 4th Variable

3608

Decimal Places for 4th Variable

2.5.2. 3609

User Display Number 2 Database Index Number of 1st Variable

to 3616

2.5.3. 3617

th

Decimal Places for 4 Variable


to 3624

2-4

th



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

2.5.4. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

3625


to 3632

2.5.5. 3633



to 3640

2.5.6. 3641



to 3648

2.5.7. 3649



to 3656

2.5.8. 3657



to 3664

20/24.71+ w 04/98

th



2-5

Chapter 2



Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records

See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flow computer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below. 3701

Archive 701 - Maximum Records Number of data records in archive file.

3702

Archive 701 - Current Record Number Number of the last record updated.

3703

Archive 701 - Request Record Number Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3704


3705


3706


3707


3708


3709


3710


3711


3712


3713


3714


3715


3716


3717


3718


2-6


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 3719 INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.


3720


3721


3722


3723


3724


3725


3726


3727


3728


3729


3730


3731


3732


3733


3734


3735


3736


20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-7

Chapter 2



3737

More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status 0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.

3738

Time Tag

3739

Time Tag

3740

Time Tag

MM/DD or DD/MM format. YY/HH format MM/SS format.

3741

New Archive Bit 0-Bit 9 for files 701-710

Notes: * Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

3742

Spare

to 3768

Spare

3769

Number of Historical Alarms to Send to Modbus Buffer

~ To avoid flushing the audit trail, audit events other than complete ‘downloads’ to the flow computer are usually not documented in the ‘audit trail’ unless serial port passwords have been enabled. If pass-words are enabled, the target address is recorded for single point writes. Rigorous auditing of a serial port or group of serial ports can be activated by placing the appropriate hexadecimal code in 3800 (S = Serial Port): 00 00 00 AA = Audit S1 00 00 AA 00 = Audit S2 00 AA 00 00 = Audit S3 AA 00 00 00 = Audit S4 To monitor multiple ports; e.g: AA 00 AA 00 = Audit S4 & S2

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments. i.e. 1000 represents 100.0% . No over range or under range checking is done.

2-8

The number of historical alarms indicated are written to the Modbus buffer (9402)

3770

Spare

to 3799

2.8. ~

3800

Spare

Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data Special Diagnostic Function Used to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see side bar note).

3801

Running Product Number Common Batch Stack - Station.

#

3802

Current Net (GSV) Flowrate

*

3803

Net (GSV) Totalizer

#

3804

Current Gross (IV)Flowrate

*

3805

Gross (IV) Totalizer

#

3806


*

3807

Mass Totalizer

#

3808

Current Pressure

#

3809

Current Temperature

#

3810

Current Gravity/Density

3811

Allen Bradley - CRC Error Counter

3812

Allen Bradley - Message ‘Type’ Error Counter


20/24.71+ 04/98


Volume 4 3813 INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Algorithm Select - Product #1 Points 3813-3828 select the API, GPA, ASTM, NIST calculations that will be used when selecting these products.

3814

Algorithm Select - Product #2

3815


3816


3817


3818


3819


3820


3821


3822


3823


3824


3825


3826


3827


3828


3829

Flow Average Factor Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.

3830

Print Priority 0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.

3831

Number of Nulls After CR Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.

3832

Print Interval in Minutes Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.

3833

Automatic - Weekly Batch Select 0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3834

Automatic - Monthly Batch Select st

0=None; 1=1 day of the month.

3835

Automatic - Hourly Batch Select 0=No; 1=Yes.

3836

Default Report Templates 0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.

3837

Batch Stack Mode Select 0=Independent stacks; 1=Common stack.

3838

Clear Daily @ Batch End Select 0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.

3839

Spare

to 3841

Spare

3842

Select Date Type Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-9

Chapter 2


2.9. Application Revision 20/24.71 - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71 for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

The following 24 registers are treated as either one 24-position shift stack or, 4 separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in the stack(s) is shifted automatically at the beginning of a new batch. A new batch starts after a either a ‘station batch end’ (1702) or ‘meter batch end’ (1703 to 1706) command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of a stack is the ‘current running product’ for the batch in progress. This entry is discarded (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a ‘batch end’. A ‘batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry ‘0’. Note that these entries are only part of the ‘batch stack’. Matching entries for other data types such as long integers and strings can be found at 5819 and 4852. All three ‘data type’ stacks act as a single unit, they all synchronize and shift together.

2.9.1.

Meter #1 Batch Sequence

3843

Sequence #1 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1

3844


3845


3846


3847


3848


2.9.2.

2-10

Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run


3849


3850


3851


3852


3853


3854



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



3855


3856


3857


3858


3859


3860


2.9.4.


3861


3862

Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack Product #20

3863


3864


3865


3866


2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848. 3867

Current - Hour 0-23.

3868

Current - Minute 0-59.

3869

Current - Second 0-59.

3870

Current - Month 1-12.

3871

Current - Day of Month 1-31.

3872

Current - Year 0-99; Year 2000=00.

3873

Current - Day of Week Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3874

Disable Daily Report 0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


2-11

Chapter 2


2.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

3875

Spare

3876

Override Code - Density

3877


3878


3879

Move Previous ‘n’ Batch to Print Area

3880

Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #1

to 3895

Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #16

3896

Spare

to 3899

Spare

2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data 3901

Prove Run

3902

Proving Meter Number

3903

Outlet (Right) - Pressure % 0-999.

3904

Outlet (Right) - Temperature % 0-999.

3905

Inlet (Left) - Pressure % 0-999.

3906

Inlet (Left) - Temperature % 0-999.

3907

Prove Counts

3908

Override Code - Prover Density/Gravity

3909

Override Code - Prover Density Temperature

3910

Override Code - Prover Density Pressure

3911

Enable Trial Prove Report 0=No; 1=Yes.

2-12


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


3912

Number of Passes/Run

3913

Number of Prover Runs to Average Maximum is 10.

3914

Number of Total Prove Runs

3915

Inactivity Timer Seconds.

3916

Temperature Stability Sample Time

3917

Override Code - Inlet (Left) Temperature

3918

Override Code - Outlet (Right) Temperature

3919

Override Code - Inlet (Left) Pressure

3920

Override Code - Outlet (Right) Pressure

3921

Uni- or Bi-directional Prover 0=Uni, 1=Bi; 2=Uni-Compact; 3=Bi-SVP; 4=Master Meter Prove; 5=2 Series Bi.

3922

Automatic Implement Prove Meter Factor

3923

Apply Meter Factor Retroactively 0=No; 1=Yes.

3924

Prover Density Stability Timer

3925

Flow Stable Period Minutes.

3926

Meter Down Period Hours.

3927

Print Run Passes (Compact Prove) 0=No; 1=Yes.

3928

Run Repeatability on Meter Factor 0=No; 1=Yes.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

3929

Spare

3930

Proved Meter Temperature Compensated

3931

Run # - 4th Last

3932

Run # - 3rd Last

3933

Run # - 2nd Last

3934

Run # - Last

3935

Run # - 1 Run

st

nd

3936

Run # - 2

3937

Run # - 3rd Run

Run

3938

Run # - 4 Run

th

th

3939

Run # -5 Run

3940

Run # - 6th Run

3941

Run # - 7th Run

3942

Run # - 8th Run

3943

Run # - 9 Run

3944

Run # - 10 Run

th

th


2-13

Chapter 2

16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999) 3945

Current Prove Passes

3946

Spare

to 3999

2-14

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) 3.1. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.

Note: The index number of each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of 4 registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each point counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Meter Run ASCII String Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments). 4n01

Running Batch - Start Date

4n02

Running Batch - Start Time

#

4n03

Batch End - Date

#

4n04

Batch End - Time

4n05

Running Product Name

4n06

Current - Calculation Mode Algorithm set used, in string format.

4n07

Current - Batch ID Characters 1-8.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each string counts as 4 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

4n08

Current - Batch ID Characters 9-16.

4n09

Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass Used on reports. It contains ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Characters 1-8.

4n10

Linear Correction Factor (LCF) Used in Gross Characters 1-8

Note:

# Last batch end for this meter run.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

4n11

Meter - Serial Number

4n12

Meter - Size

4n13

Meter - Model

4n14

Meter - ID

4n15

Flow Meter Tag

4n16

Spare

4n17

Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18

Transmitter Tag - Pressure

4n19

Transmitter Tag - Densitometer

4n20

Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature

4n21

Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure

4n22

Output Tag - PID Control


3-1

Chapter 3

8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999) 4n23


Spare

to 4n30

Spare

4n31

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Start Date

4n32

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Start Time

4n33

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch End date

4n34

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch End Time

4n35

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Product Name

4n36

Previous Batch ‘n’ - API Table

4n37

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch ID Characters 1-8.

4n38

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch ID Characters 9-16.

4n39

3.2.

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Meter Factor Used in Net

Scratch Pad ASCII String Data

Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations. 4501

Scratchpad - ASCII String #1

to 4599

3.3.


User Display Definition String Variables

The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are listed below. INFO - See 3601 area for more data points needed to setup the user displays.

4601

User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1

4602


4603


4604


4605


to 4632


4633

User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence

to 4640

3-2



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

3.4. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.



4707

String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Tag - Input #1

to 4710

3.5.

Auxiliary Tag - Input #4

Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data

4801

Station - Batch Start Date

4802

Station - Batch Start Time

4803

Station - Batch End Date

4804

Station - Batch End Time

4805

Station - Running Product Name

4806

Station - Current Calculation Mode

4807

Date of Last Database Change Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.

4808

Time of Last Database Change

4809

Reserved

4810

Esc Sequence to Print Condensed Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).

4811

Esc Sequence to Print Normal Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).

4812

Daylight Savings Starts Date format field (**/**/**).

4813

Daylight Savings Ends Date format field (**/**/**).

4814

Density/Gravity Tag

4815

Station - ID

4816

Station - Density Temperature Tag

4817

Station - Density Pressure Tag

4818

Print Interval Timer Start Time Time format field (**:**:**).

4819

Time to Print Daily Report Time format field (**:**:**).

4820

Product #1 - Name

to 4835 20/24.71+ w 04/98

Product #16 - Name


3-3

Chapter 3

8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)

Application Revision 20/24.71 - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71 for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

4836

Flow Computer ID

4837

Company Name Characters 1-8.

4838


4839


4840


4841

Company Name Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)

4842

Station Location Characters 1-8.

4843


4844


4845


4846

Station Location Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)

Note:

*

4847

Current Date

*

4848

Current Time

Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).

* The flow computer time and date can be set by writing to these ASCII variables. Be sure to include the colons ( : ) in the time string and the slashes ( / ) in the date string.

See also 3867-3869.

4849

Example: 20.71

4850

Online Password / EPROM Checksum Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.

4851

3-4

Software Version Number

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

3.5.1. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.



Meter #1 Batch ID

4852


4853

Batch ID

4854


4855

Batch ID

4856


4857

Batch ID

4858


4859

Batch ID

4860


4861

Batch ID

4862


4863

Batch ID

3.5.2.

Meter #2 Batch ID

4864


4865

Batch ID

to 4874


4875

Batch ID

3.5.3.

Meter #3 Batch ID

4876


4877

Batch ID

to

20/24.71+ w 04/98

4886


4887

Batch ID


3-5

Chapter 3



Meter #4 Batch ID

4888


4889

Batch ID

to 4898


4899

Batch ID

3.6.

Prover ASCII String Data

4901

Prove Meter - Product Name

4902

Prove Meter - Calculation Mode Text

4903

Prove Meter - Batch ID Characters 1-8.

4904

Prove Meter - Batch ID Characters 9-16.

4905

Prove Meter - Serial Number Manufacturer’s Number.

4906

Prove Meter - Size

4907

Prove Meter - Model Manufacturer Model Number.

3-6

4908

Prove Meter - ID

4909

Prove Meter - Tag

4910

Spare

4911

Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature Tag

4912

Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature Tag

4913

Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure Tag

4914

Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure Tag

4915

Plenum Pressure Tag

4916

Prover - Density/Gravity Tag

4917

Prover - Density Temperature Tag

4918

Prover - Density Pressure Tag

4919

Spare

4920

Reserved


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 4921

Prove - Date

4922

Prove - Time

4923

Selected Table Text

4924

Prove - Meter Product Name

4925

Prove - Meter ID

4926

Prove - Meter Serial #

4927

Prove - Meter Size

4928

Prove - Meter Model

4929

Previous Prove - Meter Factor Date

4930

Previous Prove - Meter Factor Time

4931

Prove - Result String Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.

4932

Prove - Result String Characters 9-16.

4933


4934


4935

Prove - Reason String Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.

4936

Prove - Reason String Characters 9-16.

4937


4938


20/24.71+ w 04/98

4939

Master Meter - ID

4940

Master Meter - Serial Number

4941

Master Meter - Size

4942

Master Meter - Model


3-7


Volume 4

4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999) 4.1. INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each 32-bit integer counts as two registers. The starting address of the 32-bit integer still applies.

Notes:


The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405. 5n01

Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.

*

5n02

Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n03

Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n04

Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer

*

5n05

Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer

*

5n06

Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n07

Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n08

Cumulative In Progress - NSV Totalizer

*

5n09

Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today. These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.

*

5n10

Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5n11

Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5n12

Today’s In Progress - NSV Totalizer

#

5n13

Meter Factor in Use Now

#

5n14

Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress

#

5n15

Average Meter Factor - Today’s In Progress

5n16

Batch Preset Remaining

5n17

Running Product Number

5n18

‘Dual Pulse’ (Comparitor) Error Counts for Batch

* The increment for all totalizers depends upon the ‘totalizer resolution’ settings shown in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu of OmniCom. They can only be changed via the keypad entries made in the ‘Pass-word Maintenance’ menu after ‘Resetting all Totalizers’.

# These Variables are stored with 4 places after the implied decimal point. i.e. 10000 is interpreted as 1.0000

When pulse fidelity check enabled only.

5n19

In Progress Batch Report Number Increments each batch start.

5n20

Raw Input Counts (500 msec) Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


4-1

Chapter 4


32-Bit Integer Data (5001- 5999) #

5n21

Meter Factor - Product #1

#

5n22


#

5n23


#

5n24


#

5n25


#

5n26


#

5n27


#

5n28


#

5n29

Meter Factor - Product # 9

#

5n30


#

5n31


#

5n32


#

5n33


#

5n34


#

5n35


#

5n36


#

5n37

Meter Factor - Change Retroactive Barrels/m3

#

5n38

Batch Preset Warning 3

Bbl/m .

#

5n39

Spare

5n40

Spare

5n41

Micro Motion - Frequency

5n42

Micro Motion - Mass Total

5n43

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Hour Raw turbine counts for the hour so far.

5n44

In Progress - Gross Total for Hour Points 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5n45

In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5n46

In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5n47

In Progress - NSV Total for Hour

5n48

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Batch Raw turbine counts; this batch.

5n49

In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Day Raw turbine counts; today so far.

5n50

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.

4-2

5n51

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer

5n52

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer

5n53

Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 5n54 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day start hour’.

5n55

Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5n56

Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5n57

Previous Day’s - NSV Totalizer

5n58

Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5n59

Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5n60

Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n61

Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer

5n62

Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5n63

Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5n64

Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n65

Today’s - Opening NSV Totalizer

5n66

Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

5n67

Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n68

Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n69

Cumulative - NSV Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n70

Increment - Gross Totalizer Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).

5n71

Increment - Net Totalizer

5n72

Increment - Mass Totalizer

5n73

Increment - NSV Totalizer

5n74

Previous Hourly - Gross Total Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.

5n75

Previous Hourly - Net Total

5n76

Previous Hourly - Mass Total

5n77

Previous Hourly - NSV Total

5n78

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Gross Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

5n79

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Net

5n80

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Mass

5n81

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening NSV


4-3

Chapter 4

32-Bit Integer Data (5001- 5999) 5n82


Previous Day’s - Opening Gross Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.

5n83

Previous Day’s - Opening Net

5n84

Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5n85

Previous Day’s - Opening NSV

5n86

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Gross Total

5n87

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Net Total

5n88

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Mass Total

5n89

Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Total

5n90

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Report Number Use this value on Batch Report.

5n91

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Product Number

5n92

Spare

to 5n95

Spare

5n96

Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n97

Daily Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n98

Previous Batch ‘n’ Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n99

Previous Daily Net @ 2nd Reference temperature

4.2.

Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement calculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar types of operations. 5501

Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1

to 5599

4-4

Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

4.3. INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


Note:


20/24.71+ w 04/98

*

5801

Station 32-Bit Integer Data Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress. These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.

*

5802

Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5803

Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5804

Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer

*

5805

Cumulative in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

*

5806

Cumulative in Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5807

Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5808

Cumulative in Progress - NSV Totalizer

*

5809

Today’s in Progress - Gross Totalizer Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today. These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.

*

5810

Today’s in Progress - Net Totalizer

*

5811

Today’s in Progress - Mass Totalizer

*

5812

Today’s in Progress - NSV Totalizer

5813

Spare

5814

Line Pack Remaining

5815

Batch Preset Warning

5816

Batch Preset Remaining

5817

Running Product ID

5818

Batch Number


4-5

Chapter 4


4.4. 4.4.1. Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data Meter #1 Batch Size

5819

Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1 - Batch Size

5820

Batch Sequence #2 - Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #2 - Batch Size

5821


5822


5823


5824


4.4.2. 5825

Meter #2 Batch Size Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #7 - Batch Size

to 5830

4.4.3. 5831



to 5836

4.4.4. 5837



to

4-6

5842


5843

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 5844 INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress. These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5845

Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5846

Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5847

Station - In Progress - NSV Total for Hour

5848

Time in hhmmss format Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

5849

Date in yymmdd format Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here does not follow the US/European format selection.

5850 Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each 32-bit integer counts as two registers. The starting address of the 32-bit integer still applies.

Station - In Progress - Gross Total for Hour

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved here from 5801 area at the end of a batch.

5851

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer

5852

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer

5853

Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer

5854

Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day start hour’. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.

5855

Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5856

Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5857

Previous Day’s - NSV Totalizer

5858

Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5859

Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5860

Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5861

Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer

5862

Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5863

Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5864

Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5865

Today’s - Opening NSV Totalizer

5866

Cumulative - Gross Total @ Freeze Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

20/24.71+ w 04/98

5867

Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze

5868

Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze

5869

Cumulative - NSV Total @ Freeze


4-7

Chapter 4

32-Bit Integer Data (5001- 5999) *


Note:


5870

Increment - Gross Totalizer Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers for this current cycle.

*

5871

Increment - Net Totalizer

*

5872

Increment - Mass Totalizer

*

5873

Increment - NSV Totalizer

5874

Previous Hourly - Gross Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.

5875

Previous Hourly - Net

5876

Previous Hourly - Mass

5877

Previous Hourly - NSV

5878

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Gross Data from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.

5879

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Net

5880

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Mass

5881

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening NSV

5882

Previous Day’s - Opening Gross

5883

Previous Day’s - Opening Net

5884

Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5885

Previous Day’s - Opening NSV

5886

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Gross Total

Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.

5887

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Net Total

5888

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Mass Total

5889

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing NSV Total

5890

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Number

5891

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Product Number

5892

Spare

to 5895

Spare

5896

Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5897

Daily Net @ 2

5898

Previous Batch ‘n’ Net @ 2

5899

4-8

nd

Reference Temperature nd

Previous Daily Net @ 2

nd

Reference Temperature



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


Prover 32-Bit Integer Data

5901

Prove Counts

5902

TDVOL Timer Pulses Timer Pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each pulse is 200nsec).

5903

TDFMP Timer Pulses Timer Pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each detector switches (each pulse is 200nsec).

5904

Spare

to 5919

Spare

5920

Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 1st Run

to Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each 32-bit integer counts as two registers. The starting address of the 32-bit integer still applies.

5929

Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 10th Run

5930

Net Total since Last Prove

5931

Prove Report Number

5932

Previous Prove Totalizer

5933

Totalizer Reading This Prove

5934

Pulses - Forward - 4th Last

5935

Pulses - Total - 4th Last

5936

Pulses - Forward - 3rd Last

5937

Pulses - Total - 3rd Last

5938

Pulses - Forward - 2nd Last

5939

Pulses - Total - 2nd Last

5940

Pulses - Forward - Last

5941

Pulses - Total - Last

5942

Pulses - Forward - 1st Run

5943

Pulses - Total - 1st Run

to th

5960

Pulses - Forward - 10 Run

5961

Pulses - Total - 10th Run

5962

Previous Meter Factor - from Last Prove

5963

Actual Meter Factor - Current Run

5964

Flowmeter Frequency - 1st Run

to 5973

20/24.71+ w 04/98

th

Flowmeter Frequency - 10 Run


4-9

Chapter 4



Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses

5974

Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 1st Run

5975

Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses 1st Run

to 5992

Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 10th Run

5993

Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses - 10th Run

5994

Meter Factor - Trial Prove

5995

Meter Factor - Linear

5996

Meter Factor - GSVp/GSVm

5997

Spare

to 5999

4-10

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999) Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

6001

Reserved

to 6999

5.1.

Reserved

Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value. Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see Volume 3) should be written to Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwritten every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the range of -5.00 to 11000. 7001

Analog Output #1

to 7012

Analog Output #12

7013

Spare

to 7024

Spare


5-1

Chapter 5

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999)

5.2. INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.

7025

User-Programmable Variable #1

to 7088

5.3.

User-Programmable Variable #64

Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables

Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through 1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.

7089

Programmable Accumulator #1 Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.

to 7099

Programmable Accumulator #11 Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.

5-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run #4 would be 7405. < 7n01

INFO - Calculated averages can be either ‘flow weighted’ or ‘time weighted depending upon point number.

Notes:

3

< 7n02

Flowrate - Net 3

Bbl or m /hr.

Flowrate - Mass Klb or ton/hr.

< 7n04

Flowrate - NSV 3

Bbl or m /hr.

*

7n05

Temperature

*

7n06

Pressure

*

7n07

Density 3

3

Lb/ft or kg/m . Indicates calculated propylene/ethylene density.

*

7n08

*

7n09

Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring Temperature and pressure corrected.

< Current live values which are updated every 500msec.

Flowrate - Gross Bbl or m /hr.

< 7n03 INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run number.

Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring 7n09=7n08 x 7n43.

* Current values in use now.

*

7n10

Density Transducer Temperature Corrects for transducer expansion effects.

*

7n11

Density Transducer Pressure Information only! Transducer unaffected by pressure.

*

7n12

API Flowing

*

7n13

API @ 60 °F / API @ Reference Temperature

*

7n14

Specific Gravity Flowing

*

7n15

Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ 15 °C

*

7n16

VCF

*

7n17

Volume Correction Factor.

CPL Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquids.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-3

Chapter 5



Notes:

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) 7n18

Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature

7n19

Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure

7n20

Batch In Progress - Average of Density Flowing

7n21

Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n22

Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n23

Batch In Progress - Average API Flowing

7n24

Batch In Progress - Average API @ 60 °F / API @ Reference Temperature

7n25

Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Specific Gravity

7n26

Batch In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

7n27

Batch In Progress - Average VCF

7n28

Batch In Progress - Average CPL

7n29

Day In Progress - Average Temperature

7n30

Day In Progress - Average Pressure

7n31

Day In Progress - Average Density Flowing

7n32

Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n33

Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n34

Day In Progress - Average API Flowing

7n35

Day In Progress - Average API @ 60 °F / API @ Reference Temperature

7n36

Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity Flowing

7n37

Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

* Current values in use now.

~ The data in these variables may be calculated real time or the same data as entered elsewhere depending on the fluid type selected or the equation of state selected.

5-4

* ~ 7n38

Day In Progress - Average, VCF

* ~ 7n39

Day In Progress - Average, CPL

* ~ 7n40

Current K Factor

7n41

Weighted Average K Factor - Batch Flow

7n42

Weighted Average K Factor - Daily Flow

7n43

Density - Factor in Use

7n44

Density - Factor B

7n45

Z Factor of Carbon Dioxide

7n46

Current Viscosity CST


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 7n47

Coefficient b Viscosity coefficients used with helical or turbine meters.


7n48

Coefficient a

7n49

LCF Linear Correction Factor.

INFO - The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run number.

7n50

Coefficient c

7n51

Coefficient d

7n52

Coefficient e

7n53

Coefficient f

7n54

Coefficient g

7n55

Spare

to 7n60

Spare

Note:

#

7n61

Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low Limit

#

#

7n62

Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - High Limit

7n63

Meter Temperature - Low Limit

7n64

Meter Temperature - High Limit

7n65

Meter Temperature - Override

7n66

Meter Temperature - @ 4mA

7n67

Meter Temperature - @ 20mA

7n68

Meter Pressure - Low Limit

Indicates meter run gross or mass flow rate depending on which unit is selected

to 7n72

Meter Pressure - @ 20mA

7n73

Gravity / Density Transducer - Low Limit Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.

to 7n77

Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA

7n78

Density Transducer Temperature - Low Limit

to 7n82

Density Transducer Temperature - @ 20mA

7n83

Density Transducer Pressure - Low Limit

to 7n87

Density Transducer Pressure - @ 20mA

7n88

Density Transducer - Correction Factor Used to correct densitometer.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-5

Chapter 5

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) *


Densitometer - Constant #1 K0/D0.

*

7n90

*

7n91

Densitometer - Constant #2

*

7n92


*

7n93


*

7n94

*

7n95

K1/T0.

Densitometer - Constant #3 K2/Tcoef. K18/Tcal/Tc. K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

Densitometer - Constant #6 K20A/Pcal/Kt2.

Densitometer - Constant #7 K20B/Kt3.

*

7n96

Densitometer - Constant #8 K21A/Pc.

* Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

7n89

7n97

Densitometer - Constant #9 K21B/Kp1.

*

7n98

Densitometer - Constant #10 Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)

*

7n99

Densitometer - Constant #11 Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)

Note:

* Various factors used by various vendors of digital densitometers.

5.5.

Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.

7501

Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1

to 7599

5-6

Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

#

7601

PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value

*

7602

PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use

~ 7603

PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value

^ 7604

PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent

< 7605

PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint

#

7606


Notes:

*

7607


# Do not write to these

~ 7608


^ 7609


< 7610


#

7611


*

7612


variables. They are provided for read only information.

* Writing to these variables will have no effect as the flow computer overwrites these values with either the remote or local primary Setpoint value depending on the operating mode of the control loop.

~ 7613


^ 7614


< 7615


#

7616


*

7617


~ Only writes made while in the 'Remote' mode will be meaningful. These variables are overwritten with the current value of the primary controlled variable when in all other modes.

^ Only writes made while in the 'Manual' mode will be meaningful. These variables are overwritten by the flow computer in all other operating modes.

< Writes to these variables are always accepted.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

~ 7618


^ 7619


< 7620


7621 Spare to 7623 Spare


5-7

Chapter 5



7624

Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #1 Psig/kPa (current live values).

7625

Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #2 Psig or kPa.

7626


7627



7628

Psig or kPa.

7629

Vapor Pressure @ 100 °F - Meter Run #1 Current live values.

7630

Vapor Pressure @ 100 °F - Meter Run #2

7631


7632


7633

Vapor Pressure @ 100 °F - Prover

#

7634

Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze Command

#

7635

Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

#

7636

Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command

7637

Spare

See 1760 command.


INFO - See 7n01 through 7n99 for more meter run related data.

Equilibrium Pressure - Prover

to 7639

Spare

*

7640

Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment

*

7641

Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume

*

7642

Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment

*

7643

Meter Run #1 - NSV Increment

#

7644

Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command

#

7645

Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command

#

7646

Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

7647

Spare

to 7649

5-8

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



INFO - See 7n01 through 7n99 for more meter run related data.

*

7650


*

7651

Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment

*

7652


*

7653


#

7654


#

7655


#

7656


7657

Spare

to 7659

Spare

*

7660


*

7661


*

7662


*

7663


#

7664


#

7665


#

7666


7667

Spare

Notes:

* These variables represent the incremental flow which is accumulated each 500 msec. calculation cycle in float format (also see points 5n70 for integer format).

to 7669

Spare

*

7670


*

7671


*

7672


*

7673


#

7674

Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command

#

7675

Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command

#

7676

Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

7677

Spare

# Flowing variables are snapshot and stored here when the Leak Detection Freeze command (1760) is received (also see points 5n66).

to 7679

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


5-9

Chapter 5


32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) *

7680

Station - Gross Volume Increment

*

7681

Station - Net Volume Increment

*

7682

Station - Mass Volume Increment

*

7683

Station - NSV Volume Increment

7684

Spare

to 7698

Spare

Notes:

* These variables represent the incremental flow which is accumulated each 500 msec. calculation cycle in float format (also see points 5n70 for integer format).

7699

2nd Reference Temperature Other than 60°F or 15°C.

5.8.

Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available as a floating point variable point. INFO - The data is only meaningful when the input channel is used as an analog input or a Honeywell digital transducer input. For pulse type input channels see data points located at 15131 through 15154.

7701

Process Input - Channel # 1

to 7724

Process Input - Channel # 24

7725

Spare

to

5-10

7782

Spare

7783

Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #1

7784


7785


7786


7787


7788


7789


7790


7791

Batch Preset Warning - Meter #1

7792


7793


7794


7795

Batch Preset Warning - Station


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


7796

Meter Factor - Meter #1

7797


7798


7799


5.9.

7801

Station - Gross Flowrate 3

Bbl or m /hr.

7802

Station - Net Flowrate 3

Bbl or m /hr.

7803 Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Station - Mass Flowrate Klbs/hr.

7804

Station - NSV Flowrate 3

Bbl or m /hr.

7805

Gravity/Density

7806

Density Temperature

7807

Density Pressure

7808

Spare

7809

Auxiliary Input #1 Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined functions.

7810

Auxiliary Input #2

7811

Auxiliary Input #3

7812

Auxiliary Input #4

7813

Time - hhmmss Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

7814

Date - yymmdd Read only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used here does not follow the US/European format selection).

7815

Spare

to 7820

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


5-11

Chapter 5


5-12

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) 7821

Product #1 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient

7822

Product #1 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density

7823


7824


7825


7826


7827


7828


7829


7830


7831


7832


7833


7834


7835


7836


7837


7838


7839


7840


7841


7842


7843


7844


7845


7846


7847


7848


7849


7850



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 7851


7852


7853

Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low Limit Indicates flow rate low limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.


7854

Gross/Mass Flowrate - High Limit Indicates flow rate high limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.

7855

Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Decreasing Flow

7856

Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Increasing Flow

7857

Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #2 - Decreasing Flow

See 1824.

See 1825.

7858


7859

Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #3 - Decreasing Flow See 1826.

7860


7861

Station - Pressure - Low Limit Points 7861-7865 are configuration settings used when the pressure is a live 4-20 mA.


7862

Station - Pressure - High Limit

7863

Station - Pressure - Override

7864

Station - Pressure - @ 4mA

7865

Station - Pressure - @ 20mA

7866

Station - Gravity/Density - Low Limit Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20 mA.

7867

Station - Gravity/Density - High Limit

7868

Station - Gravity/Density - Override

7869

Station - Gravity/Density - @ 4mA

7870

Station - Gravity/Density - @ 20mA

7871

Station - Density Temperature - Low Limit Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20 mA.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

7872

Station - Density Temperature - High Limit

7873

Station - Density Temperature - Override

7874

Station - Density Temperature - @ 4mA

7875

Station - Density Temperature - @ 20mA


5-13

Chapter 5



Station - Density Correction Factor

*

7877

Station - Densitometer - Constant #1

*

7878

*

7879

K0/D0.

Station - Densitometer - Constant #2 K1/T0.

Station - Densitometer - Constant #3 K2/Tcoef.

*

7880

Station - Densitometer - Constant #4 K18/Tcal/Tc.

*

7881

Station - Densitometer - Constant #5 K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

*

7882

Station - Densitometer - Constant #6 K20A/Pcal/Kt2.

Notes:

*

7883

*

7884

various vendors of digital densitometers.

# Miscellaneous conversion

*

7885

factors and constants.

*

7886

*

7887

Station - Densitometer - Constant #7 K20B/Kt3.

* Various factors used by

Station - Densitometer - Constant #8 K21A/Pc.

Station - Densitometer - Constant #9 K21B/KP1.

Station - Densitometer - Constant #10 Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)

Station - Densitometer - Constant #11 Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)

#

7888

Weight of Water 3

Lbm/Bbl or Kg/m .

#

7889

Gravity Rate of Change

#

7890

Line Pack Delay 3

Net Bbl or m .

#

7891

Local Atmospheric Pressure

#

7892

Contract Base Temperature

#

7893

Kg/m3 to lb/ft3

#

7894

Contract Base Pressure

7895

Spare

7896

Auto Prove Mode - Startup Flow

7897

Auto Prove Mode - Maximum Flow between Proves

7898

Auto Prove Mode - Minimum Flow Rate Change

7899

Auto Prove Mode - Delta Flow Rate Flow rate unstable check.

5-14


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


7901

Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature

7902

Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature

7903

Prover - Temperature in Use

7904

Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure

7905

Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure

7906

Prover - Pressure in Use

7907

Prover - Plenum Pressure Compact Prover.

7908

Prover - Run Time

7909

Volume - Master Prove

7910

Volume - Test Meter

7911

Calculated Plenum Pressure

7912

Prover - Density/Gravity

7913

Prover - Density Temperature

7914

Prover - Density Pressure

7915

Prover - Uncorrected Density

7916

Prover - Density

7917

Invar Rod Temperature Small Volume Prover.

7918

Overtravel 3

Bbls/m .

5.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover 7919

Prover - Volume 3

Bbls/m .

7920

Prover - Diameter Inches/mm.

7921

Prover - Wall Thickness Inches/mm.

7922

Prover - Modulus of Elasticity

7923

Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion

7924

Prover - Base Pressure

7925

Prover - Temperature Stability Limits

7926

Prove & Meter - Temperature Deviation

7927

Prover - Count Deviation % [(Maximum Deviation - Minimum Deviation) / Minimum Deviation] x 100%.

7928

Prover - Acceptable Meter Factor Deviation % [(New Meter Factor - Previous Meter Factor) / Previous Meter Factor] x 100%.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-15

Chapter 5



Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

7930

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - High Limit

7931

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Override

7932

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 4mA

7933

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA

7934

Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Low Limit

to 7938

Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA

7939

Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

to 7943

Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA

7944

Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - Low Limit

to

5-16

7948

Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA

7949

Flow Rate % Change Threshold

7950

Linear Thermal Coefficient

7951

Plenum Pressure - Constant

7952

Plenum - Deadband %

7953

Plenum Pressure - @ 4mA

7954

Plenum Pressure - @ 20mA

7955

Prover - Volume Upstream

7956

Prover - Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Meter Factor

7957

Prover - Temperature @ Meter Factor

7958

Prover - Pressure @ Meter Factor


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

5.10.2. Last Prove Data INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

7959

Prover - Volume

7960

Prover - Diameter Inches/mm.

7961

Prover - Wall Thickness Inches/mm.

7962

Prover - Modulus of Elasticity

7963

Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion

7964

Prover - K Factor

7965

Prover - Master Meter K Factor

7966

Prover - Previous Meter Factor @ Flowrate

5.10.3. Data Rejected During Prove Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each IEEE float point counts as 2 registers. The starting address of the variable still applies.

The following refers to the data rejected during Prove Run #3. The same data is available for the Last, 1st and 2nd Prove Runs at the following addresses: 7967

3rd Run - Meter Temperature

7968

3rd Run - Meter Pressure

7969

3rd Run - Prover Temperature

7970

3rd Run - Prover Pressure

7971

3rd Run - Reference Gravity

7972

3rd Run - Flowrate

7973

2nd Run - Meter Temperature

to 7978

2nd Run - Flowrate

7979

1 Run - Meter Temperature

st

to st

7984

1 Run - Flowrate

7985

Last Run - Meter Temperature

to 7990

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Last Run - Flowrate


5-17

Chapter 5


5.10.4. Prove Run Data Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

The following data refers to Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses: 7991

1st Run - Meter Temperature

7992

1st Run - Meter Pressure

7993

1st Run - Prover Temperature

7994

1st Run - Prover Pressure

7995

1st Run - Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

7996

1st Run - Flowrate

7997

2nd Run - Meter Temperature

to 8002

2nd Run - Flowrate

8003

3rd Run - Meter Temperature

to 8008

3rd Run - Flowrate

8009

4th Run - Meter Temperature

to 8014

4th Run - Flowrate

8015


to 8020

5th Run - Flowrate

8021


to th

8026

6 Run - Flowrate

8027


to th

8032

7 Run - Flowrate

8033


th

to 8038

5-18

8th Run - Flowrate


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 8039 INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.



to 8044

9th Run - Flowrate

8045


to 8050

10th Run - Flowrate

5.10.5. Prove Average Data 8051

Prove - Average Counts

8052

Prove - Average Meter Temperature

8053

Prove - Average Meter Pressure

8054

Prove - Average Prover Temperature

8055

Prove - Average Prover Pressure

8056

Prove - Average SG @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8057

Prove - Average Flowrate

8058

Prove - % Deviation Between Runs

8059

Prove - CTSP Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.

8060

Prove - CPSP Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.

8061

Prove - CTLP Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8062

Prove - CPLP Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8063

Prove - CCFP Prover Combined Correction Factor.

8064

Prove - Corrected Prover Volume Base Volume of Prover x [8063].

8065

Prove - Metered Volume

8066

Prove - CTLM Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8067

Prove - CPLM Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8068

Prove - CCFM Meter Combined Correction Factor.

8069

Prove - Corrected Meter Volume

8070

Prove - Average Counts multiplied by Linear Correction Factor

8071

Prove - Meter Factor Deviation % from Previous Meter Factor

8072

Prove - Actual K Factor

8073

Prove - Average Flowmeter Hertz

8074

Prove - Prover Compressibility F Factor

Meter Volume [8065] x [8068].

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-19

Chapter 5



Prove - Meter Compressibility F Factor

8076

Prove - Average Observed Density

8077

Prove - Average SG @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8078

Prove - Average Linear Correction Factor

8079

Prove - Average Viscosity

5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter Data The following data refers to Master Meter Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses: 8080

1st Run - Master Meter - Volume -

8081

1st Run - Master Meter - Meter Factor

8082

1st Run - Master Meter - CTL

8083

1st Run - Master Meter - CPL

8084

1st Run - Master meter - CCF

8085

1st Run - Master Meter - Corrected Volume

8086

1st Run - Proved Meter - Volume

8087

1st Run - Proved Meter - CTL

8088

1st Run - Proved Meter - CPL

8089

1st Run - Proved Meter - CCF

8090

1st Run - Corrected Meter Volume

8091

1st Run - Meter Factor

8092

2nd Run - Master Meter - Volume

to 8103

2nd Run - Meter Factor

8104

3rd Run - Master Meter - Volume

to 8115

3rd Run - Meter Factor

8116

4 Run - Master Meter - Volume

th

to th

8127

4 Run - Meter Factor

8128

5th Run - Master Meter - Volume

to 8139

5-20

th



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 8140 INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.



to 8151

6th Run - Meter Factor

8152


to 8163


8164


to 8175


8176


to 8187


8188


to 8199


5.10.7. Proving Series Data Note:

> 8200

Series #1 - Average Counts

>

> 8201

Series #1 - Average Meter Temperature

> 8202

Series #1 - Average Meter Pressure

> 8203

Series #1 - Average Prover Temperature

> 8204

Series #1 - Average Prover pressure

> 8205

Series #1 - Average Gravity @ 60 °F or Reference Temperature

> 8206

Series #1 - Average Flowrate

> 8207

Series #1 - CTSP

> 8208

Series #1 - CPSP

> 8209

Series #1 - CTLP

> 8210

Series #1 - CPLP

> 8211

Series #1 - Average Net Prover Volume

> 8212

Series #1 - CTLM

> 8213

Series #1 - CPLM

> 8214

Series #1 - Average Gross Meter Volume

> 8215

Series #1 - Net Meter Volume

Applies only to Revision 20 for US customary units

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-21

Chapter 5


Notes:

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) > 8216

Series #1 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure

> 8217

Series #2 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure

> 8218

Series #1 - Meter Factor

> 8219

Series #2 - Meter Factor

>* 8220

Proving Meter - Gravity

>* 8221

Proving Meter - Density Temperature

>* 8222

Proving Meter - API @ 60 °F / API

>* 8223

Proving meter - Specific Gravity @ 60 °F

>

Applies only to Revision 20 for US customary units. * Points 8220-8223 are only for Exxon’s Prover Report.

5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved 8224

Temperature

8225

Pressure

8226

Flowrate

8227

Transducer Density

8228

Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8229

API @ 60 °F / API @ Reference Temperature

8230

Gross Flowrate

5.10.9. Mass Prove Data The following data refers to Mass Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses: 8231

1st Run - Prover Temperature

8232

1st Run - Prover Pressure

8233

1st Run - Prover Density or Linear Viscosity

8234


8235

1st Run - Meter Pressure

8236

1 Run - Meter Density

8237

1 Run - Meter Density @ Reference Temperature

8238

1st Run - CTLP

st

st st

Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8239

1st Run - CPLP Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8240

st

1 Run - CTLM Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8241

st

1 Run - CPLM Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8242

1st Run - CTSP or LCF Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.

8243

st

1 Run - CPSP Correction factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.

5-22


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



8244

1st Run - Prove Volume

8245

1st Run - Prove Mass

8246

1st Run - Meter Mass

8247

1st Run - Meter Factor

8248

2nd Run - Prover Temperature

to 8264

2nd Run - Meter Factor

8265

3rd Run - Prover Temperature

to 8281

3rd Run - Meter Factor

8282

4th Run - Prover Temperature

to 8298


8299


to 8315


8316


to 8332


8333


to 8349


8350


to th

8366


8367


to 8383


8384

10 Run - Prover Temperature

th

to 8400

th


8401 Linear Meter Volume 8402 Linear Corrected Meter Volume

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-23

Chapter 5

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999) 8403 Spare


Note: See 5n50 and 5850 for matching totalizer data.

to 8500 Spare

5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: o o o o

Meter Run #1 Meter Run #2 Meter Run #3 Meter Run #4

@ @ @ @

8501 8601 8701 8801

through through through through

8599 8699 8799 8899

5.11.1. Previous Batch Average

Previous Batch Average Refers to data stored at the time of the last Batch End command. It will remain valid until the next batch end. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs to build Monthly or Batch Reports.

5-24

8501

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Temperature

8502

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Pressure

8503

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density

8504

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average VCF

8505

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average CPL

8506

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Meter factor

8507

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity

8508

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average SG @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8509

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Temperature

8510

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Pressure

8511

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Correction Factor

8512

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Unfactored Density

8513

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average K Factor

8514

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Viscosity

8515

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Linear Correction Factor

8516

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Gross Flowrate

8517

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average %S&W

8518

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8519

Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API @ 60 °F


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

5.11.2. Previous Hour’s Average INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

8520

Previous Hours - Average Temperature

8521

Previous Hours - Average Pressure

8522

Previous Hours - Average Density

8523

Previous Hours - Average Specific Gravity @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8524

Previous Hours - Average K Factor

8525

Previous Hours - Average Meter Factor

8526

Previous Hours - Average %S&W

8527

Spare

to 8530


Previous Hour’s Average Refers to data stored at the end of the last hour. It is valid for one hour and is then overwritten. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs which need hourly averages.

Previous Day’s Average Refers to data stored at the end of the contract day. It is valid for 24 hours and overwritten at the ‘day start hour’. This is the data that should be used by SCADA or MMIs to build daily reports.

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare

5.11.3. Previous Day’s Average 8531

Previous Day’s - Average Temperature

8532

Previous Day’s - Average Pressure

8533

Previous Day’s - Average Density

8534

Previous Day’s - Average VCF

8535

Previous Day’s - Average CPL

8536

Previous Day’s - Average Meter Factor

8537

Previous Day’s - Average Specific Gravity

8538

Previous Day’s - Average SG 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8539

Previous Day’s - Average Density Temperature

8540

Previous Day’s - Average Density Pressures

8541

Previous Day’s - Average Density Correction Factor

8542

Previous Day’s - Average Unfactored density

8543

Previous Day’s - Average K Factor

8544

Previous Day’s - Average Viscosity

8545

Previous Day’s - Average Linear Correction Factor

8546

Previous Day’s - Average Gross Flowrate

8547

Previous Day’s - Average %S&W

8548

Previous Day’s - Average Equilibrium Pressure


5-25

Chapter 5


Previous Day’s - Gross in Float Format 3


INFO - The indicated data (8501-8599) refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: Meter Run #1: 8501 through 8599 Meter Run #2: 8601 through 8699 Meter Run #3: 8701 through 8799 Meter Run #4: 8801 through 8899

Note: See 5n50 and 5850 for matching totalizer data.

Bbl/m .

8550

Previous Day’s - Net in Float Format 3

Bbl/m .

8551

Previous Day’s - Mass in Float Format Klb/ton.

8552

Previous Day’s - NSV in Float Format 3

Bbl/m .

8553

Previous Day’s - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature in Float Format

8554

Spare

to 8555

Spare

5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs 8556

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature

8557

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure

8558

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density

8559

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature

8560

Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure

5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages 8561

In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Batch Average

8562

In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Daily Average

8563

In Progress - Unfactored Density - Hourly Average

8564

In Progress - Unfactored Density - Daily Average

8565

Spare

8566

Spare

5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data Notes:

> 8567

VCF @ 15 °C

>

> 8568

VCF @ Reference Temperature

> 8569

Density @ Reference Temperature


5-26


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.


8570

In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature

8571

In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure

8572

In Progress - Hourly Average - Density

8573

In Progress - Hourly Average - Specific Gravity @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8574

In Progress - Hourly Average - K Factor

8575

In Progress - Hourly Average - Meter Factor

8576

In Progress - Hourly Average - %S&W

8577

In Progress - Batch Average - Viscosity

8578

In Progress - Batch Average - Linear Correction Factor

8579

In Progress - Batch Average - Gross Flowrate

8580

In Progress - Daily Average - Viscosity

8581

In Progress - Daily Average - Linear Correction Factor

8582

In Progress - Daily Average - Gross Flowrate

8583

In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W

8584

In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W

8585

Spare

5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities Previous Batch Quantities - Refers to data stored at the time of the last ‘Batch End’ command. It will remain valid until the next batch end. These variables are floating point duplicates of integer data at 5n50 area. These points are for MMI or SCADA retrieval, not for Batch Recalculation.

8586

Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8587

Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8588

Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

8589

Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format

8590

Previous Batch - Net @ 2

nd


Note: See 8501 area for other Previous Batch data.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


5-27

Chapter 5


5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - The indicated data (8501-8599) refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all meter runs at the following addresses: Meter Run #1: 8501 through 8599 Meter Run #2: 8601 through 8699 Meter Run #3: 8701 through 8799 Meter Run #4: 8801 through 8899

> 8591

Specific Gravity @ 60°°F Calculated Specific Gravity @ 60°F using Table 23B when Table 24C is selected.

8592

Spare

8593

Spare

8594

Meter Density

8595

Spare

8596

Spare

8597

Meter Current - %S&W

8598

Meter Current - CSW

8599

Meter Current - VCF @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data

Notes:

8901

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Temperature

>

8902

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Pressure

8903

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density

8904

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average VCF

8905

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average CPL

8906

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Meter Factor

8907

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity

8908

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature


8909

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Temperature

8910

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Pressure

8911

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Correction Factor

8912

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Unfactored Density

8913

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average K Factor

8914

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Viscosity

8915

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Linear Correction Factor

8916

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Gross Flowrate

8917

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average %S&W

8918

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8919

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API @ 60 °F

8920

Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API

8921

Spare

to 8930

5-28

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4



8931

Station - Previous Daily - Average Temperature

8932

Station - Previous Daily - Average Pressure

8933

Station - Previous Daily - Average Density

8934

Station - Previous Daily - Average VCF

8935

Station - Previous Daily - Average CPL

8936

Station - Previous Daily - Average Meter Factor

8937

Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity

8938

Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8939

Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Temperature

8940

Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Pressure

8941

Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Correction factor

8942

Station - Previous Daily - Average Unfactored Density

8943

Station - Previous Daily - Average K Factor

8944

Station - Previous Daily - Average Viscosity

8945

Station - Previous Daily - Average Linear Correction Factor

8946

Station - Previous Daily - Average Gross Flowrate

8947

Station - Previous Daily - Average %S&W

8948

Station - Previous Daily - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8949

Station - Previous Daily - Gross in Float Format

8950

Station - Previous Daily - Net in Float Format

8951

Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format

8952

Station - Previous Daily - NSV in Float Format

8953

Station - Previous Daily - 2nd Net @ Reference Temperature in Float Format

8954

Station - Previous Daily Average - API

8955

Station - Previous Daily Average - API @ 60 °F

8956

Spare

to 8960

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


5-29

Chapter 5



Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Temperature

8962

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Pressure

8963

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density

8964

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - VCF

8965

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - CPL

8966

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Meter Factor

8967

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Specific Gravity

8968

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - SG60 / Dens @ Ref

8969

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Temp

8970

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Pressure

8971

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Dens Corr Factor

8972

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Unfactored Density

8973

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - K Factor

8974

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Viscosity

8975

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - LCF

8976

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Gross Flowrate

8977

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - %S&W

8978

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Equilibrium Pressure

8979

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API60

8980

Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API

8981

Spare

to 8985

Spare

8986

Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8987

Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8988

Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

8989

Station - Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format

8990

Station - Previous Batch - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

8991

Spare

to 8999

5-30

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) 6.1. Application Revision 20/24.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revision 20/24.71+ for Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems, with K Factor Linearization. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - These ASCII text buffers are accessed using Modbus function codes 65 for reads and 66 for writes. The index number for each 9000 type variable refers to the complete text buffer which may be as big as 8192 bytes. Data is transmitted or received as multiple transmissions of 128 byte packets (see Chapter 6)

Custom Report Templates

These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed reports. 9001

Report Template - Snapshot / Interval

9002

Report Template - Batch

9003

Report Template - Daily

9004

Report Template - Prove

9005

Spare

to 9100

6.2.

Spare

Previous Batch Reports

Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored. 9101

Batch Report - Last

9102

Batch Report - 2nd Last

9103

Batch Report - 3rd Last

9104

Batch Report - 4th Last

9105


9106

Batch Report - 6 Last

9107

Batch Report - 7 Last

9108


9109

Spare

th th

to 9200

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


6-1

Chapter 6

ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)

6.3. INFO - These ASCII text buffers are accessed using Modbus function codes 65 for reads and 66 for writes. The index number for each 9000 type variable refers to the complete text buffer which may be as big as 8192 bytes. Data is transmitted or received as multiple transmissions of 128 byte packets (see Chapter 6)

Previous Prove Reports

Copies of the last 8 Prove Reports are stores 9201

Prove Report - Last

9202

Prove Report - 2nd Last

9203

Prove Report - 3rd Last

9204

Prove Report - 4th Last

9205


9206


9207


9208


9209

Spare

to 9300

6.4.

Spare

Previous Daily Reports

Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores 9301

Previous Day’s Report - Last

9302

Previous Day’s Report - 2nd Last

9303

Previous Day’s Report - 3rd Last

9304

Previous Day’s Report - 4th Last

9305


9306


9307


9308


9309

Spare

to 9400

6.5. 9401

6-2

Spare

Last Snapshot Report Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


Miscellaneous Report Buffer

The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129. Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are: o o o o o

Current Snapshot Report Alarm Report Audit Trail Report Status Report Product File Report

Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using this buffer. 9402

Miscellaneous Report Buffer

9403

Spare

to 13000

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


6-3


Volume 4

7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 18999) ‹

CAUTION!

‹

Flow computer configuration data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni Flow Computers, Inc. before manipulating configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable statements.



The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable statements.

7.1.

7.1.1.

Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data Meter Run Configuration Data

13001

Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point

13002

Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point

13003

Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13004

Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point

13005

Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point

13006

Meter Run #1 - Density Type 1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

13007

Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point

13008

Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13009

Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point

13010

Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions 0=Flowing; 1=Reference.

13011

Spare

13012

Spare

13013

Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity 0=No; 1=Yes.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


7-1

Chapter 7

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999) 13014

‹

CAUTION!

‹




to 13023

Meter Run #2 - Density @ Reference Conditions

13024

Spare

13025

Spare

13026

Meter Run #2 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity

13027


to 13036


13037

Spare

13038

Spare

13039


13040


to

7-2

13049


13050

Spare

13051

Spare

13052



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

7.1.2.

Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13053

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - I/O Point

13054

Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13055

Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - I/O Point

13056

Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13057

Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - I/O Point

13058

Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - I/O Point

13059

Prover - Plenum Pressure - I/O Point

13060

Prover - Density Temperature - I/O Point

13061

Prover - Density Temperature - Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13062

Prover - Density Pressure - I/O Point

13063

Gravity Sample Time Seconds.

13064

Station - Pressure - I/O Point

13065

Station - Density - I/O Point

13066

Station - Density - Type 1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

13067

Station - Density Temperature - I/O Point

13068

Station - Density Temperature - Type 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13069

Prover - Density - I/O Point

13070

Prover - Density - Type 1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

Notes:

<

< 13071

Select Pressure Unit 2

0=kpa; 1=Bar; 2= kg/cm .


20/24.71+ w 04/98

13072

Spare

13073

Spare


7-3

Chapter 7

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)


13074

General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data Flow Computer Type 0=3000; 1=6000.

13075

Number of A Combo Modules Installed

13076

Number of B Combo Modules Installed

13077

Number of C Combo Modules Installed

13078

Number of Digital Modules Installed

13079

Number of Serial Modules Installed

13080

Number of E Combo Modules Installed

13081

Number of H Combo Modules Installed

13082

Number of ED Combo Modules Installed

13083

Spare

13084

Spare

7.1.4. 13085

Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data Serial Port #1 - Port Type 0=Printer; 1=Modbus.

13086

Serial Port #1 - ID Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.

13087

Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate 1200-38400 bps.

13088

Serial Port #1 - Data Bits 7 or 8.

13089

Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits 0, 1 or 2.

13090

Serial Port #1 - Parity O, E, N.

13091

Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay 0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.

13092

Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID 0-247.

13093

Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type 0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem.

13094

Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking 0=No CRC, 1=CRC check.

13095

Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.

7-4


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

‹

CAUTION!

‹



13096

Serial Port #2 - Baud Rate

13097

Serial Port #2 - Data Bits

13098

Serial Port #2 - Stop Bits

13099

Serial Port #2 - Parity

13100

Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay

13101

Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID

13102

Serial Port #2 - Modbus Mode RTU / ASCII

13103

Serial Port #2 - Enable CRC Checking

13104

Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.

13105

Spare

to 13107

Spare

13108


13109


13110


13111


13112

Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay

13113

Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID

13114

Serial Port #3 - Protocol Type 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).

13115


13116

Serial Port #3 - Modicon  Compatible 0=Omni; 1=984 compatible.

13117

Spare

to 13119

Spare

13120


13121


13122


13123


13124

Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay

13125


13126

Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID

13127

Serial Port #4 - Protocol Type 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=AllenBradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.

13128

Serial Port #4 - Modicon Compatible 0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above: 0=CRC; 1=BCC error checking.

20/24.71+ w 04/98


7-5

Chapter 7



Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13129

PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint

13130

PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable

13131

PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable

13132

PID Loop #1 - Primary Action 0=Forward; 1=Reverse.

13133

PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action 0=Forward; 1=Reverse.

13134

PID Loop #1 - Error Select 0=Low; 1=High.

13135

PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode 0=Last state; 1=Manual.

13136


to 13142

PID Loop #2 - Startup Mode

13143


to 13149


13150


to

7-6

13156


13157

I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1

13158


13159


13160



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

7.1.6. ‹

CAUTION!

Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16Bit Integer Data

‹



13161

PLC Group #1 - Starting Address Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.

13162

PLC Group #1 - Index 1

13163

PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1

13164


13165


13166


13167


13168


13169


13170


13171


13172


13173


13174


13175


13176


13177


13178


13179


13180


13181


13182


13183


13184


13185


13186


13187


13188


13189


13190


13191


13192


13193


13194

PLC Group #2 - Starting Address

13195


to

20/24.71+ w 04/98

13225


13226



7-7

Chapter 7




13228


to 13258


13259


13260


13261


to 13271


13272


13273


13274


to 13284


13285


13286

Spare

to 13288

Spare

13289

Mass Pulses - Meter #1 For points 13289-13292: 0=No; 1=Yes.

13290

Mass Pulses - Meter #2

13291


13292


13293

Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1 For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.

13294

Input Type - Auxiliary Input #2

13295


13296


13297

Spare

to 13299

7-8

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

7.1.7. ‹

CAUTION!

Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data

‹



13300

Current Master ID Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.

13301

Reserved Register Debug only.

13302

Transaction #1 - Slave ID

13303

Transaction #1 - Read / Write

13304

Transaction #1 - Source Index

13305

Transaction #1 - Number of Points

13306

Transaction #1 - Destination Index

13307


to 13311


13312


to 13316


13317


to 13321


13322


to 13326


13327


to 13331


13332


to 13336

20/24.71+ w 04/98



7-9

Chapter 7




to 13341


13342


to 13346


13347


to 13351


13352


to 13356


13357


to 13361


13362


to 13366


13367


to 13371


13372


to 13376


13377


to 13381

7-10



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 13382

‹

CAUTION!

‹



Next Master ID A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.

13383

Last Master ID In Sequence

13384

Retry Timer Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.

13385

Activate Redundancy Mode 0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.

13386

Number of Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer

13387

Spare

13388

Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

13389

Spare

13390

Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Batch Report

13391

Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Batch Report

13392

Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Prove Report

13393

Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Prove Report

13394

Spare

13395

Spare

13396

Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1

13397


13398


13399


13400

Spare

13401

Spare

13402

Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor

13403

Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor

13404

Meter Run #1 - Density Temp Damping Factor

13405

Meter Run #1 - Density Press Damping Factor

13406

Spare

13407

Spare

13408


to 13411

20/24.71+ w 04/98



7-11

Chapter 7



Spare

13413

Spare

13414


to 13417


13418

Spare

13419

Spare

13420


to 13423


13424

Damping Factor - Station - Density Temperature

13425

Damping Factor - Station - Density Pressure

13426

Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature

13427

Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature

13428

Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure

13429

Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure

13430

Damping Factor - Plenum Pressure

13431

Damping Factor - Prover - Density Temperature

13432

Damping Factor - Prover - Density Pressure

13433

Damping Factor - Auxiliary Input #1

13434


13435


13436


13437

Spare

to 13449

7-12

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

‹

CAUTION!

‹



13450

Insert Batch Stack - Meter #1

13451


13452


13453


13454

Insert Batch Stack - Station

13455

Delete Batch Stack - Meter #1

13456


13457


13458


13459

Delete Batch Stack - Station

13460

Remote Key Press

13461

Beep Counts

13462

Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode Slave keeps copy of primary unit’s settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes master.

13463

Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode

13464

Redundancy - Master PID #2 - Valve Mode

13465


13466


13467


13468


13469


13470

Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode

13471

Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode

13472


13473


13474


13475


13476


13477


13478

Spare

to 13499

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


7-13

Chapter 7



Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data

The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data Archive file:

13500

Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index

13501

Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points

to 13530


13531

Archive 701 #16 - Number of points

13540


13541


to 13570


13571


13580


13581


to 13610


13611


13620


13621


to 13650


13651


13652

Spare

to 13659

Spare

13660


13661


to

7-14

13690


13691



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

‹

CAUTION!

‹



13700


13701


to 13730


13731


13740


13741


to 13770


13771


13780


13781


to 13810


13811


13820


13821


to 13850


13851


13860


13861


to 13890


13891


13892

Spare

to 13899

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


7-15

Chapter 7



Trigger Boolean - Archive 701 Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the data to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.

13901

Trigger Boolean - Archive 702

13902


13903


13904


13905


13906


13907


13908


13909


13910

Spare

to 13919

‹*

CAUTION!

‹*

‹*13920

Spare

Archive Run ? 0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.

POTENTIAL FOR DATA LOSS! Read Archive documentation before manipulating points 13920 and 13921.

‹*13921

Reconfigure Archive? 0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.

13930

Archive 711 #1 Starting Index Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Alarm Archive.

13931

Archive 711 #1 Number of Points

to 13960

Archive 711 #16 Starting Index

13961


13962

Archive 712 #1 Starting Index Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Audit Trail.

13963


to 13992

Archive 712 #16 Starting Index

13993


13994

Spare

to 14000

7-16

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

7.2. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for reads, and 16 for writes. Note that the index number for each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of eight 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each string counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purposes of point count only, each string counts as 8 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

14001

Flow Computer Configuration 16Character ASCII String Data Boolean Statement #1025

to 14048

Boolean Statement #1072

14049

OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name

14050

OmniCom - Download PC ID

14051

Variable Statement #7025

to 14098


14099

Spare

14100

Station Total and Flowrate Definition

14101

Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025

to 14148

Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072

14149

Printer Condense Mode String Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent to the printer.

14150

Printer Uncondensed Mode String

14151

Comment String - Variable Statement #7025

to 14198


14199

Spare

to 14200

Spare

14201


to 14216

20/24.71+ w 04/98



7-17

Chapter 7


‹

CAUTION!

‹


INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for reads, and 16 for writes. Note that the index number for each string refers to the complete string which occupies the space of eight 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial string. Each string counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purposes of point count only, each string counts as 8 registers. The starting address of the string still applies.

Spare

to 14220

Spare

14221


to 14236


14237

Spare

to 14240

Spare

14241

Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073

to 14256

Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088

14257

Spare

to 14260

Spare

14261


to 14276


14277

Spare

to 14300

Spare

14301

Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1

to 14312

Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12

14321

Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1

to 14344

7-18

Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4


14360

Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable

14361

Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable

14362


14363


14364


14365


14366


14367


14380

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A

14381

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B

14382

Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C

14383

Spare

to 15000



15001

Spare

Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data Assign - Analog Output #1

to 15012

Assign - Analog Output #12

15013

Digital Point #1 - Assignment

15014

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On 100 msec ticks.

15015

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off 100 msec ticks.

15016

Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width 10 msec ticks.

15017


to 15020

Digital Point #2 - Timer - Pulse Width

15021


to

20/24.71+ w 04/98


7-19

Chapter 7

‹

CAUTION!


‹


INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

15024


15025


to 15028


15029


to 15032


15033


to 15036


15037


to 15040


15041


to 15044


15045



15048


15049


to 15052


15053


to 15056

7-20



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 15057


to


15060


15061


to 15064


15065


to 15068


15069


to 15072


15073


to 15076


15077


to 15080


15081


to 15084


15085


to 15088


15089


to 15092

20/24.71+ w 04/98



7-21

Chapter 7



to

‹

CAUTION!

‹


INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

15096


15097


to 15100


15101


(10msec Ticks)

to 15104


15105


to 15108


15109

Assign - Front Panel Counter A

15110

Assign - Front Panel Counter B

15111

Assign - Front Panel Counter C

15112

Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1 Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.

15113

Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #2

15114


15115


15116

Spare


15119

Spare

15120

Input / Output Status of Digital Points Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0). #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.

15121

Spare

15122

On/Off Status of Digital Points Real-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.

7-22


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

20/24.71+ w 04/98

15123

Prove Run Number

15124

Proving Meter Number

15125

Prove Counts


7-23

Chapter 7


32-Bit Packed Status Word Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).


LSB B0

Not Proving

B16

Flow Rate Unstable

B1

Overtravel Forward

B17

No Prove Permissive

B2

Launch Forward

B18

Prover Seal Not OK

B3

1 Detector

B19

Meter Not Active

B4

In Flight Forward

B20

Piston Downstream

B5

2 Detector

B21

Checking Plenum

B6

Overtravel Reverse

B22

Master Meter Proving

B7

Launch Reverse

B23

Check Stability Master Meter

B8

In Flight Reverse

B24

Spare

B9

Prove Aborted

B25

Spare

B10

Prove Complete

B26

Power Fail Flag

B11

Checking Stability

B27

End Batch #4

B12

Prover/Meter Temp Limits

B28

End Batch #3

B13

Prover Inactivity

B29

End Batch #2

B14

Bad Repeatability

B30

End Batch #1

B15

Prove Temperature Unstable

B31

End Batch Station

st

nd

MSB

15127

Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve Exclusively for OmniCom use.

15128

Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested Fix date format (YYDDMM).

15129

32-Bit Command Word #1 Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below). LSB B0

Prove Seal OK

B16

Trial Prove Meter #4

B1

End Batch Station

B17

Abort Prove in Progress

B2

End Batch Meter #1

B18

Send Snapshot to Printer

B3

End Batch Meter #2

B19

Load Snapshot to 9402

B4

End Batch Meter #3

B20

Load Alarms to 9402

B5

End Batch Meter #4

B21

Load Prod File to 9402

B6

Spare

B22

Load Status to 9402

B7

Request Prove Meter #1

B23

Load Audit Trail to 9402

B8


B24

Spare

B9


B25

Spare

B10


B26

Spare

B11

Alarm Acknowledge

B27

Spare

B12

Reset Power Fail Flag

B28

Spare

B13


B29

Spare

B14


B30

Spare

B15


B31

Spare

MSB

7-24


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 15129

‹

CAUTION!

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

‹


LSB

INFO - These 32-bit long integer variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to one complete long integer which occupies the space of two 16-bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial 32-bit integer. Each 32-bit long integer counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode. Modicon Compatible Mode - For the purpose of point count only, each 32-bit integer counts as two registers. The starting address of the 32-bit integer still applies.

32-Bit Command Word #2

B0

Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Rate

B16

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1% Rate

B1

Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Rate

B17

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1% Rate

B2

Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Rate

B18

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1% Rate

B3

Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Rate

B19

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1% Rate

B4


B20


B5


B21


B6


B22


B7


B23


B8


B24


B9


B25


B10


B26


B11


B27


B12


B28


B13


B29


B14


B30


B15


B31


MSB

15130

Spare

15131

Raw Process Input - Input #1 Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.

to 15154

Raw Process Input - Input #24

15155

Spare

to 15199

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Spare


7-25

Chapter 7

Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999) Archive Data File Size


Note:

* Archive Data File Size These variables contain the number of bytes each archive file uses within memory. They are updated when the archiving process is started and memory is allocated. The maximum memory that can be allocated to this group of variables is a total of 229359 bytes.

Information Only Data! *

15200

Size of Text - Archive File

*

15201

Size of Archive - File 701

*

15202


*

15203


*

15204


*

15205


*

15206


*

15207


*

15208


*

15209


*

15210


15211

Spare

15212

Spare

15213

Archive File ‘n’ Failed Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, this point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)

15214

Total Number of Archive Files Allocated

15215

Spare

to 17000

7-26

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

7.4.

‹

CAUTION!

17001

‹

Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 4mA Engineering units which equal to 0%.


17002

17048

Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24


17049

Pulses per Unit - Counter A

17050

Pulses per Unit - Counter B

17051

Pulses per Unit - Counter C

17052

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit


Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 20mA Engineering units which equal to 100%.

to 17023

Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 4mA

17024

Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 20mA

17025

Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1

to

#

Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.

#

17053

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.

#

17054

#

17055

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA Sets the zero of the controller.

PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA Sets the maximum span of the controller.

17056

PID #1 - Primary Gain

17057

PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute

#

17058

PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero

#

17059

PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale

17060

PID #1 - Secondary Gain

17061

PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute

17062

PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msec

Note:

# Input expected is

Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.

engineering units.

#

17063

PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint

17064

PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msec Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.

17065

PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp To Top-up valve % open.

17066

PID #1 - Deadband % No change in output if the % error is less than this

20/24.71+ w 04/98


7-27

Chapter 7




to 17081

PID #2 - Deadband %

17082


to 17096

PID #3 - Deadband %

17097


to 17111

17112

PID #4 - Deadband %

Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1 Read-only, Live Value.

to 17123

Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12 Read-only, Live Value.

17124

Spare

to 17135

Spare

17136

PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value

17137

PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value

17138

PID #1 - Control Output %

17139

PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value

17140

PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value

17141

Spare

to 17145

Spare

17146


to 17150

7-28



20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 17151

Spare

to

‹

CAUTION!

‹




20/24.71+ w 04/98

17155

Spare

17156


to 17160


17161

Spare

to 17165

Spare

17166


to 17170


17171

Spare

to 17175

Spare

17176

Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate

17177

Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate

Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142. Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.

17178

Spare

17179

Spare

17180


17181


17182

Spare

17183

Spare

17184


17185


17186

Spare

17187

Spare


7-29

Chapter 7




17189


17190

Spare

17191

Spare

17192

Station - Full Scale - Gross

17193

Station - Full Scale - Mass

(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804. Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.

17194

Not Use

to 17197

Not Use

17198

Alarm Deadband % 0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out of alarm for alarm to cancel.

17199

Spare

to 17202

Spare

17203

F Factor - Product #1

to 17218

Notes:

<


< 17219

F Factor - Product #16

Reference Temperature - Product #1

to < 17234

17235

Reference Temperature - Product #16

Spare

to 17259

7-30

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4

‹

CAUTION!

‹


17260

Prover - Density/Gravity - Low Limit

17261

Prover - Density/Gravity - High Limit

17262

Prover - Density/Gravity - Override

17263

Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 4mA

17264

Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 20mA

17265

Prover - Density Temperature - Low Limit

to 17269

Prover - Density Temperature - @ 20mA

17270

Prover - Density Pressure - Low Limit

to INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Floating Point variables are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for all reads, 06 for single writes or 16 for single or multiple writes. Note that the index number for each variable refers to the complete floating point variable which occupies the space of two 16- bit registers. It must be accessed as a complete unit. You cannot read or write a partial variable. Each floating point variable counts as one point in the normal Omni Modbus mode.

*

17274

Prover - Density Pressure - @ 20mA

17275

Prover - Density Correction Factor A

17276

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #1 K0/D0.

*

17277

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #2 K1/T0.

*

17278

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #3 K2/Tcoef.

*

17279

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #4

*

17280


*

17281


*

17282

*

17283

*

17284

K18/Tcal/Tc. K19/Pcoef/Kt1.


K20A/Pcal/Kt2. K20B/Kt3.

various vendors of digital densitometers.

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #8 K21A/Pc.

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #9 K21B/Kp1.

Note:

* Various factors used by


*

17285

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #10 Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/Kp2.)

*

17286

Prover - Densitometer - Constant #11 Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/Kp3.)

*

17287

Prover - Density Correction Factor B

17288

Reserved

to 17379

20/24.71+ w 04/98

Reserved


7-31

Chapter 7



Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit

17381

Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit

17382

Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value

17383

Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA

17384


17385


to 17389


17390


to 17394


17395


to 17399


17400

Spare

to 17500

Spare

17501

Meter #1 - K Factor #1 See 3122 for matching flow frequency entry.

17502

Meter #1 - K Factor #2

17503


17504


17505


17506


17507


17508


17509


17510


17511


17512


17513

Spare

to 17600

7-32

Spare


20/24.71+ w 04/98


Volume 4 17601

‹

CAUTION!


‹

to


17612


17613

Spare

to 17700

Spare

17701


to


17712


17713

Spare

to 17800

Spare

17801


to


17812


17813

Spare

to 17899

Spare

17900

Reserved

to

ð These addresses are reserved for product development.

Reserved

18175

Reserved

to

Note:

ð

18174

ð

20000

Reserved

ð

20001

Reserved

to

ð

20/24.71+ w 04/98

49999

Reserved


7-33

Volume 4d

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers 1815

Any System Alarm

1816

Any New System Alarm

Includes acknowledged alarms also.

Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Does not include acknowledged alarms.

1817

Batch End Acknowledge Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).

1818

Gas Chromatograph - Failure Gas chromatograph fatal error received.

1819

Gas Chromatograph - Mol% - Override in Use

1820

Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm

Mol% overrides in product area being used. Communication lost with gas chromatograph.

1821

Spare

to 1826

Spare

1827


Note:

#

1828

Day Start Flag

1829

Power Fail Flag

1830


True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).

# These points pulse high for one 500 msec cycle time.

True after power up (see 1713 for reset). Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ or jammed with paper.

#

1831

Hour Start Flag

#

1832

Week Start Flag True at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.

#

1833

Month Start Flag

#

1834

Year Start Flag

#

1835


#

1836

Snapshot Printed

True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month. True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January. Pulses at batch end (see 1817). Indicates snapshot report printed.

1837

EPROM Error Flag Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.

1838


1839

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare


1-11

Chapter 1


User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999) ~

1840

Boolean Statement Alarm

~

1841

Variable Statement Alarm

Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements. Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.

1842


to 1857


#

1858

Calendar Day Start Flag

#

1859

Calendar Week Start Flag

#

1860

Calendar Month Start Flag

Notes:


# These points pulse high

Format: 00:00:00. Format: 00:00:00 Monday. Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.

#

1861


Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

for one 500 msec. cycle time.

1862

Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed Low

1863

Reference Specific Gravity - Low Alarm

1864

Reference Specific Gravity - High Alarm

1865

Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed High

1866

Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed Low

to 1869

Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed High

1870

Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed Low

to 1873

Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed High

1874

Heating Value - Transducer Failed Low

to

*

1877

Heating Value - Transducer Failed High

1878

Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.

*

1879


*

1880


1-12

1881

Spare

1882

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d




1884


1885


1886


1887


to 1890


1891


Note:


to 1894


1895


to Note: See 2600 area and 2800 area for more station alarms and status points.

1898


1899

Spare

to 2000

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare


1-13

Chapter 1


1.3.9. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Note: The ‘In Progress’ flags are those which the flow computer uses when printing the reports on the connected printer. Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the report is being printed by another device such as a SCADA or MMI. This is necessary because the flow computer clears the ‘In Progress’ data immediately after it prints the local report.

1-14

Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions of these flags. 2n01


2n02

Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n03


2n04

Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n05


2n06

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n07


2n08

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n09


2n10

Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n11


2n12

Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n13


2n14

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n15


2n16

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17

Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n21

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24

Previous Batch - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n25


2n26

Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n27


2n28

Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers 2n29



2n30

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n40

Spare

2n41

Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag

2n42

Spare

2n31


2n32

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33

Spare

to


to 2n99

Spare

2500

Spare

to 2600

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare


1-15

Chapter 1


1.3.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

2601

Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1

2602


2603


2604


2605

Override in Use - Reference Specific Gravity

2606

Override in Use - % Nitrogen Transducer

2607

Override in Use - % Carbon Dioxide Transducer

2608

Override in Use - Heating Value Transducer

2620


2621

System Initialized Flag True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).

2622

Day Light Savings Time ‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623

Archive Memory Alarm 0=Ok; 1=Fail.

2624

Spare

to 2700

1-16

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers




2701


2702


2703


2704


2705


2706


2707


2708


2709


2710


2711


2712


1.3.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor the other.

2713

Others - Watchdog Status

2714

Others - Master Status

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863). Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).

2715

Assume Master Status Command

2716

Assume Slave Status Command

Set to take mastership. Edge triggered. Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.

23/27.71+ 05/98


1-17

Chapter 1


1.3.13. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube Switching Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube switching function. The command input points below are used to interface to motor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take an MOV ‘out of service’. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV open and close commands.

2717

Meter #1- MOV - Open Status Must be activated when the MOV is fully open.

INFO - To differentiate between normal message responses and unsolicited transmissions, Modbus function code 67 appears in the transmitted message rather than function code 03.

How the MOV Limit Switches are Interpreted 2717=On 2717=Off 2717=Off 2717=On

2718=Off Open 2718=On Closed 2718=Off Travel 2718=On Illegal

2718

Meter #1 - MOV - Closed Status

2719

Meter #1 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Command / Status

Must be activated when the MOV is fully closed. Read/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer also controls this point. Level sensitive.

2720

Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status

2721


2722

Meter #2 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status

2723


2724


2725


2726


2727


2728


2729

Spare

to 2732

Spare

1.3.14. Archive Trigger Commands 2733

Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1

2734


2735


2736


2737

Spare

The archive trigger commands will trigger Point 2n41 ‘Meter Hourly Archive Flag’.

to 2800

1-18

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


1.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags INFO - Boolean data is accessed using Modbus function codes 01 for reads, 05 for single point writes and 15 for multiple bit writes. Boolean data is packed 8 points to a byte when reading.


INFO - Remember that the station is defined as a group of individual meter runs.


23/27.71+ 05/98

The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run versions of flags. 2801


2802

Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2803


2804

Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2805


2806

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2807


2808

Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2809


2810

Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2811


2812

Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2813


2814

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2815


2816

Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2817

Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818

Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819

Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2820

Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2821


2822

Previous - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2823


2824

Previous - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2825


2826

Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2827


2828

Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


1-19

Chapter 1




2830

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2831 2832

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833

Spare

to 2857

Spare



Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2859

Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2860

Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2861

Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2862

Spare



2864


1.3.18. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

1-20

2865


2866


2867


2868


2869

Print 0 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2870

Print 1 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2871

Print 2 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer

2872

Print 3 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d



Print 0 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2874

Print 1 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2875

Print 2 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

2876

Print 3 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

1.3.19. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points Used For Meter Tube Switching Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube switching function. The command output points below are used to open and close the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided which indicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOV limit switches.

2877

Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command Out

2878

Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command Out

Activates to open MOV. Activates to close MOV.

2879

Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm Out

2880

Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOV

2881

Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV

MOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position. MOV took too long opening. MOV took too long closing.

MOV Alarms: Any MOV alarm will cause the flow computer to take the MOV out of service (see 2719) and send a close MOV command.

2882


to 2886


2887


to 2891


2892


to 2896


2897

Spare

to 3000

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare


1-21

Volume 4d


2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) 2.1. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

2.1.1.

Custom Data Packet Definition Variables Custom Data Packet #1



3002


to 3039


3040


2.1.2.




3042


to 3055


3056


2.1.3.




3058


to

23/27.71+ 05/98

3095


3096



2-1

Chapter 2


2.2. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3097

Spare

3098

Number of Totalizer Digits Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.

3099

Spare

3100

Spare

2.3.


The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406. 3n01

Override Code - Temperature For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If transmitter fails use last hours average.

3n02

Override Code - Pressure

3n03

Override Code - Gravity/Density

3n04


3n05


3n06

Active Threshold Hz Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.

3n07

Use Transducer Density

3n08

Turbine or Differential Pressure

3n09

Override Code - Differential Pressure

3n10

Static Pressure - Location Select

3n11

AGA 8 - Method Selection

3n12

Orifice Taps

3n13

Disable Downstream/Upstream Temperature - Isentropic Correction

0=Use equation; 1=Use transducer. 0=Use differential pressure; 1=Use turbine meter.

0=Upstream; 1=Downstream. 1 to 3=1994; 4 to 6=1992; 7 to 12=1985 0=Flange; 1=Pipe; 2=Corner taps; 3=D&D/2; 4=Nozzle; 5 & 6= Venturi Note:

#

0=No; 1=Yes.

# Downstream temperature can be corrected to upstream conditions assuming an isentropic expansion after the orifice. Default is ‘Disable’ because AGA 3 / API 14.3 DO NOT mandate this correction.

2-2

3n14

Product Number Select

3n15

Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Stream Number Selection

3n16

Spare

1 to 4.


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d

Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers 3n17

Hour in Progress - Flow Time 500msec ticks (0-7200).


3n18

Last Hour’s - Flow Time 500msec ticks (0-7200).

3n19

PID Control Mode

3n20

Setpoint Mode

Do not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto. Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.

3n21

PID Loop Status Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.

3n22

Frequency Point - K Factor #1 For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.

3n23


3n24


3n25


3n26


3n27


3n28


3n29


3n30


3n31


3n32


3n33


3n34

Comparitor Error Threshold When ‘dual pulse’ error checking enabled only.

Notes:

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments;. i.e., 1000 represents 100.0%

~ 2s complement numbers based on the 4-20 mA spans. Values are expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments; i.e., 1000 equals 100.0 %.

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare

3n36

Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Since Day Start

3n37

Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Since Day Start

3n38

Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Previous Day

3n39

Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Previous Day

#

3n40

Current Net Flowrate

*

3n41

Net Totalizer

#

3n42


* Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

3n35

*

3n43

Gross Total

#

3n44


*

3n45

Mass Total

~

3n46

Current Meter Run Pressure

~

3n47

Current Meter Run Temperature

~

3n48

Current Transducer Density/Gravity

#

3n49

Energy Flowrate

*

3n50

Energy Total


2-3

Chapter 2


16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999) 3n51

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Status

3n52

Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Alarm Code

3n53

Spare

to 3n99

Spare

3500

Spare

2.4.

Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar operations. 3501


to

2-4

3599


3600

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


2.5. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with setting up User Displays.

2.5.1. 3601


3602


3603


3604


3605


3606


3607


3608


2.5.2.

User Display Number 2 st

3609

Database Index Number of 1 Variable

3610


3611


3612


3613


3614


3615


3616


2.5.3.

23/27.71+ 05/98

User Display Definition Variables

th


3617


3618


3619


3620


3621


3622


3623


3624


th


2-5

Chapter 2


2.5.4. Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

3625

st


3626


3627


3628


3629


3630


3631


3632


2.5.5. 3633

th



3634


3635


3636


3637


3638


3639


3640


2.5.6. 3641

2-6


th



3642


3643


3644


3645


3646


3647


3648


th


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d



3649

st


3650


3651


3652


3653


3654


3655


3656


2.5.8. 3657

23/27.71+ 05/98


th



3658


3659


3660


3661


3662


3663


3664


th


2-7

Chapter 2



Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records

See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flow computer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below. 3701

Archive 701 - Maximum Records

3702

Archive 701 - Current Record Number

Number of data records in archive file. Number of the last record updated.

3703


3704


3705


3706

Archive 702 - Request Record Number

Number of the last record updated. Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3707


3708


3709


Number of data records in archive file. Number of the last record updated. Write the number of the record you wish to read.

3710


3711


3712



3713


3714



3715


3716


3717


3718



2-8


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d




3720


3721



3722


3723


3724



3725


3726



3727


3728


3729


3730



3731


3732


3733



3734


3735



3736


23/27.71+ 05/98


2-9

Chapter 2



3737

More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status 0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.

3738

Spare

to 3750

Spare

3751

Run Switching in Auto Mode

3752

Run Switching Timer

0=No; 1=Yes. Seconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.

3753

Spare

to 3768

Spare

3769

Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus Buffer Used by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes to this variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.

2-10


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


2.8. INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data

The data points below are used to map the component order of the GC analysis to the component order needed by AGA8. 3770 Component # ‘n’ for % Methane 3771 Component # ‘n’ for % Nitrogen 3772 Component # ‘n’ for % Carbon Dioxide 3773 Component # ‘n’ for % Ethane 3774 Component # ‘n’ for % Propane 3775 Component # ‘n’ for % Water 3776 Component # ‘n’ for % Hydrogen Sulfide 3777 Component # ‘n’ for % Hydrogen 3778 Component # ‘n’ for % Carbon Monoxide 3779 Component # ‘n’ for % Oxygen 3780 Component # ‘n’ for % i-Butane 3781 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Butane 3782 Component # ‘n’ for % i-Pentane 3783 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Pentane 3784 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Hexane 3785 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Heptane 3786 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Octane 3787 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Nonane 3788 Component # ‘n’ for % n-Decane 3789 Component # ‘n’ for % Helium 3790 Component # ‘n’ for % Argon 3791 Component # ‘n’ for Heating Value 3792 Component # ‘n’ for Reference Specific Gravity

3793

Spare

to 3799

23/27.71+ 05/98

Spare


2-11

Chapter 2



Notes: * Unsigned integer totalizers cumulative based. They roll at 65536.

~

3800

Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data Special Diagnostic Function Used to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see side bar note).

3801

Spare

#

3802

Current Net Flowrate

*

3803

Net Totalizer

#

3804


*

3805

Gross Totalizer

#

3806


*

3807

Mass Totalizer

3808

Spare

~ To avoid flushing the audit trail, audit events other than complete ‘downloads’ to the flow computer are usually not documented in the ‘audit trail’ unless serial port passwords have been enabled. If pass-words are enabled, the target address is recorded for single point writes. Rigorous auditing of a serial port or group of serial ports can be activated by placing the appropriate hexadecimal code in 3800 (S = Serial Port): 000A = Audit S1 00A0 = Audit S2 0A00 = Audit S3 A000 = Audit S4 To monitor multiple ports; e.g: A0 A0 = Audit S4 & S2

# 2s complement numbers based on span entries 17176 through 17189. Values expressed as percentages of span in tenth percent increments. i.e. 1000 represents 100.0% . No over range or under range checking is done.

to 3810

Spare

#

3811

Current Energy Flowrate

#

3812

Energy Totalizer

3813

Fluid Type Select - Product #1

3814


3815


3816


3817

AGA 8 Method Select - Product #1

3818


3819


3820


3821

Heating Value Method Select - Product #1

3822


3823


3824


3825

Spare

0=AGA 5; 1=GPA 2172-96

to 3828

2-12

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d



Flow Average Factor

3830

Print Priority

3831

Number of Nulls After CR

3832

Print Interval in Minutes

Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average. 0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12. Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake. Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.

3833

Automatic - Weekly Batch Select

3834

Automatic - Monthly Batch Select

0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday. st

0=None; 1=1 day of the month.

3835

Automatic - Hourly Batch Select 0=No; 1=Yes.

3836

Default Report Templates 0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.

3837

Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Type Select

3838

Clear Daily @ Batch End Select

0=Applied Automation; 1=Danalyzer. 0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.

3839

Analyzer Number

3840

Gas Chromatograph - Result Interval

3841

Gas Chromatograph - Listen Only Mode

ID Used in communications Will ask gas chromatograph for data if no new result sent within this many minutes. 0=Be master; 1=Be slave - listen only.

3842

Select Date Type Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.

23/27.71+ 05/98


2-13

Chapter 2


2.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

INFO - The addresses on the right (3047-3057) are the corresponding addresses in the Danalyzer.

3843

Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3046 For point 3843-3854, see Danalyzer documentation for complete details about mapping of alarm registers. Critical alarms in this register.

3844

Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3047

3845


3846


3847


3848


3849


3850


3851


3852


3853


3854


3855

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Month

3856

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Day

3857

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Year

3858

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Hour

3859

Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Minute

3860

Spare

Critical alarms in this register.

Points 3855-3859 represent the time and date when the last analysis was started.

to 3866

2-14

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


2.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables INFO - These short integers are accessed using Modbus function code 03 for reads, 06 for single writes and 16 for multiple register writes.

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848. 3867

Current - Hour 0-23.

3868

Current - Minute

3869

Current - Second

3870

Current - Month

0-59. 0-59. 1-12.

3871

Current - Day of Month 1-31.

3872

Current - Year

3873

Current - Day of Week

3874

Disable Daily Report

0-99; Year 2000=00. Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday. 0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.

23/27.71+ 05/98


2-15

Chapter 2


2.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data Application Revisions 23.71+ & 27.71+ - This database corresponds to Application Revisions 23.71/27.71 for Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. Both US and metric unit versions are considered.

3875

Spare

to 3879

Spare

3880

Override Code - Reference Specific Gravity

3881

Override Code - Nitrogen

3882

Override Code - Carbon Dioxide

3883

Override Code - Heating Value

3884

Override Code - Gas Chromatograph

3885

Spare

to 4000

2-16

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) 3.1. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.



Meter Run ASCII String Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments). 4n01

Running Batch - Start Date

4n02

Running Batch - Start Time

#

4n03

Batch End - Date

#

4n04

Batch End - Time

4n05

Running Product Name

4n06

Current - Calculation Mode Algorithm set used, in string format.

4n07

Spare

4n08

Spare

4n09

Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass Used on reports. It contains ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Characters 1-8.

4n10

Spare

4n11

Meter - Serial Number

4n12

Meter - Size

4n13

Meter - Model

4n14

Meter - ID

4n15

Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure

4n16

Differential Pressure - High Range Tag

4n17

Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18

Transmitter Tag - Pressure

4n19

Transmitter Tag - Densitometer

Note:

# Last batch end for this meter run.

23/27.71+ 05/98

4n20

Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature

4n21

Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure

4n22

Output Tag - PID Control


3-1

Chapter 3

8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999) 4n23


Spare

to 4n99

Spare

4500

Spare

3.2.

Scratch Pad ASCII String Data

Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations. 4501


to 4599

3.3.


User Display Definition String Variables

The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are listed below. INFO - See 3601 area for more data points needed to setup the user displays.

4601


4602


4603


4604


4605


to 4632


4633


to 4640


4641

Spare

to 4706

3-2

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

Volume 4d


3.4. INFO - These ASCII string variables are accessed using Modbus function codes 03 for all reads and 16 for all writes.



4707

String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Tag - Input #1

to 4710

Auxiliary Tag - Input #4

4711

Spare

to 4806

3.5.

Spare

Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data

4807

Date of Last Database Change

4808

Time of Last Database Change

4809

Reserved

4810

Esc Sequence to Print Condensed

Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.

Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).

4811

Esc Sequence to Print Normal Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).

4812

Daylight Savings Starts Date format field (**/**/**).

4813

Daylight Savings Ends Date format field (**/**/**).

4814

Spare

4815

Station - ID

4816

Spare

4817

Spare

4818

Print Interval Timer Start Time Time format field (**:**:**).

4819

Time to Print Daily Report Time format field (**:**:**).

23/27.71+ 05/98


3-3

Chapter 3



4820

Product #1 - Name

4821

Product #1 - Name

4822

Product #1 - Name

4823

Product #4 - Name

4824

Spare

to 4831

Spare

4832

Reference Specific Gravity Tag

4833

Nitrogen Tag

4834

Carbon Dioxide Tag

4835

Heating Value Tag

4836

Flow Computer ID

4837

Company Name

4838

Company Name

Characters 1-8. Characters 9-16.

4839


4840

Company Name

4841

Company Name

4842

Station Location

4843

Station Location

Characters 25-32. Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.) Characters 1-8. Characters 9-16.

4844

Station Location

4845

Station Location

4846

Station Location

*

4847

Current Date

*

4848

Current Time

Characters 17-24. Characters 25-32. Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.) Note:

Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).

* The flow computer time and date can be set by writing to these ASCII variables. Be sure to include the colons ( : ) in the time string and the slashes ( / ) in the date string.

See also 3867-3869.

4849

Software Version Number

4850

Online Password / EPROM Checksum

Example: 23.71 Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.

4851

Spare

to 5000

3-4

Spare


23/27.71+ 05/98

,lk

TB: 960701

Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software

TB: 960702

Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers

TB: 960703

Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer

TB: 960704

Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters

TB: 970701

Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer

TB: 970702

Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temp. Other than 15°C or 60°F

TB: 970801

Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer

TB: 970802

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview

TB: 970803

Meter Factor Linearization

TB: 970804

Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of ‘SG’ and ‘HV’

TB: 970901

Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

TB: 980201

Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems

TB: 980202

Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer

TB: 980301

Replacing EPROM Chips

TB: 980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

TB: 980402

Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application

TB: 980501

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues

TB: 980503

Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

Date: 07

23

96

Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott

TB # 960701

Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 3, Chapter 2 “Flow Computer Configuration”, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier. OmniCom Configuration PC Software - This powerful software package allows you to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations for Omni flow computers. It also allows you to create custom reports and displays. You can work online, offline and remotely.

Scope....................................................................................................................2 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Configuring the Flow Computer ........................................................................2 Report Configurator ............................................................................................3 Operations Utilities and Help .............................................................................3 Dial-up Access.....................................................................................................3 Passwords Using OmniCom ..............................................................................3 Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................... 4 Changing Passwords at the Keypad ............................................................................. 4 Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............. 5 Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom ........................................... 5 Disabling Modbus Port Passwords................................................................................ 6

Getting Started ....................................................................................................6 Installation Requirements.............................................................................................. 6 Installation Procedure.................................................................................................... 6 Opening a File ............................................................................................................... 7 View............................................................................................................................... 7 Off-line ........................................................................................................................... 7 On-line ........................................................................................................................... 7 Reports .......................................................................................................................... 8 Utilities........................................................................................................................... 8 I/O Point Assignment List ........................................................................................................ 8 OmniCom Setup ................................................................................................................... 8 OmniCom Application ............................................................................................................ 9 Archive Start/Stop Command .................................................................................................. 9 Prover Commands..................................................................................................................10 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................10 Omni Front Panel Emulator ....................................................................................................10

Help ............................................................................................................................. 10 Registration of License and Software Support ............................................................ 11

TB-960701 ALL REVS

1

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers

Technical Bulletin

Scope OmniCom Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from which you can configure your flow computer.

Abstract OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program, or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements. Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering. The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements by a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your Omni Flow Computer.

Configuring the Flow Computer For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: +1-281-240-6161

Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned. Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control features. You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then upload your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this time. You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to communicate directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the flow computer.

2


TB-960701 ALL REVS

TB-960701


Report Configurator One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to suit local needs.

Operations Utilities and Help Accessing Help in OmniCom - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: +1-281-240-6161

Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.

Dial-up Access Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up modem as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration data. The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the flow computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA or DCS systems.

Passwords Using OmniCom Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following: INFO - For Firmware Revisions 70+, Physical Serial Port #1 is selectable as a Modbus RTU, Modbus RTU (modem), or printer port. This serial port on previous revisions was only a printer port.

TB-960701 ALL REVS

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Local Keypad access Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1) Modbus Port #2 (Physical serial Port #2) Modbus Port #3 (Physical serial Port #3) Modbus Port #4 (Physical serial Port #4)


3


Technical Bulletin

Local Keypad Access Three password levels are provided: a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password level. b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments, programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other than Keypad level 1. c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries: ♦ Meter factors and K Factors ♦ Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor) d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries include: ♦ Transducer manual overrides ♦ Product gravity overrides ♦ Prover operations ♦ Batching operations

Changing Passwords at the Keypad 1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] 2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter] 3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?' press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] 4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter] 5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and changed if required. INFO - Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad.

4

6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords. These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3 Passwd' and ‘Ser4 Passwd’ corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.


TB-960701 ALL REVS

TB-960701


Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port 7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above. 8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration Data'. 9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and communication settings, Modbus ID, baud rate, etc. 10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because when setting passwords from the flow computer’s keypad, they are always entered in uppercase. 11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port. 12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and 'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter the password to ensure that what you typed was correct. 13) To setup a ‘Level C’ password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting ‘Level C’ for ‘Level B’ at Step 6.

Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with OmniCom. 1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the popup screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to appear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing any editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited. 2) When asked, enter your current password. Password ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ users are allowed to change only their own password levels. ‘Level A’ password users can change levels A, B and C.

TB-960701 ALL REVS


5


Technical Bulletin

Disabling Modbus Port Passwords INFO - Level B and Level C passwords for each Modbus (serial) port cannot be viewed or changed from the keypad; i.e., you must use OmniCom to view, change or delete these password levels.

‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see sidebar) before disabling the privileged ‘Level A’ password at the keypad. 1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or set-up the password. 2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show). 3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses followed by the [Enter] key. 4) Repeat this procedure for both ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords. 5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear] key and then the [Enter] key.

Getting Started

CAUTION!

Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR) programs such as SideKick and Keyboard Macro processors can affect the operation of high speed communication programs such as OmniCom. They do this by 'stealing' processor cycles or turning off the hardware interrupt system of the personal computer. These programs may have to be disabled when you are in the 'On-line' Mode, if you encounter difficulties communicating with the Omni flow computer.

Installing OmniCom Revisions Previous to 70 Before you install earlier revisions of OmniCom software, you must save your existing phone directory entries and setup. For instructions and any other assistance you may need, please contact our technical support staff at the following phone number: +1-281-240-6161

6

Installation Requirements To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates and copies of the database, you will require the following: ♦ IBM PC (or compatible) ♦ MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01) ♦ 640Kb RAM ♦ 20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive, 3½" 1.44 Mb ♦ Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability ♦ One RS-232 serial port ♦ One LPT port (optional) ♦ One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)

Installation Procedure OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3½" diskettes in an archived format. To install, do the following: 1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive. 2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B). 3) Type Install and press [Enter]. The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the installation.


TB-960701 ALL REVS

TB-960701


Opening a File Accessing Help in OmniCom - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.


First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates. All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive ‘Help’. No matter where you are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for your entry selection.

View Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have made. You may not be able to use the ‘View’ feature with certain variations of flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional entry fields not available in earlier revisions.

Off-line You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.

On-line When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses the Modbus RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical but must also be the same. With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps are supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not performed. In this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup. Some personal computers may not have the processing power to support the higher baud rates. Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud rate at the RS-232 connector than they are communicating on the telephone line. If the modems connect but the flow computer does not respond, try adjusting the flow computer’s baud rate.

TB-960701 ALL REVS


7


Technical Bulletin

Reports The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from the flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default reports that are included in the Omni application software. You can also customize your own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen report editor, you can add or delete text and data character strings which identify the variable in the computer's Modbus database. [F1] for help describes the control functions to enable you to format the report easily. Bring up a report template and move the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press [Enter] and a pop-up menu defines the variable being used. Type or edit text anywhere, move the cursor and keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$] enables you to enter or delete any database address from the report.

Utilities The ‘Utilities’ Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining OmniCom. The utilities available are: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

I/O Point Assignment List OmniCom Setup OmniCom Application Archive Maintenance

❑ Prover/Batch End Commands ❑ Diagnostics ❑ Omni Panel

I/O Point Assignment List When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system! This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The flow computer will not allow this to happen in the ‘On-line’ mode, but OmniCom does not check for this in the ‘Off-line’ mode.

OmniCom Setup This utility allows you to: ❑ Select the type of video monitor. ❑ Turn the sound effects on/off. ❑ Setup the modem command strings.

8


TB-960701 ALL REVS

TB-960701

Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software OmniCom Application Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The firmware versions are: US VERSIONS Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering 20 Systems (with K Factor Linearization) 21

Orifice / Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems

Turbine / Positive Displacement 22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization) 23

Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems

METRIC VERSIONS Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering 24 Systems (with K Factor Linearization) 25

Orifice / Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems

Turbine / Positive Displacement 26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization) 27

Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems

Archive Start/Stop Command

WARNING!

Warning: The flow computer will not accept changes made to the archive setup at the time of a 'Transmit Omni Configuration' upload unless the archiving feature has been turned off.

Accessing Help in OmniCom - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with the flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the 'Start Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status of the 'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all items on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with the target computer. Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.


TB-960701 ALL REVS


9


Technical Bulletin

Prover Commands Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating directly with an Omni Flow Computer. You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled by a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you have not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one of the following error messages:

Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first. No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not match OmniCom's setting. Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter you wish to remote prove. The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes data shown locally at the Omni flow computer.

Diagnostics You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow computer.

Omni Front Panel Emulator When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer information and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key stroke buffer as the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600 baud or higher. You must have setup the baud rate and other communication settings in the 'Start Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.

Help Accessing Help in OmniCom - At the 'Using Help' feature, press [Enter] and [F1] for editing keystrokes.

10

You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if additional information is required for other users of this program.


TB-960701 ALL REVS

TB-960701


Registration of License and Software Support For Further Help - If you require further help, call Omni’s technical support at: +1-281-240-6161

TB-960701 ALL REVS

Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a singleuser license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require reregistration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new add-on programs for your installation.


11


Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960702

Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manuals, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Allen-Bradley Communications - This feature allows communicating with AllenBradley PLCs. However, Omni Flow Computers is not responsible for the operation, connectivity or compatibility of AllenBradley products, and furthermore, we do not warrant these products.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Protocol and Error Checking .............................................................................2 PLC Supported ....................................................................................................2 Flow Computer Database ...................................................................................2 4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable .......................................... 2 rd 3 Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application.................................... 3

How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database .......3 PLC-2 ............................................................................................................................ 3 PLC-3 ............................................................................................................................ 3 PLC-5 ............................................................................................................................ 3 Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................... 4 16-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4 8-Character Strings.................................................................................................................. 4 32-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4 32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4 Bit Integers .............................................................................................................................. 4 16-Character Strings................................................................................................................ 4 32-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4 32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow communications with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni Flow Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the manufacturer for any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.

TB-960702 ALL REVS

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the flow computer and an Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), usually via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway. Data is transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is approximately 75 msec.

Protocol and Error Checking Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported. CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half duplex.

PLC Supported The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradley PLC types and messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported. PLC-2 PLC-3 PLC-5 SLC-502/3

Unprotected Block Reads and Writes Word Range Reads and Writes Typed Reads and Writes Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes

Flow Computer Database Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support communications using superset of Modbus Protocol. This is the native communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the computer.

4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable 1??? 3??? 4??? 5??? 7??? 8??? 13??? 14???

Variable is a digital status or command bit Variable is a 16 bit signed integer Variable is a 8 character ASCII string Variable is a 32 bit signed integer Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point Variable is a 16 bit signed integer Variable is a 16 character ASCII string

15??? Variable is a 32 bit signed integer 17??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point

2


TB-960702 ALL REVS

TB-960702

Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers

3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application ?1?? ?2?? ?3?? ?4?? ?5?? ?6?? ?7?? ?8?? ?9??

Variable relates to Meter Run #1 Variable relates to Meter Run #2 Variable relates to Meter Run #3 Variable relates to Meter Run #4 Variable is scratchpad Variable is PID related or scratchpad Variable is a command write. Variable is related to station functions Variable is related to prover functions

How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database PLC-2 This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is always transferred as block reads and writes. Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting address of each data block is selectable. Note: The PLC2 does not understand 32-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating points but can pass these variable types to devices that do understand them.

❏ Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers and IEEE floating points. ❏ Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits only. Data is packed 16 to a word. ❏ Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.

PLC-3 This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting addresses).

PLC-5 This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To accommodate the PLC-5 'file system’ method of addressing, the Modbus index numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:

TB-960702 ALL REVS


3


Technical Bulletin

MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES MODBUS INDEX #

PLC-5 ADDRESS

ELEMENT SIZE

COMMENT

1101 1217 1701 3201 3210 3901 4101 4102 5101 5102 5103 7401 7405

N11:01 N12:17 N17:01 N32:01 N32:10 N39:01 B41:01 B41:02 N51:01 N51:02 N51:03 F74:01 F74:05

1 Word (16 Flags) 1 Word (16 Flags) 1 Word (16 Flags) 1 Word (Integer) 1 Word (Integer) 1 Word (integer) 1 Byte (ASCII) 1 Byte (ASCII) 1 Word (Long Integer) 1 Word (Long Integer) 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words (IEEE Float) 2 Words (IEEE Float)

Meter #1 Status Flags Meter #2 Status Flags Command Flags Meter #1 Data Offsets track Prover Data 4 Words per Variable 1 Byte per element 2 Words per variable 2 Words per variable Same again 2 Words per variable Offsets track

Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files 16-Bit Integers N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01 N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01

8-Character Strings B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01

32-Bit Integers N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating Points F70:01 F71:01 F72:01 F73:01 F74:01 F75:01 F76:01 F77:01 F78:01 F79:01

Bit Integers N130:01 N134:01

16-Character Strings B140:01

32-Bit Integers N150:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating Points F170:01

4


TB-960702 ALL REVS


Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960703

Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2 and Volume 3, and is applicable to all firmware revisions 71+. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Data Archiving - The archiving feature allows you to store raw data, ASCII text data and historical reports.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Raw Data Archiving.............................................................................................2 Retrieving Data.............................................................................................................. 3 Raw Data Archive Point Addresses............................................................................... 4 Archive Configuration Changes..................................................................................... 5 Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .......................................................................................... 6 Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ............................................... 6 Defining the Archive Records .................................................................................................. 6

How The Available Memory Is Allocated ....................................................................... 7 Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ..................................................... 8 Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features.................................................................... 9

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log .........10 Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711.................................... 10 Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. .................................... 10

Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature.................11 Custom Report Templates ...............................................................................12

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and historical reports

TB-960703 ALL REVS

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Definitions & Terminology Archive Address - A unique Modbus address used to read a data record from an archive file. These addresses are in the 700 series; i.e., 701, 702, 703, etc. Archive Record - A structure containing a fixed set of data variables which cannot exceed 250 bytes in length. Data within the record can be of any valid data type in any order. Archive Trigger Boolean The actual event which causes the flow computer to capture and store a record within the archive file. The trigger can be any Boolean variable within the database including the result of a Boolean statement. Block Read - Modbus protocol block read requires that Function Code 03 (read multiple registers) be used to retrieve data. Circular Archive File - A file of ‘n’ records arranged as a circular buffer which always contains the most recent ‘n’ records; i.e., the oldest data record is overwritten by each new record as it is added. Current Record Pointer A 16-bit read-only integer register containing a number between 0 and ‘n’, representing the position of the most recently added record within the archive file. The pointer is adjusted after each complete record is added. A value of 0 indicates that no data records have been added since the last initialization of the archive memory.

The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as follows: 1) Raw Data Archive

Data records are defined and stored in raw binary format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten user configurable files are provided as well as an alarm file and audit trail file. This data can be retrieved using standard Modbus Function Codes 3 and 6.

2) Text Archive Data

ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve this data you must use OmniCom, OmniView or a custom Modbus driver which understands the proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and 65.

3) Historical Reports

These are exact copies of data that was sent to the local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer stores the last eight copies of each of the following reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.

Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.

Raw Data Archiving A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional archive files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are fixed in format and cannot be user configured. Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean. Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the appropriate trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day, etc. Three additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum number of records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read pointer.

(Continues…)

2


TB-960703 ALL REVS

TB3-960703


Retrieving Data Definitions & Terminology

(…Continued) Maximum Records Register - A 16-bit readonly integer adjacent to the ‘Current Record Pointer’ which contains the number ‘n’, indicating the maximum number of records within the archive file. Requested Record Pointer - A 16-bit read/write integer used to select a specific record within an archive file. Time and Date Stamp - Six bytes of binary data representing the date and time that the archive record was stored. The byte order is as follows: ❑ Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or Day (1-31) ❑ Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or Month (1-12) ❑ Byte 3 = Year (0-99) ❑ Byte 4 = Hour of Day (023) ❑ Byte 5 = Minute (0-59) ❑ Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59) ❑ European Format Selected (dd/mm/yy) Valid Data Types ❑ 32-bit IEEE floating point data ❑ 32-bit long integer data ❑ 16-bit integer data ❑ 8-byte ASCII string data; byte packed Boolean status data

Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then be accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must be read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always responds with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus poll request is ignored by the flow computer. The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must know the number of the last record it retrieved. 1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in the flow computers database. 2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger event has occurred since initialization). 3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the requested record pointer. 4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added since the last read and no further action is needed. 5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested record pointer. 6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number one should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record pointer register. 7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701, archive file 2 = 702 etc.). 8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read. During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive record containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since the last read and that the host should restart by reading record number one (assuming that the current record pointer is not 0)

TB-960703 ALL REVS


3


Technical Bulletin

Raw Data Archive Point Addresses

4

Archive #1

Record Access Address Access Record Date/Time Only Maximum # of Records Last Record Updated Pointer Record Req To Read Pointer

Read Only Read Only Read Only Read Only Read/Write

0701 0751 3701 3702 3703

Archive #2



0702 0752 3704 3705 3706

Archive #3



0703 0753 3707 3708 3709

Archive #4



0704 0754 3710 3711 3712

Archive #5



0705 0755 3713 3714 3715

Archive #6



0706 0756 3716 3717 3718

Archive #7



0707 0757 3719 3720 3721

Archive #8



0708 0758 3722 3723 3724

Archive #9



0709 0759 3725 3726 3727


TB-960703 ALL REVS

TB3-960703


Archive #10

Record Access Address Access Record Date/Time Only Maximum # of Records Last Record Updated Pointer Record Req To Read Pointer4


0710 0760 3728 3729 3730

Alarm Archive



0711 0761 3731 3732 3733

Audit Archive



0712 0762 3734 3735 3736

Archive Configuration Changes Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive help screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on configuring the archive features via the keypad. From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen displays:

Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays:

# $ %

!" !" !"

Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password when prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:

&'() & & ) & # * ! & # * ) ! " ) &%% %

TB-960703 ALL REVS


5


Technical Bulletin

Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made. The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y’ and the Archive Run' flag must be set to 'N'.

Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the 'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run' flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).

Defining the Archive Records After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the [Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define or change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the following screen is displayed:

& # * + % ,, Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1 for example). The following screen will display:

&) -. /01 ) () 21 3 0 21 0 24 3 0 24 0 Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived. INFO - The ‘Alarm’ and ‘Audit Trail’ archive files are fixed format and cannot be changed.

6

&) -. /01 ) () 21 3 /101 21 5 24 3 6101 24 5


TB-960703 ALL REVS

TB3-960703


A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record. Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6 bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:

&) -. /01 ) () 3 ) 0 7% 0 Circular Archive File - A file of ‘n’ records arranged as a circular buffer which always contains the most recent ‘n’ records; i.e., the oldest data record is overwritten by each new record as it is added.

Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this circular archive file. At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start’ flag) would cause the flow computer to store data at hourly intervals. Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.

) & # * ! & # * ) ! " INFO - Redefining the archive Boolean trigger does not cause the archive RAM to be cleared.

Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory as configured.

How The Available Memory Is Allocated Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of archived data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory is allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data Archive' is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining after the Raw Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive described later.

TB-960703 ALL REVS


7


Technical Bulletin

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing 'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen. INFO - The number of files allocated changes depending on how many archive files have been configured

&) -. +8 & & # * 9 (: + % &%% 5 An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.

&) -. +8 & & # * 9 + % &%% 5 Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive' command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out. Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files' is allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.

&) -. +8 & /0; & < 10000 /10 & < =1;4 3& < 10046>

8


TB-960703 ALL REVS

TB3-960703


Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features ❏ Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration. ❏ Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are provided. ❏ Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array. ❏ Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes maximum. ❏ Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum number of records in an archive file are configurable. ❏ Data is read in block form one record at a time. ❏ Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.) ❏ Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer. ❏ Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate trigger event occurs. ❏ Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event. ❏ Empty archive records contain binary 0’s / ASCII Null characters. ❏ To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of record integers read each time from the flow computer. ❏ Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all archiving by setting the ‘Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting the 'Config Archive Flag' to true (1).

TB-960703 ALL REVS


9


Technical Bulletin

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 Note: Alarm types are: 0 = Log event, sound beeper and display in LCD any edge change in bit identified by field #3. 1 = Log event, sound beeper and display in LCD rising edge changes in bit identified by field #3 2 = Event log any edge change in bit identified by field #3. No beeper or LCD display action. 3 = Event log rising edge changes in bit identified by field #3. No beeper or LCD display action. Rising edge change means 0 to1 transition.

Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set to 0.0 when the variable type changed is String. Fields 7 and 8 contain null characters when the variable type changed is NOT a string. When fields 7 and 8 contain 8 character strings the remaining 8 characters are padded with nulls.

10

Field #1

3-Byte Date

(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2

3-Byte Time

(HH, MM, SS)

Field #3

16-Bit Integer

(Modbus Index # of alarm or event)

Field #4

1 Byte

(Alarm Type - see sidebar)

Field #5

1 Byte

(Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or OK)

Field #6

IEEE Float

(Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm or event)

Field #7

32-Bit Integer

(Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)

Field #8

32-Bit Integer

(Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)

Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. Field #1

3-Byte Date

(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2

3-Byte Time

(HH, MM, SS)

Field #3

16-Bit Integer

(Event number, increments for each event, rolls at 65535)

Field #4

16-Bit Integer

(Modbus index of variable changed)

Field #5

IEEE Float

(Numeric variable value before change - old value)

Field #6

IEEE Float

(Numeric variable value after change - new value)

Field #7

16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)

Field #8

16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)

Field #9

32-Bit Integer

Field #10 32-Bit Integer

(Volume totalizer at time of change) (Mass totalizer at the time of the change)


TB-960703 ALL REVS

TB3-960703


Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{' character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of the report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.

The user has embedded a Boolean point address 2000 to indicate that the following data enclosed by the ‘{…}’ characters is to be printed and archived. When embedding the point, set the width=1 and number of decimal places=0.

The User has embedded a Boolean point address 1000 to indicate that the following data enclosed by the ‘{…}’ characters is to be archived only and not printed. When embedding the point, set the width=1 and number of decimal places=0.

INFO - Data is archived only when the report is processed for the first time. Reprinting a stored report does not cause any data to be stored in the archive.

TB-960703 ALL REVS

X{ Batch Report Date :

XX/XX/XX

Company Name Time : XX:XX:XX

Meter ID XXXXXXXX Product ID XXXXXXXX API Table Selected XXXXXXXX Batch Start Date XX/XX/XX Batch Start Time XX:XX:XX Batch End Date XX/XX/XX Batch End Time XX:XX:XX Batch Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Batch Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Batch Mass LB XXXXXXXXX X{ Opening Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Opening Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Opening Mass LB XXXXXXXXX Closing Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Closing Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX Closing Mass LB XXXXXXXXX Batch Flow Weighted Averages: Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR XXXXXX.X Temperature Deg.F XXXXXX.X Pressure PSIG XXXXXX.X Flowing Density GM/CC XXXXXX.X API @ 60 Deg.F XXXXXX.X VCF X.XXXX CPL X.XXXX Meter Factor X.XXXX }

Computer ID :

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX}

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X XXXXX.X X.XXXX X.XXXX X.XXXX

The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the report is processed. 1) 2) 3) 4)

'FILENAME.TP1' 'FILENAME.TP2' 'FILENAME.TP3' 'FILENAME.TP4'

Snapshot Report Batch Report Daily Report Prover Report


11


Technical Bulletin

Custom Report Templates A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories. For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:

Note:

* To avoid duplication and conserve disk space these templates do not have matching TP1, TP2 and TP3 templates. Select TP1 though TP3 from the appropriate set (A, B, C or D) above depending on independent or common product.

REV20A.TP1

Interval Report

Independent Products

REV20A.TP2

Batch Report


REV20A.TP3

Daily Report


REV20A.TP4

Prove Report


REV20B.TP1

Interval Report


REV20B.TP2

Batch Report


REV20B.TP3

Daily Report


REV20B.TP4

Prove Report


REV20C.TP1

Interval Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP2

Batch Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP3

Daily Report

Common Product

REV20C.TP4

Prove Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP1

Interval Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP2

Batch Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP3

Daily Report

Common Product

REV20D.TP4

Prove Report

Common Product

REV20E.TP4*

Prove Report

Master Meter Method

REV20M.TP4*

Prove Report

Mass Meter Proving

Normal Pipe Prover

REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report

Mass Meter Proving

Double Chronometry

REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report

Double Chronometry

Viscosity Linearization

REV20LP.TP4*

Pipe Prover

Viscosity Linearization

Prove Report

Double Chronometry

Normal Pipe Prover

Double Chronometry

Normal Pipe Prover

Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working on 'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty file. You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample templates as follows: 1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'. 2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.?? application): COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP? 3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom. In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files related to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24 applications.

12


TB-960703 ALL REVS


Date: 07

23

96


TB # 960704

Communicating with Honeywell ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions. This bulletin was previously published as an appendix to user manuals of firmware revisions Version .70 and earlier.

Communication with Honeywell ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters - This feature allows you to communicate with Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters, via Omni’s H type Process I/O Combo Module and using Honeywell’s DE Protocol.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview .....................................................2 Transmitter Database..........................................................................................2 Using the Honeywell Handheld Communicator ............................................3 Combo Module LED Status Indicators..............................................................3 Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode. .................................................4 Auto Mode ..................................................................................................................... 4 Manual Operation .......................................................................................................... 4

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel .....................................................................................................................4

Scope All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywell’s Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.

Abstract Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywell’s DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.

TB-960704 ALL REVS

1


Technical Bulletin

Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital '1’ = 4 mA. In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow computer every 366 msec: Byte #1 Status Flags Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point) Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6 below belongs) Byte #6 Database Data Value

Transmitter Database By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure transmitter to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and 45 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the correct configuration data to the transmitter.

2


TB-960704 ALL REVS

TB-960704


Using the Honeywell Handheld Communicator The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the transmitter: 1) 2) 3) 4)

Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL) Damping Factor Tag Name

Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.

Combo Module LED Status Indicators Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter. Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED (about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular transmitter.

TB-960704 ALL REVS


3


Technical Bulletin

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode. Auto Mode Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on the H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have been established.

Manual Operation For manual operation, do the following: 1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer to that I/O point. 2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays 'Change to Analog?' 3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed. The 'H' Combo module’s green LED on that channel will stop pulsing. 4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input] [Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:

! "! # $ % & ! ' ( ))))))))

# * + , -*

4


TB-960704 ALL REVS

TB-960704


H1-2 Transmitter

: Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).

PV%

: Process variable value in percentage of the transmitter’s span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that the transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition below).

Status

: There are five status states. 1) OK

: Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK. The database within the transmitter matches the flow computer.

2) Idle

: This flow computer I/O point has been assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is not receiving data from the transmitter. Possible cause is a wiring problem such as reversal of wiring. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to establish communications by sending a wake-up command every 10 seconds or so.

3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the transmitter has determined that a critical error has occurred within the transmitter meaning the value of the process variable cannot be trusted. The flow computer will set the transducer failure alarm and follow the fail code strategy selected by the user for this transducer. 4) DB Error : Communications between the flow computer and smart Honeywell transmitter are OK but the flow Computer has determined that the database within the flow computer does not agree with the database within the transmitter. If you observe the status LEDs you will note that the flow computer attempts to correct the transmitters database by writing the correct data to the transmitter once every 30-45 seconds or so.

TB-960704 ALL REVS


5


Technical Bulletin

5) 4 Byte

: The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte Broadcast Mode. Because the flow computer will not tolerate this mode of operation, this status display should only be displayed momentarily as the flow computer will automatically switch the transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast Mode.

LRV

: Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for pressure transmitters.

Span

: The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the Span is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for pressure transmitters. The flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the transmitter’s upper range limit' (URL).

Damp Seconds

: Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.

Conformity Bit

: Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters. Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 = square root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart temperature transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device. Serial #

: Serial Number of the smart transmitter.

Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are: TT = Temperature Transmitter DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter

6


TB-960704 ALL REVS

TB-960704

TB-960704 ALL REVS


URL

: Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering units. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.

ID/TAG

: ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.

SV

: Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in °C. This represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters, and junction temperature for temperature transmitters. The flow computer may or may not have a value in this field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the part of the transmitter’s database which is sent to the Omni.


7


Date: 07

02

97


TB # 970701

Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, and is applicable to Revision 20.70/24.70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Instructions..........................................................................................................1

Scope All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.

Abstract Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the following procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.

Instructions (1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points. (2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable change, all calibrated points should be rechecked). (3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly. Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve temperature stability. (4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in the calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital voltmeters etc.)

TB-970701 ALL.70+

1


Date: 07

04

97


TB # 970702

Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15°C or 60°F Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volumes 2, 3 and 4, applicable to firmware revisions 20/24.71+ and 21/25.71+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .....................2 Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers..................................2

Scope All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one reference temperature is required.

Abstract Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference temperature. Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the normal totalizers. The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point 7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers and their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0° cannot be used as a second reference temperature). You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68 will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter it, but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail. Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot occurs after a ‘Clear All Ram’ command is executed.

TB-970702 ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4 Station

CURRENT BATCH

PREVIOUS BATCH

CURRENT DAILY

PREVIOUS DAY

5196 5296 5396 5496 5896

5198 5298 5398 5498 5898

5197 5297 5397 5497 5897

5199 5299 5399 5499 5899

Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n] will display meter ‘n’ net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.

2


TB-970702 ALL.70+


Date: 08

04

97


TB # 970801

Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer Contents Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Example:........................................................................................................................ 2

Scope User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Version .70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.

Abstract The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events and status changes. These events include transducer ‘Low Alarm and High Alarm’ states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer which is measurement related. There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to monitor other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with the measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O point changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable statement comparison. Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to be logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of these last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through 1072 for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088 for computers with 64 statements. Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance). The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a custom alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm message to be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the message.

TB-970801 ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Example: In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24 volts to the digital I/O point. Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital level applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22, Modbus Point 1022 would be affected. 1025:

1072=1001

Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.

• • • 1072:

High Level Alarm

Actual ‘alarm text’ which appears in alarm log.

Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1 to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the input terminals by the ‘tank high level’ switch contacts.

2


TB-970801 ALL.70+


Date: 08

08

97


TB # 970802

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 4 “Modbus Database Address and Index Numbers”, applicable to all firmware revisions .70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Modbus Database Modbus function codes are shown in hexadecimal th notation. The 4 digit (from the right) of the data point address defines the data type.

TB-970802 ALL.70+

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents .........................................4 I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment..........................12 For Example: ..........................................................................................................................12

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................... 12 Address Ranges - Future Expansion........................................................................... 12

Scope All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this technical bulletin.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The following are the data types within the database: Digital Flag Bits

: Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and command bits. All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 01 and written to using function codes 05 and 0F . Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte packed data that is sent in the byte order they are prepared (not word order). Points are packed eight to a byte, packing from least significant to most significant Unused bit positions within a byte are cleared on transmission from the Omni and ignored by the Omni when receiving. Writing to status points is allowed but normally is pointless as the status point will be refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.

16-bit Integer Registers

: All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS byte. Valid addresses for this type of data are: X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.

8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function code 10 (note that function code 06 is not available on this data type). Byte order transmitted is as you would type it. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc. 32-bit Integer Registers

: Formatted as two’s complement. All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS word, LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS word then LS byte of LS word. Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.

2


TB-970802 ALL.70+

TB-970802


32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function 03 and written to using function codes 06 and 10. Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign bit/Exponent byte, LS Exponent bit/MS mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa byte then LS mantissa byte. Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX i.e. 7210, 17006 etc. 16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via Modbus function code 03 and written to using function code 10 (note that function code 06 is not available for this data type). Byte order transmitted is as you would type it. Valid addresses for this type of data are: 14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.

TB-970802 ALL.71+


3


Technical Bulletin

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups. Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the Omni before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together because it is related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific process. The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents

DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE

APPLICABLE MODBUS FUNCTION CODES (HEX)

COMMENTS

Used to Read (Write)

03 00001

Mixed

03 (06) (10) 03

00201

Mixed

03 (06) (10) 03

4

00401

Mixed

0701

Mixed

03

0702

Mixed

03

0703

Mixed

03

0704

Mixed

03

0705

Mixed

03

0706

Mixed

03

0707

Mixed

03

0708

Mixed

03

0709

Mixed

03

0710

Mixed

03

03 (06) (10)


User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User-defined array - Modicon compatible. User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User defined array - Modicon compatible. User-defined read only packet - Omni native mode. User defined array - Modicon compatible. #1 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #2 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #3 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #4 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #5 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #6 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #7 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #8 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #9 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. #10 User defined data archive record - Firmware Revisions .70+.

TB-970802 ALL.70+

TB-970802


Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents (Continued)

DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS


0711

Mixed

03

0712

Mixed

03

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

Status

01

1001 to 1099 1101 to 1199 1201 to 1299 1301 to 1399 1401 to 1499 1501 to 1699 1701 to 1799 1801 to 1899 1901 to 1999 1301 to 1399 2001 to 2100 2101 to 2199 2201 to 2299 2301 to 2399

TB-970802 ALL.71+


Alarm/Event Log archive record Firmware Revisions .70+. Audit Log archive record - Firmware Revision Versions .70+.

Point 1600 is a dummy point included to concatenate tables 15XX and 16XX.

Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).

5


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS


2401 to 2499 2501 to 2699 2701 to 2799 2801 to 2899 2901 to 2999 3001 to 3099 3101 to 3199 3201 to 3299 3301 to 3399 3401 to 3499 3501 to 3599 3601 to 3699 3701 to 3799 3801 to 3899 3901 to 3999

6

Status

01

Status

01

Status & Command

01, (05), (OF)

Status

01

Status

01

16-bit Integer Register

03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)




TB-970802 ALL.70+

TB-970802



DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



TB-970802 ALL.71+

8-character ASCII String

03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)

32-bit Integer 2s Complement

03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)




7


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



8


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE Floating Point

03, (06), (10)

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 22/26.71+ only.


03, (06), (10)

32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware Revision 23.70+ only).


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)

32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+ only).


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address). Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).

TB-970802 ALL.70+

TB-970802



DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



TB-970802 ALL.71+


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

ASCII Text Buffers

41, (42)

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

Applicable to Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only. Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte buffers per data point .

Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address).


9


Technical Bulletin


DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS



10


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)


03, (10)

Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02 (illegal data address). 32-bit IEEE Floating Point

03, (06), (10)



TB-970802 ALL.70+

TB-970802



DATA POINT ADDRESS

DATA TYPE


COMMENTS


17001 to 17399 17401 to 17499 17501 to 17899 17901 to 18099 18101 to 18199 18200 to 49999

TB-970802 ALL.71+


03, (06), (10)


03, (06), (10)

Not applicable to Firmware Revisions 22 & 26.


03, (06), (10)

Not applicable to Firmware Revisions 21/25 & 22/26.


03, (06), (10)



03, (06), (10)




11


Technical Bulletin

I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These blocks in many cases are not connected. Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is different break up the poll request.

For Example: An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188 through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210 because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point 7201 are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed from a 1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and another for points 7201 through 7210.

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it may be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as multiple data points.

Address Ranges - Future Expansion Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support these address ranges.

12


TB-970802 ALL.70+


Date: 08

12

97


TB # 970803

Meter Factor Linearization Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2 and Volume 3, applicable to Firmware Revision 22.70+/26.70+. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Meter Factor Linearization Function .............................................................................. 2 Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions ................................................... 3

Scope Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization).

TB-970803 22/26.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Meter Factor Linearization Function Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity. The flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by applying a meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a ‘base meter factor curve’. The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the flowmeter at various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow rates. A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid viscosity. The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate points.

The MF is continuously adjusted for flowrate during a delivery. The MF is ‘flow weight’ averaged for the batch.

Prove Base Flowrate

Meter Factor The flow computer lifts or lowers the MF curve based on the MF obtained at the latest official flowmeter proving.

MF’s are normalized to the ‘Prove Base Flowrate’ for validation / comparison and historical archival purposes.

Flowrate

Fig. 1.

2

Base Meter Factor Curve


TB-970803 22/26.70+

TB-970803

Meter Factor Linearization

Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the base curve. The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the historical average of the last ‘n’ meter factors. Only normalized and implemented meter factors are included in the historical average. The number ‘n’ can be one through 10.

Test 2 - Maximum Deviation Allowed From The Average of The Last ‘n’ Meter Factors

Meter Factor at Actual Flowrate (Passes Test 1)

Historical Average of Last ‘n’ Meter Factors

Base MF Curve

Test 1 - Maximum Deviation Allowed From Base Curve

Fig. 2.

TB-970803 22/26.71+

Meter Factor Normalized to Prove Base Flowrate (Fails Test 2)

The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve


3


Date: 08

28

97


TB # 970804

Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 3, applicable to Revision 23.71/27.71. This bulletin was previously published with a different page format.

Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation Natural gas net volume and energy calculations apply to all gas flow computers, (firmware Revisions 23/27.71) shipped after July 1997. These calculations are considered using a gas chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific gravity (SG) and heating value (HV).

TB-970804 23/27.71+

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Basic Calculations ..............................................................................................2 Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume and Energy ...........................................................................................................2 Density of Air at Base Conditions .................................................................................. 2 Gas Relative Density (SG) ............................................................................................ 3 Gas Heating Value (HV) ................................................................................................ 3 Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed ................................................................... 3 No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required ................................................... 3 Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph ........................................... 4 Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data............................................................ 4 Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link ..................................................................... 4 Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxide.................. 4

Scope Firmware Revisions 23.71+ and 27.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation. This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. This bulletin covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific gravity (SG) and heating value (HV).

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured for each possible scenario.

Basic Calculations The basic calculations are: ❑ Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions ❑ Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value

(1) (2)

Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

(GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8

(3) (4) (5) (6)

Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods: Heating Value Calculation - The flow computer always calculates Heating Value using one of the mentioned standards, even if it is instructed not to use it. These calculated values are stored in the data base and can be used to compare against the values obtained from the GC or calorimeter. 7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV 7630=Mtr #2 calculated HV 7631=Mtr #3 calculated HV 7632=Mtr #4 calculated HV

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

GC Analysis HV Manual Override HV Live 4-20mA HV Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 (component analysis required)

(7) (8) (9) (10)

Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph Manual Overrides in the ‘Fluid Data Analysis’ menu Serial Communication Link Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2 (AGA 8 gross calculation methods only)

(11) (12) (13) (14)

Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume and Energy Density of Air at Base Conditions This entry is in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu. Setting this entry to ‘0’ ensures that ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering the ‘density of air at base conditions’ assuming a valid ‘gas relative density (SG)’ is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).

2


TB-970804 23/27.71+

TB-970804

Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy

Gas Relative Density (SG) This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘SG’ for all AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-20mA input of ‘SG’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘SG’ override if a GC is providing ‘gas relative density (SG)’ and a GC failure occurs. Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate ‘gas density at base conditions’ using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering the ‘gas relative density (SG)’ assuming a non zero ‘Density of Air @ Base Conditions’ is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page). When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas relative density (SG)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Gas Heating Value (HV) This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘HV’ for AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and #4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-20mA input of ‘HV’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘HV’ override if a GC is providing ‘gas heating value (HV)’ and a GC failure occurs. Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a ‘calculated gas heating value (HV)’ calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the ‘gas heating value (HV)’ entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976 calculation of ‘gas heating value (HV)’. When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas heating value (HV)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net Volume and Energy Flow.

No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required Select ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed.

TB-970804 23/27.71+


3


Technical Bulletin

Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph Select either ‘Never Use Fluid Data Overrides’ or ‘On Fail Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu to ensure that the GC data is used in place of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ overrides’.

Using the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the heating value and relative density calculated by ‘GC’ are used in the calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers after all the other components are numbered. Ignoring the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering ‘0’ for the component number for ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu.

Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.

Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.

Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxide Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. In the ‘Station Configure’ menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling factors in the ‘Station N2 / SG Setup’ menu. Note that override data fields in ‘Product #1’ entries of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs are used for HV, SG, N2 or CO2.

4


TB-970804 23/27.71+


Date: 09

01

97


TB # 970901

Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volumes 1, 3 and 4, and is applicable to firmware revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions .71+, relating to helical turbine flowmeters. This bulletin was previously published with a different page layout.

Pulse Fidelity Checking The dual pulse fidelity checking feature allows you to reduce flowmeter measurement uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or equipment failure.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Installation Practices ..........................................................................................2 How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .....................................3 Correcting Errors ................................................................................................3 Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients ........................................................... 3 Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse ....................................................... 3 Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ................................................................................... 4

Alarms and Displays ...........................................................................................4

Scope Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering Systems.

TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine or positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct configuration settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer. The two pulse trains are called the ‘A’ pulse and the ‘B’ pulse. In normal operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent method, requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are different for any reason. For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is probably unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly enhanced Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and alarming of error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such as a total failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses. No attempt is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added pulses. These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.

Installation Practices When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each pulse train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which will not be subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any regular occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or wiring to be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not intended to facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is prone to noise or transient pickup.

2


TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

TB-970901

Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples apart. MAXIMUM PULSE INPUT FREQUENCY

MAXIMUM PHASE SHIFT REQUIRED

1.5 kHz

45 degrees

3.0 kHz

90 degrees

6.0 kHz

180 degrees

Correcting Errors Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the A Pulse Train.

Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients INFO - A certainty of 85% is a conservative specification. Tests on production units show that a 95% detection is a more typical proportion. This is due to the time skew between pulse channels being closer to 1 µsec than 2 µsec.

Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time (during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.

Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be detected, alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse. Statistically though, worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are approximately 20:1 that the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse would mean accepting 20 times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is based on the ratio of the periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic time of the sample period (e.g.: 333.3µsec / 16µsec approximately equals 21).

TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+


3


Technical Bulletin

Total Failure of a Pulse Channel A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The flow computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the remaining pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).

Alarms and Displays To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at the start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical alarm log.

4


TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+


Date: 02

06

98


TB # 980201

Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in the User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Versions .71+.

Communication Options with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems - The Omni flow computer can communicate with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems via SIO modules in combination with APM or HPM modules. PLCG or CLM modules communicate directly with the Omni.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO....................................................2 FTA Array Points ........................................................................................................... 3 32-Bit Long Integer Variables .................................................................................................. 3

Configuring The Omni Flow Computer .......................................................................... 4 Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup.................................................. 4 Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni........ 4 Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables ............ 6

Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG)...............6 Selection of Communication Method................................................................8

Scope MVIP Testing - The Omni flow computer has been tested by Honeywell Phoenix as part of their MVIP certification program. Contact Honeywell at:

All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the capability of communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems. This is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.

(602) 313-5830

TB-980201 ALL.71+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each method are also discussed. Three types of serial communication modules are available:

1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.

2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG) 3) Communication Link Module (CLM) MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types (1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints, tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain amount of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the CLM is the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.

Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection. This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to the HPM system. The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O, analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics are as follows: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

2

Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits and parity selectable


TB-980201 ALL.71+

TB-980201


FTA Array Points Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM. This memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each HPM or APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between all the SIO modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512 bits of data and can hold one type of data variable. Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following: 512 32 16 16

Coils or Status points. 16 bit Short Integer registers IEEE Floating point variables 32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)

With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the types of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider converting them to long integers within the flow computer using variable statements). The limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni flow computers can be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example: Most applications require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and also alarm statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per Omni and that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be sufficient to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely unlikely, as there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).

32-Bit Long Integer Variables Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omni’s experience has shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs to write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that there has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as shown below and on following page.

TB-980201 ALL.71+

Long Integer

IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Current MF in Use Meter #2 - Current MF in Use Meter #3 - Current MF in Use Meter #4 - Current MF in Use

5113 5213 5313 5413

7796 7797 7798 7799

Station Running Batch Size Station Next Batch Size

5819 5820

7787 7783


3


Technical Bulletin

Long Integer

IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Next Batch Size

5820

7783

Meter #2 - Running Batch Size Meter #2 - Next Batch Size

5825 5826

7788 7784


5831 5832

7789 7785


5837 5838

7790 7786

Configuring The Omni Flow Computer Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA settings and make sure to select ‘Modicon Compatible’. In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data as efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are available: 1) Custom data packet arrays 2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable Statements Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.

Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses 0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom packet setup menus in the flow computer. When the Omni serial port is set as being ‘Modicon Compatible’ the custom packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data packet/array. This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with one custom packet.

Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom packet data: Read Multiple Registers Write Multiple Registers Write Single Register

4


03 16 06

TB-980201 ALL.71+

TB-980201


From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database Boolean point address.

CAUTION!

Because Boolean data is byte packed the user must ensure that the number of Booleans included in the custom packet are grouped in such a way as to ensure that the packet always contains an even number of bytes (i.e. the function codes we are using expect to be dealing with ‘registers’ and you can’t have half a register).

Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at address 0001: Packet #01 Point # # of Points Packet #02 Point # # of Points Packet #03 Point # # of Points Packet #04 Point # # of Points Packet #05 Point # # of Points Packet #06 Point # # of Points Packet #07 Point # # of Points Packet #08 Point # # of Points Packet #09 Point # # of Points Packet #10 Point # # of Points Packet #11 Point # # of Points Packet #12 Point # # of Points Packet #13 Point # # of Points Packet #14 Point # # of Points Packet #15 Point # # of Points Packet #16 Point # # of Points Packet #17 Point # # of Points Packet #18 Point # # of Points Packet #19 Point # # of Points Packet #20 Point # # of Points

………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… ………… …………

7101 8 7201 8 7301 8 7401 8 5101 4 5201 4 5301 4 5401 4 3101 4 3201 4 3301 4 3401 4 1105 48 1205 48 1305 48 1405 48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ADDRESS 0001 - 0016 0017 - 0032

FTA ARRAY # USED 1 Total 16 Floats 1

0033 - 0048

2

0049 - 0064

2

0065 - 0072

3

0073 - 0080

3

0081 - 0088

3

0089 - 0096

3

0097 - 0100

4

0101 - 0104

4

0105 - 0108

4

0109 - 0112

4

0113 - 0115

5

0116 - 0118

5

0119 - 0121

5

0122 - 0124

5

Total 16 Floats

Total 16 Long Int.

Total 16 Short Int.

Total 24 Packed Bytes

These packets are available but are not used in this example.

The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data packet and 5 FTA arrays.

TB-980201 ALL.71+


5


Technical Bulletin

Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located at: Boolean Scratchpad Variables Integer Scratchpad Variables String Scratchpad Variables Long Integer Scratchpad Variables Floating Point Scratchpad Variables

1501 3501 4501 5501 7501

through through through through through

1699 3599 4599 5599 7599

User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows: Example: 1025: 1026:

1501=1105:1169 1565=1205:1269

Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564 Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628

User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as follows: Example: 7025: 7026:

7501=7101:7103 7504=7201:7203

Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503 Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506

Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) The PLCG is meant to receive ‘register’ data from PLCs representing unscaled analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling or alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in IEEE floating point format or 32-bit long integer values. The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a flow computer long integer type. The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as shown below:

6

Mtr#1

Mtr#2

Mtr#3

Mtr#4

Station

Current Gross Flow Rates Current Net Flow Rates Current Mass Flow Rates Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates

3142 3140 3144 3149

3242 3240 3244 3249

3342 3340 3344 3349

3442 3440 3444 3449

3804 3802 3806

Current Temperature Current Pressure Current Analog Density

3147 3146 3148

3247 3246 3248

3347 3346 3348

3447 3446 3448

3809 3808 3810


TB-980201 ALL.71+

TB-980201


Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an Application Module (AM) for processing. There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:

1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows: Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register

2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at 65536 within the Omni data base shown below. Gross Totalizer Net Totalizer Mass Totalizer S&W Corrected Net Totalizer

Mtr#1

Mtr#2

Mtr#3

Mtr#4

Station

3143 3141 3145 3150

3243 3241 3245 3250

3343 3341 3345 3350

3443 3441 3445 3450

3805 3803 3807

The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the flow computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the TDC3000 system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is limited to one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the flow computer and are of limited use. Using ‘Variable Statements’ within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16-bit register that can be ‘read’ by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog (assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough variable statements (64 are provided). Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only 7025:

3501=7105*#10

3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of degrees

Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 °F 7026:

7105-#50

Adjust for 50 degree zero point

7027:

3502=7026*#40.95

100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch integer 3502

Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that inputs outside of the expected range cause ‘bad process value’ alarms in the PLCG.

TB-980201 ALL.71+


7


Technical Bulletin

Selection of Communication Method Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing reasonable access to the flow computer’s database and requiring no custom driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of the built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be used. For this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for instances where one already exists in a system and has an open port and an APM or HPM is not available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible solution but the cost impact of any custom software driver development must be determined. Omni does not know whether a compatible protocol driver exists at this time, please contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.

8


TB-980201 ALL.71+


Date: 02

23

98

Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani

TB # 980202

Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer Contents Scope....................................................................................................................1

User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 2, Chapter 3 “Computer Batching Operations”, applicable to Revision 20.71/24.71+.

Calculations Performed ......................................................................................2

Batch Recalculation - The batch recalculation feature allows you to adjust quantities of the previous 4 batches at measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values only become available after the batch has been delivered.

How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ..............................5

Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket ....................................................................................................................3 Step 1 ............................................................................................................................ 3 Step 2 ............................................................................................................................ 3 Step 3 ............................................................................................................................ 3 Step 4 ............................................................................................................................ 4 Step 5 ............................................................................................................................ 4 Previous Batch Data that Is Writable............................................................................. 6

Conclusion...........................................................................................................7

Scope Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 24.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K Factor Linearization.

TB-980202 20/24.71+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.

Calculations Performed ❑ The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average temperature and pressure calculated during the batch. ❑ Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated Ctl and Cpl. ❑ The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the sample analysis S&W%. ❑ Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV and Csw factor.

2


TB-980202 20/24.71+

TB-980202


Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket

CAUTION!

To ensure that previous batch data is correctly recalculated do not recalculate a batch close to ending a current batch in progress.

Step 1 Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni LCD screen will display:

! "

TIP - Note that only 4 lines can be displayed at one time. Use the scroll up or down arrows keys to display additional text.

Step 2 Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4 completed batches numbered as: 1 = last batch completed to 4 = oldest batch completed. Press [↓] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a number between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previous batch’ data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)

Step 3 Enter Password when requested.

TB-980202 20/24.71+


3


Technical Bulletin

Step 4 Scroll to either “Enter API60” or “Enter SG60”. Type in a valid value and press [Enter].

Step 5 Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter]. At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the report to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory. Batch report data can also be captured in ‘Raw Data Archive RAM’ using the trigger Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXXXX where the number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number (5n90) and the number after the ‘-‘ is the number of times that the batch has been recalculated (3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to ‘0’ at the end of a batch and increments each time the batch is recalculated.

4


TB-980202 20/24.71+

TB-980202


How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches. Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within the Modbus database. Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have: Note: The second digit of the index number (indicated as “n”) defines which meter run you are working with (i.e., n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).

❑ Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress – Gross Totalizer is 5n01 ❑ Modbus address of Previous Batch – Gross Totalizer is 5n50 ❑ Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is mapped is 3n51 As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:

1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data 2) #2 previous batch data replaces #3 previous batch data 3) #1 previous batch data replaces #2 previous batch data 4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data 5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value ‘1’ so that the Modbus database addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended. This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of a batch and gets it’s data from the Modbus database, includes the correct information. The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows typical data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50. The data read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.

TB-980202 20/24.71+


5


STEP

DESCRIPTION

Technical Bulletin

ST

PREV. BATCH

3

RD

PREV. BATCH

TH

1 PREV. BATCH

5n01

5n50

5n50

5n50

5n50

1

2

3

4

Value contained in Pointer register 3n51.

2

ND

CURRENT BATCH

4 PREV. BATCH

1

First batch running.

12340

0

0

0

0

2

First batch ended.

23450

12340

0

0

0

3

Second batch ended.

34560

23450

12340

0

0

4

Third batch ended.

45670

34560

23450

12340

0

5

Fourth batch ended.

56780

45670

34560

23450

12340

6

Fifth batch ended with sixth batch running.

6123

56780

45670

34560

23450

Previous Batch Data that Is Writable Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions are ‘read only’ for reasons of data integrity.

METER #1

METER #2

METER #3

METER #4

STATION

SG 60 or Reference Density (Rev. 24.71)

8508

8608

8708

8808

8908

API 60 Gravity

8519

8619

8719

8819

8919

8517

8617

8717

8817

8917

2756

2757

2758

2759

1798

Sediment and Water Percentage (BS&W) Command Boolean which triggers the recalculation

6


TB-980202 20/24.71+

TB-980202


Conclusion Note: Setting these registers via Variable Statements is not allowed and will not produce the expected results

The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one set of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run #1, 3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed. API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by writing a ‘1’ to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.

TB-980202 20/24.71+


7


Date: 03

10

98

Author(s): Richard Dojs

TB # 980301

Replacing EPROM Chips User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, applicable to all firmware revisions.

Contents Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1

DANGER!

Instructions..........................................................................................................2

Scope Electrical Shock Hazard! Dangerous AC voltages are present on the power supply module and ribbon cable when the unit is AC powered. To avoid electrical shock which could be fatal, It is imperative that you remove all power before opening and disassembling the flow computer and take any other necessary precautions. Only qualified technicians should work on any internal circuitry. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is not responsible for personal injuries or accidents that may occur when working on flow computer circuitry.

CAUTION!

Static electricity can damage flow computer circuitry. Take approved static device handling precautions when working on the flow computer.

The observations and instructions for replacing Erasable Programmable Readonly Memory (EPROM) chips contained in this technical bulletin are applicable to all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is strongly recommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel.

Abstract You will need to replace EPROMs usually to upgrade your flow computer firmware. Certain critical steps must be performed when replacing EPROMs. It is strongly recommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel. Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must be observed: ❑ Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered by relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages are present on the power supply module and ribbon cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason it is important to remove all power before disassembling the computer. ❑ Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types of clothing. The flow computer’s printed circuits can be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved static device handling precautions when working on the flow computer. After replacement, the old EPROMs must be returned to the manufacturing department of Omni Flow Computers, Inc. in Stafford, Texas. A Business Reply Label is available for this purpose.

TB-980301 All Revs

1


Technical Bulletin

Instructions To replace EPROM chips, follow these instructions: (1) Stop flow then end the batch. Record all data by retrieving all reports and saving and printing the flow computer configuration using OmniCom Software. Verify that the file in OmniCom is the correct version. (2) Enter the Password Maintenance Mode and enter the privileged password for your computer. Scroll down to ‘Reset All Ram ?’ and enter [Y]. For Omni flow computers manufactured after 1995, resetting all RAM will not affect totalizer and calibration data. (3) Remove all power from the computer and completely disconnect all AC/DC power. (4) If you have an Omni 3000 Flow Computer, remove the Digital I/O Module from Slot #2. This will allow better access to the CPU Module in Slot #1.

CAUTION! When removing the CPU Module, take extreme care not to bend or fold the membrane keypad ribbon cable too sharply, or the metallic traces could be damaged.

Location of EPROM Chips- The location of the EPROM chips on the CPU Module is shown in Fig. 1. The EPROMs are the two large 32-pin Integrated Circuits (ICs or “chips”) with labels marked U3 and U4. Note the position of the orientation notches at one end of each EPROM.

(5) The CPU is connected to the front panel via a short ribbon cable that is folded in a specific manner. Carefully remove the CPU Module just far enough to unplug this ribbon cable. When removing the CPU Module, allow the connector edge of the module to tilt towards the back of the flow computer. This will enable the Ni-Cad battery on the CPU Module to slide past the program inhibit switch on the front panel assembly. Take special care not to bend or fold the membrane keypad ribbon cable too sharply, or the metallic traces could be damaged. (6) Using an EPROM extractor or small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully pry up one end of the EPROM and repeat the prying at its other end. This will allow the EPROM to be removed without bending any pins. (7) Lay the module on a non-metallic surface to prevent shorting out the NiCad Battery. Install the new EPROMs making sure that the orientation notches are correctly positioned and that no pins are bent under the chip. To install, line up one edge of the EPROM pins making sure that the opposite edge is lined up with the socket holes, and firmly press the EPROM into the socket. (8) Reinstall the CPU Module in the reverse order and apply power. (9) Initialize the computer using “OMNI” as the password. Repeat Step (2) to reset all RAM, and reintialize the flow computer once again using “OMNI” as the password. (10) Manually create a new file based on the oil file printout and upload the newly created configuration file to the OMNI. Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with your new EPROMs. Please return the old EPROMs to Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

2


TB-980301 All Revs

TB-980301

Replacing EPROM Chips

IMPORTANT!

TROUBLESHOOTING TIP: Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM - If the Omni Display does not come on after resetting all RAM, proceed as follows: (1) Disconnect all power to the Omni. (2) Remove CPU Module and also remove the System Watchdog Jumper J3 (See Fig. 1) on the CPU. (3) Reinstall CPU Module with Jumper J3 removed. (4) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be on. (5) Power down again the flow computer and remove CPU Board. (6) Replace Jumper J3 and then reinstall the CPU Module. (7) Once again, apply power to the flow computer. Display should be normal. If you encounter any other difficulties, please contact our technical staff.

Math Processor

Central Processor

Program EPROM

Program RAM

Archive RAM

Backup Batttery

J1

J2

EPROM Size 1 OR 4 Meg Bit Select 4 Meg As Shown

J3

Fig. 1.

System Watchdog J3 In = Enabled J3 Out = Disabled (Always Enabled)

Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of EPROM ICs and Jumper J3.

Phone: (281) 240-6161 Fax: (281) 240-6162 E-mail: [email protected]

TB-980301 All Revs


3


Date: 04

06

98


TB # 980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Version .70+. This is an updated edition that replaces previously published bulletins under the same title. See also the following: ❑ TB-980402 - Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application ❑ Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules

Peer-to-Peer Communications - The peer-to-peer communication feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers and other devices in RS-485 serial communications mode, and up to 12 using RS-232-C communications.

Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers.

TB-980401 ALL.70+

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Determining Which Computer Will Be Master..................................................2 Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link.........................................3 Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems ....................................3 Wiring Options.....................................................................................................4 RS-232-C Wiring Requirements.................................................................................... 4 RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements...................................................... 5 RS-485 Wiring Requirements........................................................................................ 6

Setting up Transactions .....................................................................................8 What Modbus Function Codes Are Used..........................................................8 Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected for Port #2 ..................................................................................................................8 Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meters ......................9 The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device........................................... 11 Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions................................................................... 11

Scope All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the peerto-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data being transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction list within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty transaction will be treated as the end of list). Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.

Determining Which Computer Will Be Master Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A time-out occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and the broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in sequence by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new Modbus ID. Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a master) requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2) Last Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks). These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows: Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-to-peer function. Modbus ID’s for master devices in the link must be assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain any missing ID’s (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance). Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master. Any master failing to find the ‘next master’ will keep trying Modbus ID’s until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search again at Modbus ID 1. Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).

2


TB-980401 ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link The following settings must be used: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Modbus RTU Protocol 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity

While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide maximum performance.

Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems INFO - It is important to note that in a peer-to-peer system, only the flow computers that have a nonzero entry for ‘Next Master in Sequence’ are limited to using Serial Port #2, all of the other flow computers are simply acting as Modbus slaves and can use any valid Modbus serial port.

TB-980401 ALL.70+

The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with a variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLC’s etc. In these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the message response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.


3


Technical Bulletin

Wiring Options RS-232-C Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode. INFO - The Omni Flow Computer uses a proprietary ‘tristatable’ RS-232-Compatible serial port, which unlike a normal RS-232 port, can be multidropped, interconnecting up to 12 flow computers or other serial devices.

Om ni #1

Om ni #2

Om ni #3

Om ni #4

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

Fig. 1.

4

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-232-C Termination Option


TB-980401 ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

7 8 9

7 8 9

10 11 12

10 11 12

Fig. 2.

TB-980401 ALL.70+

RS-232 to 485 Converter (Disable Echo) R S 2 3 2

TX-A TX-B RX-A RX-B

PLC R S B 4 8 5 A

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module


5


Technical Bulletin

RS-485 Wiring Requirements Multivariable Transmitting Devices - In addition to the Serial I/O Module # 686205, the flow computer must also have an MV Module to communicate with multivariable transmitters. This serial module is jumpered to IRQ 3 when used in combination with an MV Module. Without an MV Module, the jumper is placed at IRQ 2. The MV Module can only be used with this serial module (686205) and is not compatible with the Serial I/O Module # 68-6005. For more information, see Technical Bulletin # TB-980303.

The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485 communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.

Omni #1

Omni #2

Omni #3

Omni #4

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

6 7

6 (B)

8

8

8

7

9

9

9

10

10

10

(A)

RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

11

(A)

11

12 RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

(B)

8

9

12

6

7

6 (B)

10 11

Fig. 3.

7

6 (B)

(A)

12 RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

11

(A)

12 RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop


TB-980401 ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12 RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

Fig. 4.

TB-980401 ALL.70+

(B) 7 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

PLC R S A 4 8 5 B

RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop


7


Technical Bulletin

Setting up Transactions To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each transaction: Modbus Broadcast Address ‘0’ - This address only applies to write transactions.

: The Modbus address of the target device. This can be any valid Modbus address including the broadcast address ‘0’. Read or Write : Select the appropriate operation. Source Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the variable in the source device. For a read operation the slave is the source. For a write operation the source is the Omni flow computer master. Number of Points : The number of consecutive data variables to transfer between devices, starting at the source point number or address. Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the variable in the destination device. For a write operation the slave is the destination. For a read operation the destination is the Omni flow computer master. Slave ID

What Modbus Function Codes Are Used The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction. Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8 to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for writes.

Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected for Port #2 Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-to-peer port. 1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation. 2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to transfer, rather than the number of data variables.

8


TB-980401 ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meters The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid density and MM transducer alarm status. The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2

1 2

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

7 8

7 8

9 10 11 12

9 10 11 12

RS-232 to 485 Converter (Disable Echo) R S 2 3 2

TX-A TX-B RX-A RX-B

Micro Motion RFT #2 R S 27 (Z22) 4 26 (D22) 8 5 R 27 (Z22) S 26 (D22) 4 8 5 Micro Motion RFT #1

Note: Termination Points 26 & 27 correspond to the explosion-proof field-mount RFT9739; and (D22) & (Z22) to the rack-mount version of the model.

Fig. 5.

TB-980401 ALL.70+

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter


9


Technical Bulletin

The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485, where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739 transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205. Micro Motion Elite Model RFT9739 Transmitter Connectivity Both field-mount (explosionproof) and rack-mount models of the RFT9739 transmitter have the A and B channels reversed to the industry standard applied to Omni flow computers; i.e., the flow computer’s A channel connects to Micro Motion’s B channel. Omni has tested this connectivity with the Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount Transmitter, but connecting to the rack-mount version has not yet been tested. Information on this connectivity has been provided by Micro Motion, Inc. Please contact Micro Motion for further information.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

7 (B) 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

7 (B) 8 9 10 (A) 11 12

RS-485 Two-wire Terminated

Fig. 6.

10

RS-485 Two-wire Non-terminated

Note: Termination resistors may be required with some installations.

Micro Motion RFT9739 #1

Micro Motion RFT9739 #2

(B) 26 (D22)

(B) 26 (D22)

(A) 27 (Z22)

120Ω

(A) 27 (Z22)

Note: Termination Points 26 & 27 correspond to the explosion-proof field-mount RFT9739; and (D22) & (Z22) to the rack-mount version of the model.

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multidrop.


TB-980401 ALL.70+

TB-980401

Peer-to-Peer Basics

The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-topeer port (Serial Port #2). 1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation. 2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to transfer, rather than the number of data variables.

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions Note: Meter Run #1 Density I/O point must be assigned to ‘99’ and Serial Port #2 must be assigned to be ‘Modicon Compatible’ for this to work correctly. Note also that the MM Modicon documentation manual lists the flowing density as point number 20249. This is common with Modicon compatible devices. Where there is a 5 digit address, drop the first digit and subtract 1 from the point address before using it in a transaction.

The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid from the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point 7108 (unfactored density, meter run #1). Transaction #1

Target Slave ID Read/Write ? Source Point # # of Points Destination Pnt #

...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 R 248 2 7108

The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and logged just as though they were flow computer alarms. Transaction #2


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 R 0 1 3118

The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is required and how many meter runs are being used.

TB-980401 ALL.70+


11


Date: 04

07

98

Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott

TB # 980402

Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, and is applicable to all firmware revisions Versions .70+. This is an updated edition of the bulletin previously published under the same title.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 RS-232-C Wiring Requirements .........................................................................2 RS-485 Wiring Requirements .............................................................................3 Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications....3 Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.................5 Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .......................6 Redirecting the Control Signals.........................................................................6

Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Schemes - Redundancy schemes allows for uninterrupted measurement and control functionality by interconnecting two identically equipped and configured flow computers.

Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers ...7 Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs ........................................................................7 Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers ...........................................................................................................7

Scope All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on Serial Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow computer schemes.

TB-980402 ALL.70+

1


Technical Bulletin

Abstract Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices, important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In this case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the new master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch over and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors cannot be cleared.

RS-232-C Wiring Requirements The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected in a two-wire multi-drop mode.

Fig. 1.

2

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

11

11

12

12

Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C Serial Port)


TB-980402 ALL.70+

TB-980402


RS-485 Wiring Requirements The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multi-drop mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.

Omni #1

Omni #2

TB3 (TB2)

TB3 (TB2)

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6


Fig. 2.


Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow Computer Scheme

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications The ‘Activate Redundancy Mode’ entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu. Answering ‘Yes’ causes the ‘Next Master’ and ‘Last Master’ entries to disappear from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.

TB-980402 ALL.70+


3


Technical Bulletin

Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control: Transactions #1 & #2 Both primary and secondary flow computers must have these entries if they will be used for PID control. ❑ Transaction #1 sends the primary flow computer PID control mode settings (Auto/Manual, Local/Remote) to the secondary flow computer. ❑ Transaction #2 sends the primary flow computer PID set points and valve position values to the secondary flow computer.

Transaction #1


...…..... 2 ...…..... W ...…..... 13462 ...…..... 8 ...…..... 13470

Transaction #2


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 W 7601 20 7601

More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be transferred, meter factors for example. Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications maintain historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the meter factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As only the primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special variables with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of revisions 22 and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the peer-to-peer link, the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor result obtained when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove result.

Transactions #3 & #4 (Applicable to Firmware Versions 22 & 26 Only) Both primary and secondary flow computers must have these entries. ❑ Transaction #3 is used to send the prove meter factor (5904) and the number of the meter last proved (5905) to the secondary flow computer. ❑ Transaction #4 confirms that the meter factor has been implemented in the secondary flow computer by reading back a copy of the number of the meter run just proved (5906).

4

The following two transactions are required: Transaction #3


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 W 5904 2 5904

Transaction #4


...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...…..... ...….....

2 R 5906 1 5906


TB-980402 ALL.70+

TB-980402


Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers When ‘Activate Redundancy’ is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer (primary and secondary). These database variables are: 2863

Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is functioning correctly. Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy scheme. Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false. Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.

2864

2713 2714

Redundancy Failover Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O points may be used to provide a failover switching mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is an example that shows digital I/O 9 through 12 being used

O m ni #1

O m ni #2

TB 1

TB 1

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8 O th e r M a s te r S ta tu s (2 7 1 4 )

9 M a s te r S ta tu s (2 8 6 4 )

10

O th e rs W a tc hd o g (2 7 1 3 )

11

W a tc h d o g O u t (2 8 6 3 )

12

M a s te r S ta tu s (2 8 6 4 ) O th e rs W a tc hd o g (2 7 1 3 )

10 11

W a tc h d o g O u t (2 8 6 3 )

12

TB 11

TB 11

+

+

-

-

Fig. 3.

TB-980402 ALL.70+

O th e rs M a s te r S ta tu s (2 7 1 4 )

9

Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring


5


Technical Bulletin

Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data base points are available to provide this function, they are: 2715

Note: The 2716 command will not work if the other flow computer’s watchdog status is not active (i.e., the other computer must be functioning correctly before this flow computer can give up mastership).

2716

Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true. Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically relinquish mastership when this happens. Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this happens.

Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on, they do not need to be turned off.

Redirecting the Control Signals In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions. One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the digital output assigned to indicate ‘Mastership Status’ from one of the flow computers.

6


TB-980402 ALL.70+

TB-980402


Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor. As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer. Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow computers.

Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary depending upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it matches the internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel was originally calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the 250 ohm resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.

Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in parallel (ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as outputs may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog outputs described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay isolated are sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need to be relay isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to control the prover while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will need to determine which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is possible or likely that the slave computer would activate the output when not in control.

TB-980402 ALL.70+


7


Date: 05

03

98


TB # 980501

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in User Manual, applicable to Firmware Revision 21.72+/25.72+ and 23/72.+/27.72+.

Scope....................................................................................................................2 Abstract ................................................................................................................2 Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV Combo Modules ..................................................................................................3 Serial Communication Module Compatibility ................................................................. 3 Other Know System Incompatibilities ............................................................................ 3 Equipment Ordering Limitations .................................................................................... 3

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ...............................................4 Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................... 4 Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations.................................................................. 4

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module...........................................5 Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module .............................................................. 6 Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports........................ 6

Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter ............8 Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer......................................9 3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections................................................................... 10 3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ...................................... 10 Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................... 11 Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter ........... 11

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.........................................................................................................12 Configuring the Meter Run I/O..................................................................................... 12 Selecting the Device Type ......................................................................................................12 Selecting the SV Combo Module Port.....................................................................................12 Select Modbus Address for 3095FB .......................................................................................12 What I/O Points are Used and Why ........................................................................................12

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed .............................................. 14

Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer ...........................................................................................................14 Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms......................................... 15 Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer ......................................... 15

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations ...........16

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

1


Technical Bulletin

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel.......................16 Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters .........................17 Wiring Issues ...............................................................................................................17 Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB...............18 Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration.....................................................19

Scope Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical bulletin. This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.

Abstract The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T). Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and 27 which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four meter runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable transmitters. Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at 9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to use one of the flow computer’s standard serial ports to communicate with the 3095FB but this would have caused several problems: ❑ Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs and OmniCom etc. ❑ Extra 'A’ type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the multivariables. Omni chose to design a special ‘SV’ combo module which includes two 2 wire RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs: ❑ Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and Temperature inputs. ❑ Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc. ❑ Twelve Digital I/O for logic control ❑ Six digital to analog outputs. This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable transmitters is desirable.

2


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV Combo Modules The ‘SV’ combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters. Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these ‘SV’ combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the ‘Serial I/O Combo Modules’ that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA devices.

Serial Communication Module Compatibility ‘SV’ combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are incompatible with the 'SV’ combo modules. The flow computer will not be able to initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank LCD screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds). The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485 compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the ‘IRQ 3’ position when an ‘SV’ combo module is present (see technical bulletin TB-980503 for more details).

Other Known System Incompatibilities At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an ‘SV’ combo module and an ‘HV’ (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.

Equipment Ordering Limitations Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with ‘SV’ combo modules. Any system which requires ‘SV’ combo modules, must be purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


3


Technical Bulletin

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires and two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in a ‘point-to-point’ or ‘multi-drop’ wiring configuration.

Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations The advantages of multi-drop configurations are: ❑ Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon equipment placement. ❑ One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.

Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are: ❑ Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within the flow computer for that meter run multivariable. ❑ Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters. Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply take a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration. This is because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus address defaulted to ‘1’ and there may already be a transmitter in the loop using that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address as an existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is in the wiring, ‘termination’ jumpers may or may not be required on the replacement transmitter (see below). ❑ Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485 link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop loop.

4


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues ❑ RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485 transmission wires must have only one beginning and one end (they cannot be used in a ‘star’ configuration). Both ends of the wire must be terminated, meaning only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a point-to-point configuration, this simply means both the flow computer and transmitter are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user must ensure that only the end devices have the termination jumpers in. This means that some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in while others may have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may not be at the end of the wire so it may or may not be one of the terminated devices. ❑ Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500 msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for best performance.

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module The Multi Variable ‘SV’ Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which must be installed correctly (see figure below).

Port 2 (4) Tx/RTS Leds Red Recv Led Grn

Port 1 (3) Tx/RTS Leds Red Recv Led Grn

SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated Both Jmpers Out = Port Un-Terminated Always RTS SV Address Jumper Jmp Out =1st SV Combo nd Jmp In = 2 SV Combo Always IRQ 2 2

RTS T E R M

GND T E R M

RTS

GND

T E R M

T E R M

BRD SEL 4 IRQ

SV Port 1 ( 3 )

SV Port 2 ( 4 )

Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module

Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module Fig. 1. SV Combo Module

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


5


Technical Bulletin

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module The flow computer can accept up to two ‘SV’ Combo modules, each with a unique address determined by the ‘BRD SEL’ jumper shown in Figure 1. With no jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a ‘SV1’ module is installed and SV ports 1 and 2 will be available. With a jumper installed in the ‘BRD SEL’ position the flow computer will report that a ‘SV2’ module is installed and SV ports 3 and 4 will be available. Note that a system can have a ‘SV2’ module without a ‘SV1’ being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be available.

Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a ‘star’ configuration with more than two ends or a ‘loop’ configuration with no ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered to provide termination.

3095 FB MV ID #1 Omni Flow Computer

3095 FB MV ID #2

3095 FB MV ID #3

This Device Must Be Terminated

3095 FB MV ID #4


Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Fig. 2. Terminated

Both jumpers marked ‘TERM’ must be installed to terminate a flow computer ‘SV’ port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are shown later in this document.

3095 FB MV ID #1


3095 FB MV ID #4

Omni Flow Computer

3095 FB MV ID #2

3095 FB MV ID #3


Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer NonFig. 3. terminated

6


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #2

3095 FB MV ID #3

3095 FB MV ID #4

Omni Flow Computer

Star Configuration Not Allowed!

Fig. 4.

All 4 MV Ports of Flow Computer Must Be Terminated

Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

3095 FB MV ID #1

Omni Flow Computer Using Independent MV Ports

Fig. 5.

Modbus IDs of 3095FBs Can Be The Same In This Point to Point Configuration

All Four 3095FB Transmitters Must Be Terminated

Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration

In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an independent ‘SV’ port of the flow computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is now connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus address ‘1’, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in this document.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


7


Technical Bulletin

Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow Computer.

PULL DOWN (B) PULL UP (A)

AC TERMINATION

All ON = Terminated All OFF = Un-Terminated

o OFF o ON o SECURITY o o

o o o o o

Security OFF to allow configuration

ON 1 2 3 S1 S2 ON 1 2

All ON For 9600 Baud

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches Fig. 6. and Jumpers

Place the security jumper in the ‘OFF’ position, this allows the Omni flow computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal configuration matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2 must be set to 9600; i.e., in the ‘ON’ position. The termination switches should be all ‘ON’ or all ‘OFF’ depending upon whether device termination is required.

8


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer TERMINAL

Fig. 7. Module

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1

Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire

2

Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire

3

Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire

4

Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire

5

Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

6

Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

7

4-20mA Analog Output # 5

8


9


10


11


12


Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo

A RS-485 B + PWR -

Fig. 8.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals


9


Technical Bulletin

3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and B terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo module terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair unshielded wire with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run. Use 22 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded twisted pair cable can be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a higher capacitance per foot thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to less than 4000 ft.

3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements Terminals marked ‘+’ and ‘-‘ are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC. to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best performance should be shielded and twisted.

4000 Ft. Maximum

Omni Flow Computer

Termination ON No Stubs over 6 ft.

RS 485 Bus

A MV Port #1 B A MV Port #2 B A B A MV Port #4 B MV Port #3

7.5 VDC to 24 VDC Power Supply 150 mA Minimum + -

A RS-485 B

A RS-485 B

A RS-485 B

+ PWR -

+ PWR -

+ PWR -

Termination OFF

Termination OFF

Termination ON

Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095 Fig. 9. Transmitters

10


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


Isolation and Transient Protection Issues The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation between the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages between the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable common mode voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB. The Omni flow computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common mode voltages of +/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground. Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install the optional ‘Transient Protection Terminal Block’ described in Appendix B of the Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).

Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made ‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual (publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB transmitter.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


11


Technical Bulletin

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter Configuring the Meter Run I/O Selecting the Device Type The existing ‘Select Turbine Y/N’ entry in the ‘Config Meter Run’ menu has been changed to ‘Select Device Type’. Valid selections at this point are: 0 1 2 3

= = = =

DP Sensor Turbine Meter 3095FB Multivariable SMV 3000 Multivariable

When ‘2’ is selected above the following entries appear:

Selecting the SV Combo Module Port The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are fitted in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module #1 is fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to have SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module #2 is the only SV module fitted.

Select Modbus Address for 3095FB In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is recommended that you select Modbus ID ‘1’ at this point. This is the default ID used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each 3095FB connected to a SV port must have it’s own address which can be between 1 and 247.

What I/O Points are Used and Why Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the 3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or H combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).

12


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION

6000 - 2A - 1B – 2SV

A1 Combo Module I/O Points

1-4


5-8

B1 Combo Module I/O Points

9 - 12

1

st

3095FB Configured Uses

DP=13, T=14, P=15

nd

2


DP=16, T=17, P=18

rd

3 3095FB Configured Uses

DP=19, T=20, P=21

th

DP=22, T=23, P=24

4 3095FB Configured Uses

Fig. 10.

I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1

EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION

6000 - 1A - 1E/D – 1SV


1-4

E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points

5-8

st


DP=9, T=10, P=11

nd


DP=12, T=13, P=14

rd


DP=15, T=16, P=17

th


DP=18, T=19, P=20

1

2 3

4

Fig. 11.

I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2

Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as ‘forward’ flow and a second meter run as ‘reverse’ flow. To do this, simply configure both meter runs as ‘Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable)’, select the same SV port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that both meter runs are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of I/O assignments.

Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers as needed.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


13


Technical Bulletin

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup menus become active. Data entries in these menus are: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Low Alarm Setpoint High Alarm Setpoint Override Value Override Code 0 1 2 3

= = = =

Never Use Override Value Always Use Override Value Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error Use Last Hour’s Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error

❑ 4mA Value (read only) ❑ 20mA Value (read only) ❑ Damping Code 0 1 2 3 4

= 0.108 Seconds5 = 3.456 Seconds = 0.216 Seconds6 = 6.912 Seconds = 0.432 Seconds7 = 13.824 Seconds = 0.864 Seconds (Default) 8 = 27.648 Seconds = 1.728 Seconds

All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only. While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The Low and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as they would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are monitored continuously.

Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed to match the flow computer’s configuration. The Omni continuously reads the following data: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

14

Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc) Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc) Manufacturers Code Transmitter Tags


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501


Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.

Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the Omni flow computer Modbus database as follows: Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run ‘n’ MODBUS ADDRESS

1n96 is flow ^ computer generated.

(SEE ALSO ‘FAILURE CODE SETTING’)

1n83

DP signal 10% above upper range limit

DP transmitter failure flagged

1n84

DP signal 10% below lower range limit

DP transmitter failure flagged

1n85

Pressure signal 10% above upper range limit

Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n86

Pressure signal 10% below lower range limit


1n87

Note:

ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE

ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION

Pressure sensor is shorted


1n88

Pressure sensor bridge is open circuit


1n89

Temperature signal 10% above upper range limit

Temperature transmitter failure flagged

1n90

Temperature signal 10% below lower range limit


1n91

Temperature RTD is disconnected


1n92

Sensor internal temperature above upper range limit

DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

1n93

Sensor internal temperature below upper range limit


1n94

Critical 3095FB sensor electronics failure


1n95

Security jumper of 3095FB is set to ‘Write Protect’

DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.

^ 1n96

No Communications between the Omni and 3095FB unit


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


15


Technical Bulletin

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the process variables and alarms. Notes: Numbers in ( ) are Modbus addresses within the 3095FB database

**

The flow computer will attempt to correct the database of the 3095FB transmitter if miss matches are detected for these variables.

*

The flow computer will adjust its database to agree with the 3095FB database if miss matches are detected for these variables.

Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are: ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

Floating Point Number Format ** (0132) Measurement Engineering Units of Measure ** (0060 - 0062) Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal * (7407 - 7416) Transmitter Identification (Information Only) (0001 - 0011) Damping Factors ** (7421, 7424, 7427) Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters) ** (0032 - 0047) Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction) (0017 - 0029)

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow Computer User Manual. A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing ‘Setup’ ‘n’ ‘Enter’. Data is organized by SV port number ‘n’ and in the order that the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):

st

1 digit is the SV port nd number, 2 digit is the Modbus Address of the 3095FB

16


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:

!" # $ %!! &'

()* + , - " " - *# ( - ! ". / 0 % .# . # ## . - 0 % . - ()* 1* ,# % # - (.23( 4 ()* 5 .# 5 / 5 5 5

Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters Wiring Issues If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made ‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual (publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB transmitter.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


17


Technical Bulletin

Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address of ‘1’. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the ‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some situations may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced without this software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can be connected to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV port and the Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer configuration.

CAUTION!

This procedure involves ‘broadcast’ transmitting a Modbus address out of a SV port. All devices connected to this SV port will have their Modbus address set to the ID broadcast. This would cause data collisions and a complete loss of communication when more than one 3095FB transmitter is connected. Be sure to temporarily disconnect any 3095FB transmitters which addresses you do not want to change.

Proceed as follows: 1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled ‘Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter’. 2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated. 3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B). The SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV channel is not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one needing the address change must be disconnected. 4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter. 5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys: [Alpha Shift] [Diag] [Setup] [n] [Enter]

The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode. Where ‘n’ is the SV port number that the 3095FB is connected to.

6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an example) or the screen in (7) below will display.

6 (7# 1 ) 1 #- . 89 1 # 3:54; This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in sidebar).

7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter ‘Y’ and the following screen will display.

6 17 - $ < 5= < > /

18


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501

Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues 8. Scroll down to ‘New Address’ and enter the address required. Press ‘Enter’ and the following message will display.

# - 5= < 9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If communications are established the following message will be displayed for a few seconds.

< 17 - The following message will display for a second or two should the transmission fail.

.# 17 - Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper settings and repeat the procedure. 10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.

Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the 3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the ‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. The user must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software. Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufacture’s warnings and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+


19


Date: 05

13

98


TB # 980503

Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options Contents User Manual Reference This technical bulletin complements the information contained in Volume 1, and is applicable to all firmware revisions.

Scope....................................................................................................................1 Abstract ................................................................................................................1 Features and Specifications...............................................................................2 Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ............................3 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .................................4 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .................................6 RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options................................................8

Scope All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities via proprietary serial I/O modules.

Abstract Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures three models of serial modules: ❑ Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 ❑ RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A ❑ RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

TB-980503 ALL REVS

1


Technical Bulletin

Features and Specifications Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:

Omni Serial I/O Modules MODEL #

TYPE

BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES ❑ Dual channel serial communications providing two RS-232-Compatible ports. ❑ Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

Dual Channel RS-232Compatible

68-6005

❑ Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232Compatible mode (jumper blocks are soldered in place).

68-6205-A

RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 (Non-selectable Ports)

❑ Port #2 is factory set to RS-485 mode. ❑ RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as: ♦ 2-wire terminated or non-terminated ♦ 4-wire terminated or non-terminated ❑ Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

68-6205-B

RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 (Selectable Ports)

❑ Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumperselectable as either RS-232-C or RS485 modes. ❑ RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as: ♦ 2-wire terminated or non-terminated ♦ 4-wire terminated or non-terminated ❑ Communications protocol, baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232Compatible serial port. Thirty-two devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE LOAD IMPEDANCE

RS-485

±7.5 volts (typical)

5 volts (differential driver)

1.5 k ohm

120 ohm

10 mA (limited)

20 mA

INPUT LOW THRESHOLD

-3.0 volts

0.8 volts (differential input)

INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD

+3.0 volts

5.0 volts (differential input)

SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT

BAUD RATES COMMON MODE VOLTAGE LEDS

2

RS-232-COMPATIBLE

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable) ±250 Volts to chassis ground channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals


TB-980503 ALL REVS

TB-980503

Serial I/O Module: Installation Options

Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232C serial port. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.

Address Selection Jumpers

Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual.

1

0

Address S1 (1) Selected for Serial Ports 1 & 2

Address S2 (0) Selected for Serial Ports 3 & 4

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. B

RTS Out TX Out

Chan. A

LED Indicators RX In RDY In

Chan. A

RX In RDY In

Chan. B

Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper and Indicator LEDs

TB-980503 ALL REVS


3


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232C serial port. Up to 32 devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-toPeer Basics” for more information. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed) is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and cannot be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for RS-485 communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.


Address S1 Selected for Serial Ports 1 & 2


Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual. For serial port jumper settings see also Fig. 6 in this bulletin.

IRQ Select Jumper IRQ 2 Selected (If using an SV Module, select IRQ 3)

LED Indicators

68-6205

REV: A

Port #2 (#4) Jumpers


(RS-485 Options Only)

(Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)

Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and Indicator LEDs

4


TB-980503 ALL REVS

TB-980503


The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This port is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial port jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions. This port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/non-terminated jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below. Micro Motion RFT 9739 Devices - Users of Micro Motion RFT 9739 devices connected to the peer-topeer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS485 and that Terminal A from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni Terminal B (7), and B from the RFT must be wired to Omni Terminal A (11). Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information.


First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

2

TERM

3

RX

RS-232-C

4

GND

Hard-wired

5

RTS

6

RDY

7

B

TX-B

8







RX-A

GND

GND

11

A

TX-A

12



RX-B

9 10

N/A

Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A

TB-980503 ALL REVS


5


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B INFO - Up to 12 flow computers and/or other compatible serial devices can be multi-dropped using Omni’s proprietary RS-232C serial port. Up to 32 devices may be connected when using the RS-485 mode. Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-toPeer Basics” for more information. Typically, one serial I/O module is used on the Omni 3000, providing two ports. A maximum of two serial modules can be installed in the Omni 6000, providing four ports.

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by Omni (1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial port is jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. In addition to the RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports are available on this model.




Jumper Settings - For information on setting the jumpers of serial I/O modules refer to 1.6.3. “Serial Communication Modules” in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of the User Manual. For serial port jumper settings see also Fig. 6 in this bulletin.

IRQ Select Jumper IRQ 2 Selected (If using an SV Module, select IRQ 3)

LED Indicators

68-6205

Port #2 (#4)Jumpers

REV: B


Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers and Indicator LEDs

6


TB-980503 ALL REVS

TB-980503


Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485 formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel wiring is shown below. Micro Motion RFT 9739 Devices - Users of Micro Motion RFT 9739 devices connected to the peer-topeer port (Port #2) of the Omni, please note that the resistor networks should be positioned for 2-wire RS485 and that Terminal A from the RFT 9739 should be wired to Omni Terminal B (7), and B from the RFT must be wired to Omni Terminal A (11). Refer to technical bulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics” for more information.


First Serial Port

Second Serial Port

RS-232-C

RS-485 2-Wire

RS-485 4-Wire

1

TX

B

TX-B

2

TERM





3

RX



RX-A

4

GND

GND

GND

5

RTS

A

TX-A

6

RDY



RX-B

7

TX

B

TX-B

8

TERM





9

RX



RX-A

10

GND

GND

GND

11

RTS

A

TX-A

12

RDY



RX-B

Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B

TB-980503 ALL REVS


7


Technical Bulletin

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options Serial Port I/O Software Settings - Each serial port is configurable via OmniCom software or the Omni front panel. Detailed information on how to configure these and other flow computer settings is available in Volume 3, Chapter 2 of the User Manual and in OmniCom Help.

The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485 communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4, JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS-232C position and cannot be changed by the user.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

RS-485

RS-485 2-WIRE

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 TERMINATED


JB2 or JB5


JB3 or JB6

JB1 or JB4

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-232/485 NON-TERMINATED RS-232

Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The RS-485 devices located at each extreme end of an RS485 run should be terminated. Note that the device located at an extreme end may or may not be an Omni Flow Computer.

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232


JB2 or JB5

RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-485 TERMINATED


JB3 or JB6

JB1 or JB4

RS-232/485 RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-232

JB2 or JB5

JB3 or JB6

RS-485 2-WIRE RS-232

RS-485 TERMINATED

Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

8


TB-980503 ALL REVS

LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) warrants all equipment manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such equipment was properly selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned, transportation prepaid, to Omni’s assembly plant within three (3) years after date of shipment, and is found after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired or replaced, at the sole option of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation, prepay and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow or incorporated by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by the original device manufacturer. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer. LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of, or connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed the price allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of Omni Flow shall terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow equipment or devices manufactured by third party manufacturers.

 1991-1998 Omni Flow Computers, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this document without notice. Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc. OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS) This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc., you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) grants to you the right to use one copy of Omni Flow software programs (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow. 2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media). 3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable programmable memory circuits (“EPROMs”). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by Omni Flow over a modem connection to magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of permanent transfer to EPROM’s. You may not retain a copy for backup or archival purposes.

LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility. Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is used. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE and accompanying hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS) This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) grants to you the right to use one copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow. 2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, you may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes. 3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on a permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, then you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the other disks on another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials

LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility. Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is used. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE, the accompanying written materials and hardware. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

Omni 6600

Recommend Documents